JP2024058489A - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine with a distinctive presentation means, as typified by slot machines and pachinko machines. [Solution] In a first game presentation, when a first operating means 1401 is operated in a first operating mode (operation mode of rotating downwards) during a valid operation period, an image corresponding to the first operating mode (hereinafter referred to as the "first image") (an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise) is displayed, and in a second game presentation, when the first operating means 1401 is operated in a second operating mode (operation mode of rotating upwards) during a valid operation period, an image corresponding to the second operating mode (hereinafter referred to as the "second image") (an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise) is displayed. [Selected Figure] Fig. 36

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as slot machines and pachinko machines.

Conventionally, slot machines and pachinko machines are known as examples of gaming machines. Slot machines use a predetermined number of gaming media, and when a start lever is operated, a lottery is held to determine an internal winning combination from among multiple combinations. They also spin multiple reels, stop the reels based on the determined internal winning combination and the result of operating the stop button, and award a profit according to the combination determined to be a winning combination based on the state of the stopped reels.

Pachinko machines also typically have obstacles in the playing area of the game board that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as prize holes, starting holes, variable prize holes, and other holes into which the game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these holes, the player is given a special privilege, such as the payment of a prize ball.

Among these gaming machines, those equipped with presentation means are known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2022-49657 A

However, there is room for improvement in the presentation of conventional gaming machines.

In view of the above, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with distinctive presentation means.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
A first operation means that can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation modes;
a presentation means capable of executing a first game presentation having an operation effective period during which the first operation means is effective;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a first operation mode during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the first operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "first image") is displayed,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the second operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "second image") is displayed.
It is characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with distinctive presentation means.

1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a line. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. A diagram for explaining the medal selector 170. (a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing the differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are figures showing examples of setting-related notifications (setting suggestion notifications, setting confirmation notifications). FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 8 is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 7; 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. 9; (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 13 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting to setting b through a setting change and the states of related components. 14A to 14C are diagrams each showing a schematic diagram of the state of components at each stage from (a) to (f) in FIG. 13. (a) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. 16A to 16C are diagrams each showing a schematic diagram of the state of components at each stage in FIG. 15. (a) is a table summarizing the state of the relevant components when a setting check is performed when the device is set to the default setting value, Setting 1, and (b) is a table summarizing the state of the relevant components when a setting check is performed in power saving mode when the device is set to Setting 1. 18A to 18C are diagrams each showing a schematic diagram of the state of components at each stage in FIG. 17. (a) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed when the device is set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed in power saving mode when the device is set to setting b. 20A to 20C are diagrams illustrating the configuration of components at each stage in FIG. 19. (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example, (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT1 and the high and low probability of winning, and (c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of role drawing in RT2 and the high and low probability of winning. A diagram showing an example of payout rates for RT1 and RT2. 13 is a table summarizing the states of related components when a first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after a setting change, a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, and the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning after power is restored. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are being settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. This table summarizes the status of the relevant components when a power outage occurs and is restored while inserted medals are being settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed after a setting change, and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after power is restored. 11 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after a setting change. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed and the game is transitioned to the second game state. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a single setting confirmation is performed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a single setting check is performed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and one game is played. 13 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. This table summarizes the states of the relevant components when a setting confirmation is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. This is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when a setting check is performed once, a medal is inserted while the front door 102 is in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and play is performed. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect will be executed at the end of the AT when no setting change has been made, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect will be executed at the end of the AT when a setting change has been made from setting 1. (a) is a figure showing a lottery table which determines whether or not setting suggestion effects, etc. can be executed at the end of the AT when the setting is changed from setting 2, and (b) is a figure showing a lottery table which determines whether or not setting suggestion effects, etc. can be executed at the end of the AT when the setting is changed from setting b. 1A is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect will be executed based on a character's lines, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect will be executed during a demo effect. A figure showing an example of a roulette effect executed as an additional effect on the number of games in the AT state. FIG. 39 shows a continuation of the roulette presentation shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a modified example of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a challenge effect for increasing the defeat rate. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a message presentation. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. A circuit block diagram of the control unit of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. 45 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44 expanded in a plane. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. A flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main processing, first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. 45A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, and FIG. 45B is a diagram explaining the character accompanying state of the slot machine shown in FIG. A figure showing characters displayed on the performance image display device in each character accompanying state of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. (a) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the accompanying lottery processing in the normal state of the advantageous zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, and (b) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the CZ transition lottery processing in the normal state of the advantageous zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. (a) is a figure showing a time chart and an example of a presentation when transitioning from a non-accompanying state to an accompanying state in the normal advantageous zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, and then transitioning to a non-accompanying state, and (b) is a figure showing a time chart when transitioning from an accompanying state of two characters to a non-accompanying state in the normal advantageous zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This is an example of the presentation in a specific game in the normal advantageous zone state of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This is an example of the presentation in a specific game in the normal advantageous zone state of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. (a) is a table that diagrammatically shows the character arrangement lottery processing in the CZ of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, (b) is a table that diagrammatically shows the selected character point lottery processing in the CZ of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, and (c) is a table that diagrammatically shows the AT lottery processing in the CZ of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This is a table showing the probability of winning the push order bell of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, the maximum number of coins paid out in the case of a correct operation, and the display mode and number of coins paid out for each operation content. This is an example of the presentation in a specific game of the CZ of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. (a) is a table showing a schematic diagram of the accompanying lottery processing in the normal AT state of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, and (b) is a table showing a schematic diagram of the number-addition lottery processing and specialized zone lottery processing in the normal AT state of the slot machine shown in Figure 44. This figure shows a time chart and presentation of a game in which the push order bell_LCR is won in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44 and an additional number of 123 coins is awarded. This figure shows a time chart and presentation of a game in which the push order bell_RLC is won in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44 and an additional number of 231 coins is awarded. This figure shows a time chart and presentation of a game in which the push order bell_RCL is won in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in Figure 44, a prize is awarded, and an additional amount of 321 coins is won. 1A is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion effect A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion effect B. FIG. A figure showing, in stages, an example in which setting suggestion display A is executed after setting suggestion display B is executed. 1A is a diagram showing a first modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a second modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A. FIG. A figure showing a third modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of added coins and the display mode in added-on performance 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example of determining an update interval when the first section includes 80 sheets. This is a diagram showing the stages of the appearance of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the added-on performance 1 in which the updated display of up to 80 coins is performed, as described using Figure 70. This figure shows a continuation from Figure 71. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a first modified example of a scaled display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a second modified example of an enlarged display. A figure showing an example of changing the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in added performance 1. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the final number of added coins and the display mode in added-on performance 2, (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the increased numerical value and the display mode of the added number of coins, and (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the added number of coins. This is a diagram showing the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in stages during added performance 2. A diagram showing the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in stages in a modified example of added performance 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment with the front door open. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing the pay lines of the slot machine according to the present embodiment and diagrams showing the operation of the liquid crystal display device. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine according to this embodiment, laid out in a plane. FIG. This is a table showing the display mode and payout number for each operation content of some of the winning roles (mainly push order roles) of the slot machine of this example. 11 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing in detail the flow of pseudo-game related processing in step S105 of Figure 85. 87 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start processing of the pseudo game in step S1002 of FIG. 86. A flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel stop control processing of the pseudo game in step S1003 of Figure 86. A flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo next game start processing of step S1004 in Figure 86. 86 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start processing in step S107 of FIG. 85. 91 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the random delay rotation start process in step S1407 of FIG. 90. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main processing, first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine of this example. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of the slot machine of this example. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing the display modes of the reels in a simulated game of the slot machine according to this example, and the presentation images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order. A flowchart showing in detail step S1203 of the reel stop control processing of the pseudo game of Figure 88. 13 is a diagram showing the time series of the progression of consecutive effects when a penalty occurs in the slot machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing the progression of effects in a game in which no penalty occurs in the slot machine according to this embodiment. 11 is a time chart showing the progress of presentation in a game in which a penalty occurs in the slot machine according to this embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a penalty game of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a notification mode of a recommended operation notification in the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device when a power outage/restoration occurs while the slot machine of this example is executing a recommended operation notification, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device when an error is detected while executing a recommended operation notification. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating another method of dealing with a penalty occurring during execution of a continuous performance in the slot machine according to the present embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating the display of the number of winning coins in the AT state of the slot machine in this example. FIG. 13 is a graph showing an example of an increase or decrease in the difference in number of coins when the AT state continues in a row in the slot machine of this example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case in which a discrepancy occurs between game progress and presentation progress in the conventional art.

Below, using Figures 1 to 43, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 43 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 1 to 43, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 43 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 1 to 43.

Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each start spinning when a predetermined spin start command is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the spin start command, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined spin stop command is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the lottery results match the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, the game ends without paying out any gaming media. The payout of the gaming media is sometimes called a profit. Also, something that makes it easier to obtain this profit is sometimes called a privilege.

This slot machine 100 comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member that is rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that the front door 102 cannot be opened by anyone other than a member of staff at the gaming establishment.

Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Figure 2 shows an example of a line.

To explain this in more detail using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 4 in the figure) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 7 in the figure) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the middle reel 111 (position 2 in the figure) is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom of the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbols displayed on the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure) are called the middle reel lower symbol, the symbols displayed on the top of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) are called the right reel upper symbol, the symbols displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) are called the right reel middle symbol, and the symbols displayed on the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called the right reel lower symbol. Each symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed three vertically on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. In addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Additionally, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the location of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured so that each symbol is shielded so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor (index sensor 730 shown in FIG. 4). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The active line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the active line 114. An active line is a line (a line where a winning judgment is made) on which it is judged whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed, and a winning is judged when a symbol corresponding to an internal winning combination stops on this active line. Here, a line is an area within the display window 113 that is defined as an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that lines other than the active lines on which a winning judgment is not made are called inactive lines.

Five lines are shown in FIG. 2: a middle line L1 consisting of the middle symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the middle symbol on the right reel; a downward-sloping line L2 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel; a right-sloping line L3 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; an upper line L4 consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the upper symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel; and a lower line L5 consisting of the lower symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the lower symbol on the right reel. These lines are merely examples, and any line that defines an area for one symbol on each of the reels 110 to 112 may be used, such as a line consisting of the upper symbol on the left reel, the lower symbol on the middle reel, and the upper symbol on the right reel.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special combination 1 (BB1), special combination 2 (BB2), replay combinations 1-3, and minor combinations 1-7 (e.g., watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be any combination.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, a special role) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a special game state, which will be described later, is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay role (details of which will be described later), which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing with three bets. However, it can also be played with two bets. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with three bets in a two-bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with two bets in a three-bet bonus internal win state, and the two-bet bonus internal win state is treated as the normal play state, so that players are encouraged to play with three bets whenever possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 142, into which a key is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and turned to the left to lock. The slot machine 100 is provided with an opening sensor 294 (see FIG. 3(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is open. This opening sensor 294 detects when the front door 102 is open by detecting an opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is open.

In addition, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal insertion slot 141. A first effect lamp is built into the first chance button 165, and a second effect lamp is built into the second chance button 166. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the effect. In addition, a left button 167 is provided to the left of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided to the right. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it is sometimes possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 may function as a confirmation button.

A title panel 162 is provided below the stop button unit 136, on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 162 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp 164. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

The sound hole 145 at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the low-frequency speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. The top lamp 144T at the top of the front door 102, the left side lamp 144L at the left side of the front door 102, and the right side lamp 144R at the right side are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the performance device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. The performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a performance image display device 157 disposed at the back side of the shutters 163. In FIG. 1, the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are in a state of being opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, and the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (the player side). The effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see the entire screen. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Also, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the decoration, the display screen may appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen is flat, but may be curved.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a rotating device 140, which is an operating means that can be operated by a player, is located on the right side of the front door 102. This rotating device 140 has a rotating body 1401 that can be rotated both downward and upward. The default (normal) rotation direction of the rotating body 1401 is downward. As shown in FIG. 1, an arrow indicating downward rotation is marked on the rotating body 1401.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp up until now is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, lamps also refer to devices that use LEDs as light sources, and other devices that emit light, such as fluorescent lamps and cold cathode fluorescent tubes, may also be referred to as lamps, and devices that emit light are examples of light-emitting means.

Figure 3 shows the internal configuration of the slot machine 100, where (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and (b) is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 disposed on the front door 102.

The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and a reel unit 700 equipped with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the side, a sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a sub-control board is arranged. A first selection switch 190 is provided in the sub-control board storage case 220. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a store clerk at a gaming establishment) can operate it by opening the front door 102, but a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (e.g., a player) cannot operate it. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided in a position where the player cannot operate it. By operating the first selection switch 190, the volume value of the sound (e.g., background music, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 can be changed, or a power saving mode can be set. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side. The external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG. 6.

In addition, a setting key switch 281 is provided on the right side of the reel unit 700 to change the game mode (also called the setting value) of the slot machine 100 and to confirm the changed setting value. Here, the setting value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, includes a value ("payout rate") for adjusting the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a specified period of time. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on/off by inserting and rotating a specific setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a specific setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, a setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor detects the OFF state.

The setting key switch 281, like the first selection switch 190 described above, is provided inside the main body 101, so it can only be operated by someone who can unlock the front door 102.

The main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (e.g., a hall computer) indicating that the setting key switch 281 has been turned on.

The setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

The lower panel 264 is provided with a hopper unit 180 (a device that dispenses medals accumulated in a bucket 181), and above the hopper unit 180, i.e., below the reel unit 700, a power supply device 252 having a power supply control board is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be used to turn the slot machine 100 on (power ON) or off (power OFF). The power switch 244 may be mounted on the power supply control board. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from outside the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a certain period of time (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls the performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a return passage 266 through which the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals and the like into the medal tray 161, and the like. The medal selector 170 will be described in more detail later. A low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. An open sensor 294 is provided on the back of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is disposed on the back of the front door 102 below the pattern display window 113. As shown in FIG. 3(b), this door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293. Like the setting key switch 281, etc., the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button switch, and by pressing (short press) this reset switch 291, an error in the slot machine 100 can be cleared. In addition, by pressing and holding (long press) the reset switch 291, the RAM of the main control unit can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is a push button switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using this setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display showing the game mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

The reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, but they may be provided on the main control board 300B. The setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

A rotation device 140 is disposed on the side of the front door 102 opposite the hinge device 276.

Figure 4 is a diagram explaining the medal selector 170.

Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 1. Also, in Figure 4, the medal selector 170 provided on the rear side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in Figure 3 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in the medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in Figure 4 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in a protruding state to pass through the return passage 266 and are discharged from the medal payout outlet 155. On the other hand, when the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. The protrusion of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and the retraction of the medal blocker 172 from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an actuation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) to guide the inserted medal to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, when an actuation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medal to the discharge passage 19b.

Figure 5 (a) is a table showing the display order of the setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, settings 4 to 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value that is initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, immediately after being shipped from the factory, after the RAM including the memory area that stores the setting values (RAM of the main control unit) is cleared, or when the backup power source that continues to store the setting values in the memory area is lost, setting 1 is displayed as the default setting value on the setting value display 293 and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in gaining profits is higher for setting 2 than for setting 1, higher for setting 4 than for setting 2, higher for setting 5 than for setting 4, and higher for setting 6 than for setting 5. In other words, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting in terms of the player gaining profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is less advantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's gaining profits. In other words, setting b is the least advantageous setting in terms of the player's gaining profits. Setting b is displayed on the 7-segment LED with a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to the most advantageous setting 6. In other words, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If a cheater performs a cheating operation thinking that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting, and as a result setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the cheater may mistake it for setting 6 and change the setting to setting b. In this case, a disadvantage can be caused to the cheater.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated as follows: 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2... by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" displayed first may be any order, and for example, the display on the setting value display 293 may be updated as follows: 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2....

Figure 5(b) is a table summarizing the performance differences for each setting value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called the ball output rate), performance B is the probability of hitting the special role (BB) for the first time, performance C is the probability of hitting the AT (assist time) for the first time, performance D is the probability of the AT continuing, performance E is the expected number of coins won in the AT, performance F is the probability of hitting a small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the frequency and probability of a notification suggesting a setting value (setting suggestion notification), and performance H is the frequency and probability of a setting suggestion notification as a confirmed notification. Performances A to F correspond to performances that indicate the degree of advantage in terms of the player's profit acquisition, and as mentioned above, the relationship is setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

On the other hand, it may be the case that the payout rate is low but that it is more favored than setting 1 in certain aspects. For example, it may be easier to hit a bonus or AT with setting b than with setting 1, but the AT is harder to continue, so that setting b may end up with a lower payout rate than setting 1. Also, it may be easier to hit a bonus or AT with setting b than with settings 2 or 3 or higher, but the AT is harder to continue, so that setting b may end up with a lower payout rate than settings 2 or 3.

In the setting suggestion notification of performance G, a notification suggesting the currently set setting value is made using the performance image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, the upper speaker 272, etc. The setting suggestion notification here includes a notification in which a lamp is simply turned off or a warning sound is output, as well as a setting suggestion effect such as a setting suggestion animation being displayed on the performance image display device 157. In addition, even when a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting related effect, setting related notification). Furthermore, even when a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification is made that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification). When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of a demonstration animation (demo animation) on the performance image display device 157, and when a setting value other than setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be lit at the start of the demo animation. The demo animation starts when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ended (after the third stop was performed) without inserting a medal (betting operation). In addition, when power is restored (power is turned on) without betting operation being performed at the time of power outage, the demo animation starts, but when a setting change is started, the demo animation starts after the setting change is completed. In addition, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, when the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification is performed 100%. On the other hand, when a setting value other than the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. In addition, when the setting b is set, the setting b confirmation notification may be performed once per predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). In addition, when the setting b is set, the setting suggestion notification such as "It may be the setting b" may not be performed, and only the setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when the setting b is set, the notification mode may include content suggesting that it is disadvantageous to the player (for example, text display or voice output such as "The tough battle will continue"). The probability of execution (frequency of occurrence) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) described above is higher when setting b is set than when any other setting value (settings 1, 2, 4-6) is set, and is roughly the same for all setting values other than setting b.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only a notification suggesting only setting b (setting b confirmed notification not suggesting settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) may be made as a setting suggestion notification, and when a setting value other than setting b is set, a notification suggesting a setting value other than the set may also be made as a setting suggestion notification. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd confirmed notification notifying that an odd setting value is set, and when setting 2 is set, an even confirmed notification notifying that an even setting value is set may be made. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmed notification or a setting 4 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 4 or higher is set, a setting 2 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 2 or higher is set, and a setting 5 or higher confirmed notification notifying that a setting value of 5 or higher is set may also be made. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a performance that notifies only setting 6 (setting 6 confirmed notification) may be made with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmed notification. The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) described above is highest when setting b is set (e.g., 100% or nearly 100%), followed by when setting 6 is set (e.g., 50%), and when the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, 5) are set, the execution probability is approximately the same (e.g., 30%), but lower than when setting 6 is set.

Figures 5(c) to 5(f) are diagrams showing examples of setting-related notifications (setting suggestion notifications, setting confirmation notifications) using the effect image display device 157, which may be made when the chance zone ends, the battle effect ends, the BB ends, the AT ends, etc. The setting-related notifications here are a type of notification effect.

Figure 5(c) is a diagram showing an example of an even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in Figure 5(c), the words "Maybe even number setting" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. This text display "Maybe even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting), and the line "Maybe even number setting" corresponds to an example of character line B shown in Figure 37(a). Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be made only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may also be made when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). In this case, the setting value may be more easily notified when it is an even number setting than when it is an odd number setting.

5(d) is a diagram showing an example of a setting 5 or more suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(d), the text "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" is displayed to the right of the panda character PND. This text display "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 5 or 6, and the line "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" corresponds to an example of character line G shown in FIG. 37(a). Note that this setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be made only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may be made when the setting value is 4 or less. In this case, the setting value may be more likely to be notified when it is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or less. Note that when the setting value is 4 or less, setting b may or may not be included.

5(e) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that the setting is 2 or higher. In the performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(e), the characters "Oh, it's time for a business review" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The characters "Oh, it's time for a business review" themselves are a notification that suggests the setting is 2 or higher, and the line "Oh, it's time for a business review" corresponds to an example of the character line F shown in FIG. 37(a). After that, the grandmother character BBA appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and the business review is carried out. The grandmother character BBA displays the characters "Does it have to be 1? Is it okay if it's 2 or higher?" as the line for the business review. The notification by this line denies that the setting is 1, and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. The notification that the setting is 2 or higher may be made only when the setting is 2 or higher, or may be made even when the setting is 1. Alternatively, when the setting is 1, the grandmother character BBA may not appear.

5(f) is a diagram showing an example of a setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(f), first, the words "Oh, it's God's revelation" are displayed to the right of the panda character PND. The words "Oh, it's God's revelation" themselves correspond to a notification suggesting setting b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen and issues a message. The god character KGG displays the words "It's going to be a tough battle" as a message. This message is a notification that confirms that the setting is b, and corresponds to an example of the setting suggestion image H shown in FIG. 35, etc. Note that the setting b confirmation notification is only issued when the setting is b, and is not issued when the other setting values are used. However, when the setting value is other than setting b, the words "Oh, it's God's revelation" are displayed together with the panda character PND, and the god character KGG may not appear.

The above has been explained as including a setting suggestion notification with a setting suggestion effect, and a setting confirmation notification with a setting confirmation effect, but a setting suggestion notification may be interpreted as a setting suggestion effect, and a setting confirmation notification may be interpreted as a setting confirmation effect.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value) in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set game mode. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting confirmation process that allows the setting value to be confirmed is started by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the setting value will be explained. The setting key (not shown) is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), and the power switch 244 is switched from a power-off state (power OFF) to a power-on state (power ON), thereby enabling the setting value change (starting the setting value change process). Each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the game mode (setting value) changes in the following order: 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ..., allowing the desired game mode to be selected. The game mode (setting value) selected at that time is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. Finally, the setting key is turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF) to end the setting value change process.

The period during which the setting value is changed, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value change operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also called the setting value change mode, and the period during which the setting value is checked, i.e., the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value check operation to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key, is also called the setting value check mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value check will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and setting value check mode described in detail using FIG. 3 may also be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control section 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control section 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section consisting of the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the presentation of the game.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel pattern arrangements, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors the sensors and transmits drive pulses in response to the interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from hopper unit 180, left reel 110 index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals stored electronically in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the center reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and turn to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it turns to L level until it turns to L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors provided for each reel 110-112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the hopper unit 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 339 (valid line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3). The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, the lighting pattern of the backlight module 740, and data for controlling various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418. The upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 are connected to this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first performance lamp built into the first chance button 165, second performance lamp built into the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and this drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time. The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a switch sensor 427, which detects the pressing of the first chance button 165. The switch sensor 427 also detects the pressing of each button of the second selection switch 194, which is made up of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Furthermore, the rotating device 140 shown in FIG. 1 has a built-in sensor that detects the rotation and direction of the rotating body 1401, and the detection signal from the sensor is output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 429 shown in FIG. 6. The CPU 404 monitors the reception of this detection signal at each interrupt time.

The first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, but this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426.

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Processing Overview>
Below, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Note that Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main process.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start-up signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, in step S101, the main control unit initial setting process is performed. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 9.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, a check is made to see if medals have been inserted (by hand or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating this. If a replay was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. In addition, a check is made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated after the specified number of medals (2 or 3) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning lines are confirmed, and the game begins.

In step S105, various lottery processes are executed, including the internal winning lottery process.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning role lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S109, on the condition that the play interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, and an initial value is set to the play interval timer. When the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The play interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one play (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S111, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S113, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination that entails a payout has been achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process is executed to update various states in the slot machine 100.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Note that Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processing is performed according to the interrupt status.

In step S209, a timer update process is performed. For example, a process is executed to update various timers according to their respective time units, such as subtracting from the game interval timer.

In step S211, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for sending by the main processing of the main control unit 300, timer interrupt processing, etc., are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, start lever acceptance command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with the acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, first to third stop commands associated with the stopping of the reels 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with the medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, acquired point command, setting change command, power recovery command), and command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original values in each register. Then, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 7.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power outage processing has been performed is set to ON.

Next, the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process in FIG. 7 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG. 7.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, startup initial settings are performed. In this initial setting, processes such as setting the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting the interrupt mask, initial setting the I/O 310, and initial setting the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are performed.

In step S1003, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON, that is, whether the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (if the CPU 304 detects a power interruption), this step S1003 is executed repeatedly, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if the CPU 304 does not detect a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that even if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is executed repeatedly until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 3 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process proceeds to step S1013; if not, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 3 is on. If this switch is on, the process proceeds to step S1009; if not, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, RAM 308 is initialized, and the main control unit initial setting process is terminated. Note that, for example, during this initialization, the setting values are erased.

In step S1011, a RAM data write-back process is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the data stored in RAM 308. The data determined here is data that was saved to RAM 308 when the power to slot machine 100 was turned off or due to a momentary interruption (a voltage drop below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 8). In other words, in this step S1011, it is determined whether or not the data has been reliably saved to RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both determinations are normal, it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restored data in RAM 308.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the return data of the RAM 308, a process is executed to return the state of the register to the state immediately before the power cut process is executed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut is read, and the stack pointer is reset (main setting). In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of the power cut are read, and each register is reset, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and register after resetting, and the slot machine 100 returns to the state at the time of the power cut. In other words, the process is resumed from the command next to the command executed immediately before the power cut and the branch to the timer interrupt process. Furthermore, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the state at the time of the power cut has been restored. This power recovery command contains information such as the RT at the time of power outage, game status, and presentation status, and is sent by the main control unit timer interrupt process (step S211 in Figure 8).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all memory areas of RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the system transitions to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). From this state, it is necessary to turn the power back on with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. In other words, this embodiment is configured so that the progress of the game is stopped if an error occurs in RAM 308.

In step S1005, if the setting key switch 281 is on, the process proceeds to step S1013, where setting change processing is performed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and the main control unit initial setting processing is terminated. Details of this setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 10.

Next, the details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 10. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG. 9.

First, in step S1101, which is executed first, the data in RAM 308 is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the setting values.

In step S1103, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that a setting change has begun to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 8), and the process proceeds to step S1105. As a result, a display indicating that a setting change is in progress is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to "setting change in progress" and the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, the provisional setting value is set as the display setting value. This process displays the provisional setting value on the setting value display 293. Then, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1111; if not, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1111, the provisional setting values are updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the provisional setting values are updated one by one according to the display order described with reference to FIG. 5(a), and when the setting switch is operated while the provisional setting value is b, the provisional setting value is set to 1. After this, the process proceeds to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1115; if not, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process is executed to confirm the provisional setting value as the setting value, and the process proceeds to step S1117. That is, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. When the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 displays a display indicating that the setting value has been confirmed (here, the number 0). Note that when the setting value is confirmed, the setting value display 293 may continue to display the confirmed setting value, may switch to a flashing display, or may become invisible.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S1119; if not, step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparations are made to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 8). As a result, the display indicating that the setting change is in progress on the performance image display device 157 ends. Also, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before it was changed in step S1105. After this process, the setting change process ends.

In the end condition of the setting change process shown in FIG. 10, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the end condition may be that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Also, the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, but the setting value may also be confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 11. Note that Figure 11 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 11 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 11 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are made. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in RAM 408 are initialized. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408. The presentation state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Also, if a backup was performed when the power was cut off, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S307, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, performance control processing is performed. This includes processing to expand the performance data, setting device data in a performance execution area provided in RAM 408, setting performance data in a performance reservation area provided in RAM 408, and further processing to set performance data and execute control processing based on received commands, information contained in those commands, and detection signals acquired in step S333 (described below). Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the performance content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the obtained control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute a sound performance.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each of the lamps 420, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to cause the lamps to perform a performance.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is obtained from the device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the obtained control data is output to the drive circuit 424, thereby causing the shutter 163 to perform a performance.

In step S317, an information output process is performed to set up the transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408. For example, if a setting change command has been received, the setting change command is stored in the command memory area.

Next, using FIG. 11(c), the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S331, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 11(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S317 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, the random number values for performance are updated, and so on. Also, for example, if a setting change command is stored in the command memory area, the fact that the setting has been changed is updated and recorded in RAM 408. Also, the setting change command includes information indicating the setting values before and after the setting change, and this information is also recorded in RAM 408. Furthermore, for example, if a detection signal is sent from a sensor built into the rotation device 140, the detection signal is acquired and recorded in RAM 408.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 12. Figure 12(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 12(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 12(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 12(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 in FIG. 12(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 508 are initialized. If a backup was performed when the power was cut off, the information backed up in step S301 is restored.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if the performance data read out in step S409 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 12(d). When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 12(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S417, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 12(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S419, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

Next, we will explain how to change the settings in the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 1. The setting change process is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in Figure 3 and rotating it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

Figure 13 is a table summarizing the steps to change the setting to setting b and the state of the related components. In Figure 13, each stage is numbered from (a) to (shi), and time passes in alphabetical order. Figure 14 is a diagram that shows the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (shi) in Figure 13.

In FIG. 13, the components are shown as power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speakers). In FIG. 14, the setting value display 293, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R, and speakers (272, 277) are each shown in schematic form.

In FIG. 13(A), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, so it remains off. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain off and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277). In FIG. 14(A) and (B), the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are shown unlit and in solid white (the same applies below).

In FIG. 13 (A), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated to the right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. In other words, the setting key switch 281 is on before the power is turned on. Note that, since the power is not turned on before the front door 102 is opened, no detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294.

In FIG. 13 (c), the setting key switch 281 is on and the power switch 244 is on (power on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts to output an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. In FIG. 14 (c), the title panel lamp 164 is shown lit in white by hatching downward to the left (the same applies below). As described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and rotating it to the right to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. When the setting change process starts, the RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. In addition, when the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the performance image display device 157 to notify the user that the setting is being changed, and a sound ("Setting change in progress") is output from the speakers (272, 277) to notify the user that the setting is being changed.

In FIG. 13 (E), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 shows "2" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 13 (E), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and the setting value display 293 shows "4" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 13 (f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and the setting value display 293 shows "5" as the provisional setting value.

In FIG. 13(g), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, and the setting value display 293 displays a setting of 6 as a provisional setting value, and in FIG. 13(h), the setting change button 292 is pressed once more, and the setting value display 293 displays "b" as a provisional setting value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 14(g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 14(h), the only difference is whether the A segment is lit or not, and an unauthorized person attempting to fraudulently change the setting value may mistake the "b" display for a "6" display.

In FIG. 13(K), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the number 0, which indicates that the set value is confirmed, is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, the setting is confirmed as setting b. When the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Alternatively, the set value may not be confirmed by operating the start lever 135, but the setting key switch 281 may be turned off to confirm the set value.

In FIG. 13 (K), the setting key inserted in the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process is terminated (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and the seven segments of the setting value display 293 are turned off and hidden. In addition, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the display of the demo animation starts immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, the display of the demo animation starts after the setting change process is completed. In this case, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. Alternatively, the display of the demo animation may be played immediately after the power is turned on, but it was not visible because the display during the setting change overlapped, and it may become visible from the scene when the display during the setting change disappeared. In addition, the voice from the speaker (272, 277) is switched to a voice saying "The door is open" to warn that the front door 102 is open. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 14 (K), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are lit in the demo pattern by hatching in a grid pattern (the same applies below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 was lit during the setting change, but when the setting change is completed, it is turned off and the off state is maintained until a medal is inserted (until a bet number of 1 or more is set). The turning off of the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to a notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, a notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). Additionally, since the title panel lamp 164 normally remains lit, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be taken as a warning of an abnormality (a warning of an abnormal setting value).

In FIG. 13 (sa), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice message saying "The door is closed." The performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the title panel lamp 164 remains off.

In FIG. 13 (C), a medal is inserted. That is, the medal is tamped or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background for the normal performance (normal background display). Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern). In FIG. 14 (C), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown by cross-hatching when they are lit up in the normal pattern (the same applies below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which had been off, also starts to light up. The title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, or may remain off when a coin is inserted and start to light up when play begins (operation of the start lever 135), or may start to light up at the third stop of the first game, or may start to light up when the payout of the first game is completed.

Figure 15(a) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In Figure 15(a), each stage is assigned a code from (Ta) to (Nu), and time passes in alphabetical order. Figure 16 also shows a schematic diagram of the state of the components at each stage from (Ta) to (Nu) in Figure 15(a).

Figure 15(a) also shows the same items as Figure 13 as component items, and Figure 16(a) shows each component diagrammatically in the same way as Figure 14.

Figure 15 (Ta) may be a continuation of Figure 13 (Si), where game play has already started with setting b set. In other words, this is the case when game play has started ignoring the notification by the title panel lamp 164 going off. In this Figure 15 (Ta), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 15 (H), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the third stop without inserting a coin. Then, the performance image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demo animation display. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R switch from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the performance image display device 157 starts displaying the demo animation, the title panel lamp 164 goes out and the setting-related notification returns. Note that, not limited to the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157, when a demo performance starts or when the demo state is entered in general, the title panel lamp 164 may go out and the setting-related notification may start.

In FIG. 15 (Tsu), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which was turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts to light up in the door open pattern. In FIG. 16 (Tsu), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are shown with hatching slanting downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit up in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by the cross-hatching in FIG. 14 (Shi). Since the front door 102 is opened, there is a possibility that the settings will be changed, and the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. The speaker (272, 277) starts to output a voice saying "The door is opening." Note that the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, but the text "Door Opening" may be displayed together with the demo animation.

In FIG. 15 (T), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) passes after the front door 102 is opened without any setting change. To change the setting, the power switch 244 must be turned off and the setting key switch 281 must be turned on. If the power switch 244 is not turned off before the predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed, the title panel lamp 164 turns off again and a setting-related notification starts. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the setting. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R switch from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting to match the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157. In other words, the warning notification for the predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) due to the door open pattern lighting ends, and the demo pattern lighting returns.

In FIG. 15 (g), the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switching to an L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice message saying "The door is closed." The performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to light up in the demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 also continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be issued.

In FIG. 15 (Na), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG. 15 (Tsu) described above.

In FIG. 15 (ii), the front door 102 closes again one second after it is opened in FIG. 15 (n). The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (high-level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from a voice saying "The door is open" to a voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light in the door open pattern for the above-mentioned predetermined time after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 does not start until the above-mentioned predetermined time has passed since the front door 102 was opened. The demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157.

In FIG. 15(n), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 in FIG. 15(n) was opened. As a result, the predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any setting changes, so the title panel lamp 164 goes out and a setting-related notification starts. The top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R switch from door open pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting to match the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157. Note that the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 in FIG. 15(n) can be seen as the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 starting a setting-related notification because the front door 102 was closed with the setting set to b and no medals were inserted until the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed. If a medal was inserted before the above-mentioned predetermined time had passed, the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 going out would not start.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a) described above, when the demo animation starts with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 goes out (FIG. 15(c)). However, the title panel lamp 164 may also be turned off under other conditions. For example, the title panel lamp may also be turned off when a non-recommended game state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal game state is entered (for example, after the player releases the third stop button without following a specific push order navigation). In the non-recommended game state, no lotteries including AT lotteries are performed, and the number of medals of the player is maintained or slightly decreased, but since the non-recommended game state continues until the specified number of medals is paid out, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state where medals can be increased. When the non-recommended game state is entered, a suggestion display indicating that the game state is non-recommended may be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and this suggestion display may be continuously displayed during the non-recommended game state (from winning the penalty bonus to the end of the penalty bonus). In addition, in the non-recommended play state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during play and non-play. Note that the game may enter the non-recommended play state regardless of the setting value (even if it is other than setting b), or the game may enter the non-recommended play state only when the setting value is set to setting b.

Figure 15 (b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the settlement operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In this Figure 15 (b), starting from (ta) in the same state as (ta) shown in the same figure (a), the settlement button 134 is operated at the timing of (ne) one second after (ta). That is, the settlement operation is performed before the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without inserting a medal after the third stop. When the settlement operation is performed, the display of the demo animation starts on the performance image display device 157. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the settlement pattern. Furthermore, the sound of the game medium being dispensed is output from the speakers (272, 277). Also, Figure 16 (ne) shows the state of the components in Figure 15 (ne) in a schematic manner. In FIG. 16 (N), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are shown lit in a settlement pattern by horizontal hatching (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross-hatching in FIG. 14 (S).

In Figure 15 (No), the payout of the gaming media is completed. Figure 16 (No) shows a schematic of the components in Figure 15 (No). Even after the payout is completed, the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. Meanwhile, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R switch from being lit in the settlement pattern to being lit in the demo pattern to match the display of the demo animation on the performance image display device 157. Note that output from the speakers (272, 277) stops.

The conditions under which the title panel lamp 164 is turned off as explained above can be summarized as follows: when the setting key switch 281 is turned off with setting b set (Fig. 13 (K)); when a demo animation is started with setting b set (Fig. 15 (H); note that Fig. 13 (K) has the same effect); and when a payout in response to the settlement operation is completed with setting b set (Fig. 15 (F)).

Figure 17(a) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when checking the settings with the default setting value of Setting 1. In Figure 17(a), each stage is assigned a code from (ha) to (he), and time passes in alphabetical order. The top part of Figure 18 also shows a schematic of the state of the components at each stage from (ha) to (he) in Figure 17(a).

(C) in Figure 17(a) is the same state as (T) in Figure 15(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 was opened. The difference from (T) is that the setting value is not set to setting b, so the title panel lamp 164 does not turn off and remains lit in white. Note that the title panel lamp 164 does not light up in a demo pattern, but this may be done, in which case the white light becomes the demo pattern light. In Figure 18(C), the title panel lamp 164 lit up in white is shown by hatching slanting downwards to the left.

In FIG. 17(a), (H) inserts the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turns it clockwise, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, when the power is on, the setting key switch 281 turns on, and setting value confirmation starts. The setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "1". In addition, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the setting is being confirmed, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("Confirming the setting") to notify that the setting is being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 18(H) displays the current setting value "1". Additionally, the title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 18 (H) are all lit in white.

(F) in FIG. 17(a) is the same as (K) in FIG. 15(a), in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off. The difference from (K) is that the setting confirmation ends, not the setting change, and that the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In FIG. 18(F), the setting value display 293 is not displayed. Also, of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) have switched to a demo pattern light represented by grid-like hatching.

(F) in Figure 17(a) is the same state as (Sa) shown in Figure 15(a) in which the front door 102 is closed, and the difference from (Sa) is that the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white here as well.

Figure 17(b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when checking the settings in power saving mode with setting 1 set. In this Figure 17(b), each stage is assigned a code from (ka) to (ke), and time passes in alphabetical order. The bottom part of Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the state of the components in each stage from (ka) to (ke) in Figure 17(b).

(K) in FIG. 17(b) is the same as (K) in FIG. 17(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and it differs from (K) in the following ways. First, as explained with reference to FIG. 17(h), the demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 is displayed darker (dimmed) than in non-power saving mode. Also, the title panel lamp 164 is still lit in white, but its brightness is lower (dimmed). Meanwhile, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 18(K) shows that the display screen of the performance image display device 157 is dark, and the title panel lamp 164 is also dark. Also shown is the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R being turned off.

In (k) in Figure 17(b), like (hi) in Figure 17(a), the power is on and the setting key switch 281 is turned on, starting confirmation of the setting values. Even if the power saving mode is set, the light is not dimmed or turned off during confirmation of the settings, just like in non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in Figure 18(k) is the same as the appearance of each component shown directly above in (hi) in the same figure.

At (hu) in FIG. 17(b), like (hu) in FIG. 17(a), the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state and the setting check is complete. With the setting check complete, each component has returned to a state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 18(hu), the display screen of the performance image display device 157 that has started displaying the demo animation goes dark, and the title panel lamp 164 also goes dark. Additionally, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off.

In Figure 17(b), (K) is the same state as (F) in Figure 17(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The performance image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) have not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state (K) when the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Figure 19(a) is a table summarizing the states of the related components when checking the settings with setting b set. In Figure 19(a), time passes in the order of (te), (bi), (ko), and (sa).

(Te) in Figure 19(a) is the same as (Te) shown in Figure 15(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and it is exactly the same state as (Te). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and a demo animation is displayed on the performance image display device 157. In addition, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (B) in FIG. 19(a), when the power is on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on and the setting value check is started. The only difference from (H) in FIG. 17(a) is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (B) in FIG. 19(a), the setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "b". The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 20(B) displays the current setting value "b". As in FIG. 18(H), in FIG. 20(B), the performance image display device 157 displays a setting check display, and the speakers (272, 277) also output a sound such as "Settings are being checked". In addition, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(K) in FIG. 19(a) is the same as (K) in FIG. 13, in that the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and is in exactly the same state as (K). In other words, since setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and a setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 19(a) is the same as (Sa) in FIG. 13, in that the front door 102 is closed, and is in exactly the same state as (Sa). In other words, the title panel lamp 164 remains off, and setting-related notifications continue to be issued.

Figure 19(b) is a table summarizing the state of the related components when checking the settings in power saving mode with setting b set. In this Figure 19(b), each stage is assigned a code from (ga) to (ge), and time passes in alphabetical order. The bottom part of Figure 20 is a diagram showing the state of the components in each stage from (ga) to (ge) in Figure 19(b).

(ga) in FIG. 19(b) is the same as (te) in FIG. 19(a), 30 seconds after the front door 102 was opened, and differs from (te) in the following ways. First, the demo animation displayed on the performance image display device 157 is dimmed (dimmed) compared to when in non-power saving mode. In addition, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 20(ga) shows the display screen of the performance image display device 157 being dark. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off, and a setting-related notification is being issued. In addition, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

In (g) in FIG. 19(b), like (b) in FIG. 19(a), the power is on and the setting key switch 281 is on, and setting value confirmation has begun, which is exactly the same as (b). In other words, even if the power saving mode is set, the light is not dimmed or turned off during setting confirmation, and it is the same as in non-power saving mode. Note that the display contents of the setting value display 293 are different from (g) in FIG. 17(b). That is, "b" is displayed, as in the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 20(g).

At (ku) in FIG. 19(b), like (ko) in FIG. 19(a), the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state and the setting confirmation is complete. By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 20(ku), the display screen of the performance image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is dark, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (ku) in FIG. 17(b). That is, because setting b has been set, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and a setting-related notification is being executed, as shown in FIG. 20(ku).

In Figure 19(b), (ge) is the same state as (sa) in Figure 19(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The performance image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) have not been dimmed or turned off since the previous state (gu) when the setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, we will explain a modified example of the slot machine 100 shown in Figure 1.

<Regarding the magnitude of payout rates>
First, examples of winning probability and state transition of winning combination groups are shown, and a slot machine that can converge the payout rate to a suitable range by devising the relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all combinations including replays that are replay combinations and the actual payout rate that takes into account combinations other than replays is described. Specifically, in the slot machine of this modification, as a situation that can be controlled according to the progress of the game, a first situation (RT2 to be described later) in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, and a second situation (RT1 to be described later) that is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate are provided, so that the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range. Note that the slot machine of this modification also has the technical matters described using FIG. 1 to FIG. 20.

Here, the payout rate refers to the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the minor winning combinations stop by the total number of medals bet as set as the bet amount. The total payout rate taking into account all winning combinations refers to the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as if, for example, when a replay is won in a game with three bets, three medals are paid out for the replay and three medals are bet in the next game. In contrast, the effective payout rate taking into account winning combinations other than replay refers to the payout rate (second payout rate) calculated as if, for example, when a replay is won in a game with three bets, zero medals are paid out for the replay and zero medals are bet in the next game.

Figure 21 (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the slot machine in this modified example. In the slot machine in this modified example, the game state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT0, which is the base game state (for example, a state in which most of the game is consumed, or a state to which a transition is made due to a setting change), RT1, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role A in RT0, and RT2, which is transitioned to by winning a predetermined transition role B in RT0. In all of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting three coins as the number of bets. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game will transition back to RT0 by playing 100 games, which is set as the prescribed number of games. In RT0 in the slot machine in this modified example, in addition to transition roles A and B, a role lottery is held to determine whether or not a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc. will be won, and the payout rate is set to be less than 1. In addition, in the slot machine of this modification, if a bonus combination is won, regardless of whether it is RT0 to RT2, the game state transitions to a bonus state where the payout rate is 1 or more; however, for convenience of explanation, this is omitted from FIG. 21(a). Note that the slot machine of this modification may transition between game states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

Figure 21(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT1 and the high and low probability of winning. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, 3-coin roles with a payout of 3 coins, and minor roles including push order roles that can pay out 15 coins are set to be the subject of the role lottery. The 3-coin role will always win in a game that is won, regardless of the push order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, the push order role will win and pay out 15 coins when operated in a specified push order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), but will not win if the push order is not operated (it may be possible to win other roles (e.g. 1-coin role), etc.).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". Therefore, the probability of winning the bonus role in RT1 is set to two stages: when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and when the set value is "4" to "6". In addition, the probability of winning the replay b among the replay roles is set to be low (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the set value, while the probability of winning the push order role among the small roles is set to be high (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Note that even if the push order role is won in RT1, the navigation performance that can identify the advantageous operation mode will not be executed (i.e., it will not be controlled by the AT). Therefore, even if the push order role is won, for example, there is a 1/6 probability of winning and a 5/6 probability of not winning.

In contrast, the winning probability of the replay a among the replay roles and the winning probability of the 3-coin role among the minor roles are set so that the combined winning probability is uniform (e.g., 50/200, etc.), but the ratio of the winning probability of the replay a and the 3-coin role differs for each setting value. Specifically, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the winning probability of the replay a is low (e.g., 15/200, etc.) while the winning probability of the 3-coin role is high (e.g., 35/200, etc.). When the setting values are "1" and "5", the winning probability of the replay a and the 3-coin role are both medium (e.g., 25/200, etc.). When the setting values are "2" and "4", the winning probability of the replay a is high (e.g., 35/200, etc.) while the winning probability of the 3-coin role is low (e.g., 15/200, etc.).

Figure 21 (c) is a diagram for explaining some of the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT2 and the high and low winning probabilities. In RT2, as in RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, 3-coin roles with 3 payouts, and minor roles including push order roles that can pay out 15 coins are set to be the subject of the role lottery. The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher (for example, 45/200) than in RT1, but the winning probability of other roles is set to be the same as in RT1. In addition, when a push order role is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation performance that allows the advantageous operation mode to be specified is executed. Therefore, when a push order role is won in RT2, unless the operation mode is incorrect, the push order role will be won and 15 medals will be paid out. Note that the roles that are the subject of the role lottery in RT2 are not limited to those that are set the same as those in RT1, and may be set differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the combined winning probability of Replay A and 3-coin roles (which is also the combined winning probability because a winning combination always wins) is uniform regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate and the actual payout rate, it differs for each setting value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the winning probability of Replay A is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small, whereas when the setting values are "1" and "5", the difference is relatively large, and when the setting values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is at its maximum. In addition, for all of the setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6 that affect the winning probability of the bonus role, the settings are set to include a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate relatively small, a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate relatively large, and a setting value that makes the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate at its maximum.

An example of the payout rate of RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The number of medals used for the bet setting is 3, and FIG. 22 illustrates a case where no bonus role is won in RT1 and RT2. The winning probability of a replay during RT1 when either the set value "b" or "6" is set is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), so an average of 10 wins can be expected during 100 games (G). For this reason, FIG. 22 (a) shows an example of the "total number of IN coins", "actual number of IN coins", "total number of OUT coins", and "actual number of OUT coins" when a replay wins 10 times during 100 games (G) when either the set value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, and shows the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers. Both "total IN number" and "actual IN number" are the number of medals used to set the bet number, but they differ in that "total IN number" includes the number of bets automatically set after a replay is won, while "actual IN number" is the number excluding the number of bets automatically set after a replay is won (the number of bets after a replay is won as "0"). Also, both "total OUT number" and "actual OUT number" are the number of medals paid out with a small win, but "total OUT number" is the number of medals paid out when a replay is won, as if 3 were paid out when a replay is won, while "actual IN number" is the number of medals paid out when a replay is won.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), if 10 replays are won in RT1 spanning 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins) and the "effective number of IN coins" will be "270" (=300 coins - 10 times x 3 coins). Also, the "total number of OUT coins" will be "150", and the "effective number of OUT coins" in this case will be "120" (=150 - 10 times x 3 coins). Therefore, the effective payout rate will be 0.444 (≒120÷270), while the total payout rate will be 0.500 (=150÷300).

Next, FIG. 22(b) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 20/100 (= (35 + 5)/200), so an average of 20 wins can be expected over 100 games (G). For this reason, FIG. 22(b) shows an example of the "total number of IN coins," "actual number of IN coins," "total number of OUT coins," and "actual number of OUT coins" when 20 replay wins are achieved over 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set, and shows the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers. As shown in FIG. 22(b), if 20 replays are won in RT1 spanning 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins) and the "effective number of IN coins" will be "240" (=300 coins - 20 times x 3 coins). Also, since the combined probability of Replay A and the 3-coin role is uniform as shown in FIG. 21(b), the "total number of OUT coins" will be "150" as in FIG. 22(a), and the "effective number of OUT coins" in this case will be "90" (=150 - 20 times x 3 coins). Therefore, the effective payout rate will be 0.375 (=90÷240), while the total payout rate will be 0.500 (=150÷300).

As described above, during RT1, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the setting value, as shown in FIG. 22(e), it can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate regardless of the setting value (whatever the setting value). Note that the 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as those in FIG. 22(a) and the like, since the number of games played and the combined probability of Replay A and 3 coin roles are uniform. In addition, the number of replay wins and the "actual number of IN coins" and "actual number of OUT coins" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 22(a) and FIG. 22(b). For this reason, the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate during 100 games (G) during RT1 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set. Also, during RT1, the total payout rate is higher than the effective payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the total payout rate and the effective payout rate are less than 1, creating a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the setting value, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (whatever the setting value). This is explained below.

During RT2, when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set, the probability of winning a replay is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so an average of 30 wins can be expected over 100 games (G). Figure 22 (c) shows an example of the "total number of IN coins", "actual number of IN coins", "total number of OUT coins", and "actual number of OUT coins" when 30 replays win over 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set, and shows the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers. As shown in Figure 22 (c), when 30 replays win over 100 games (G) in RT2, the "total number of IN coins" is "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3 coins) and the "actual number of IN coins" is "210" (= 300 coins - 30 times x 3 coins). Also, the "total OUT number" is assumed to be "600" as a result of the navigation effect, and the "actual OUT number" in this case is "510" (= 600 - 30 times x 3). Therefore, the actual payout rate is 2.429 (≒ 510 ÷ 210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (= 600 ÷ 300).

Next, FIG. 22(d) will be described. The winning probability of a replay during RT2 when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set is 40/100 (=(35+45)/200), so an average of 40 wins can be expected during 100 games (G). FIG. 22(d) shows an example of the "total number of IN coins", "actual number of IN coins", "total number of OUT coins", and "actual number of OUT coins" when a replay wins 40 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2, and shows the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers. As shown in FIG. 22(d), when a replay wins 40 times during RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" is "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins) and the "actual number of IN coins" is "180" (=300 coins - 40 times x 3 coins). Also, since the combined probability of Replay A and 3-coin combination is uniform as shown in FIG. 21(c), the "total OUT number" is assumed to be "600" as in FIG. 22(c), and the "effective OUT number" in this case is "480" (=600-40 times x 3 coins). Therefore, the effective payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate varies depending on the setting value as described above, but as shown in FIG. 22(e), it can be said that the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (whatever the setting value). Note that the 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as those in FIG. 22(c) and the like, because the number of games played and the combined probability of Replay A and 3 coin roles are uniform. In addition, the number of replay wins and the "actual number of IN coins" and "actual number of OUT coins" can be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 22(c) and FIG. 22(d). For this reason, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate during 100 games (G) during RT2 when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set. Additionally, during RT2, the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the set value, but both the actual payout rate and the total payout rate are greater than or equal to 1, creating an advantageous situation for the player.

As described above, in the slot machine of this modified example, the controllable situation is focused on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate taking into account all roles including replays and the actual payout rate taking into account roles other than replays, and by providing a situation in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and a situation in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as shown in Figures 21(a) and 22(e), it is possible to converge the payout rate to an appropriate range compared to, for example, a gaming machine in which only one of the situations in which the payout rate is higher can occur.

The trigger for the transition from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but may be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, or a winning in a predetermined lottery. The trigger for the transition from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but may be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, or a winning in a predetermined lottery. The trigger for the transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but may be established by a specific losing symbol combination being stopped, a predetermined number of plays being played, or a winning in a predetermined lottery. The trigger for the transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but may be established by a specific number of plays being played, or a winning in a predetermined lottery.

In addition, the transition role A may be determined so that it wins at the same time as other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role A is different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role A wins at the same time. In addition, the transition role B may be determined so that it wins at the same time as other roles a, b, etc. in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the transition role B is different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role B wins at the same time. In addition, the transition role A, the transition role B, and the other roles a, b, etc. may be determined so that the operation mode for winning the transition role A and the operation mode for winning the transition role B are different depending on the type of other roles that the transition role A wins at the same time. In this case, when the transition role A or the transition role B is won in RT0, the interest of the game in RT0 can be increased by generating a push order guessing game.

For example, the transition role A may be an RT1 transition replay that wins simultaneously with other normal replays a and b in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the RT1 transition replay may be set to be different depending on the type of other normal replay that the RT1 transition replay wins at the same time. Specifically, as the winning situation in RT0, there may be a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay wins simultaneously with normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay wins simultaneously with normal replay b. In the winning situation a, the reel control is performed by stopping the left first to win the RT1 transition replay, while the reel control is performed by stopping the other reels first to win the normal replay a, whereas in the winning situation b, the reel control is performed by stopping the other reels first to win the RT1 transition replay, while the reel control is performed by stopping the other reels first to win the normal replay b.

Also, the transition role B may be an RT2 transition replay that wins simultaneously with other normal replays a and b in the role lottery, and the operation mode (e.g., the push order) for winning the RT2 transition replay may be set to be different depending on the type of other normal replay that the RT2 transition replay wins simultaneously. Specifically, as the winning situation in RT0, a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay wins simultaneously with normal replay a and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins simultaneously with normal replay b are provided, and in winning situation c, reel control is performed by stopping the left first to win the RT2 transition replay, while reel control is performed by stopping other than the left first to win the normal replay a, whereas in winning situation d, reel control is performed by stopping other than the left first to win the RT2 transition replay, while reel control is performed by stopping the left first to win the normal replay b.

In this case, by notifying the player that the game is a push order guessing game when any of the winning situations a through d occurs during RT0 (for example, displaying a message such as "In trouble! Avoid the push order!" during winning situations a and b, and displaying a message such as "Chance! Get it right on your own!" during winning situations c and d), it is possible to provide the player with the fun of thinking about which push order to use to perform the stopping operation, thereby increasing the excitement of the game during RT0.

In addition, Figure 21(a) illustrates an example of the game state transition between RT0 and RT2, but this is not limited to this, as long as there are situations in which the total payout rate taking into account all roles including replays and the actual payout rate taking into account roles other than replays, and situations in which the total payout rate is higher than the actual payout rate and situations in which the actual payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as shown in Figure 22(e), can occur.

In addition, in Figures 21(b) and 21(c), it has been explained that when comparing the total payout rate and the actual payout rate, the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate differs for each setting value, and that the setting values "b", "1", and "2" and the setting values "4" to "6", which affect the probability of winning a bonus role, all include setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively small, setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is relatively large, and setting values where the difference between the total payout rate and the actual payout rate is maximum. However, as shown in FIG. 22(e), as long as the winning probability of the role selection is such that a situation in which the total payout rate is higher than the effective payout rate and a situation in which the effective payout rate is higher than the total payout rate can occur (for example, the winning probability of a replay is not set to 0% or 100%), the roles and winning probabilities that are the subject of the role selection are not limited to the game state transitions shown in FIG. 21(a) or those shown in FIG. 21(b) and FIG. 21(c), etc.

The features of the slot machine according to the modified example described above can be summarized as follows:
"A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops.
A role selection means for selecting a role that selects which of a plurality of roles including a grant role that accompanies the grant of the game value and a replay role that allows the player to start a next game without using new game value has been won;
A stop control means for performing stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the role lottery;
A set value setting means is provided for setting one of a plurality of set values having different advantageous degrees to a player,
a payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of game values awarded when a symbol corresponding to the awarding role is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of game values set as the number of bets; a first payout rate in which, when a symbol corresponding to the replay role is stopped in a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, the predetermined number of game values is awarded as a result of the game, and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game is counted as the predetermined number; and a second payout rate in which, when a symbol corresponding to the replay role is stopped in a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, the game value awarded in the game is counted as 0, and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game is counted as 0, the relationship between the first payout rate and the second payout rate includes a first situation in which the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate, and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In a notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to a winning role determined by the role lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of any of the set values among the multiple types of set values, and in a non-notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to a winning role determined by the role lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of any of the set values among the multiple types of set values.
The gaming machine is characterized in that it has at least a first setting value with the most advantageous degree and a second setting value with the least advantageous degree as the multiple types of setting values, and the probability of the first situation occurring is higher when the first setting value is set than when the second setting value is set, and the probability of the second situation occurring is higher when the second setting value is set than when the first setting value is set.
become.

Also,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 201) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
a notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164) capable of performing a first setting-related notification (e.g., a turn-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) regarding the setting value;
a set value display means (e.g., a set value display 293) capable of displaying the plurality of set values one by one in a predetermined display order (e.g., the display order shown in FIG. 196(a));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the first setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The notification means is capable of executing the first setting-related notification during a second period (e.g., a period during which a demo performance is being performed),
The first period refers to a certain period following the execution of an operation related to the setting change (for example, an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281 to end the setting change),
The first period refers to a period during which no game has been started (for example, no game has been started by operating the start lever 135) since the power to the gaming machine has been turned on (for example, from FIG. 204 (c)).
The second period is a period after the game has started (for example, FIG. 206 (H) or FIG. 206 (N)).
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value [e.g., setting 1] which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value [e.g., setting b] which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a third setting value [for example, setting 6] which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that is less advantageous to the player than the first set value,
The second set value is a set value that is less advantageous to the player than the third set value,
The first set value is a set value that is less advantageous to the player than the third set value,
the set value display means is capable of displaying 1 as the first set value,
the set value display means is capable of displaying a set value display [e.g., b] different from 1 as the second set value,
the set value display means is capable of displaying 6 as the third set value,
the notification means executes the first setting-related notification only when the second setting value is set,
The set value display means is a segment display (e.g., a 7-segment LED display),
In the segment lighting representing the third set value (e.g., the display mode of "6" shown in FIG. 196(a)), the segment indicator lights up all of the segments that are lit in the segment lighting representing the second set value (e.g., the display mode of "b" shown in FIG. 196(a));
the segment indicator, in segment lighting representing the second set value, lights only a part of the segments that are lit in segment lighting representing the third set value,
The set value display means is capable of displaying the second set value next to the third set value (for example, in the set value display order shown in FIG. 196(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

Also,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 5(c) to 5(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period refers to a period following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by both gaming establishment staff and customers. For gaming establishment staff, it allows them to confirm setting changes before the establishment opens, and for customers, it provides important information that can lead to their own profits (same below).

The notification means may continue to execute the setting-related notification during the first period (same below).

The first period may be the period from when the setting change end operation is executed until one or more bet numbers are set (until a medal is inserted) (the same applies below).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (same below). The setting-related notification may also be a notification that suggests that a predetermined setting value has been set (selected) as the setting value (same below). The predetermined setting value may be the setting value that offers the lowest degree of advantage to the player among the multiple types of setting values (same below). In this case, a staff member at the gaming establishment will notice the low degree of advantage before opening due to the setting-related notification and can change the setting value to one with a higher degree of advantage, and a customer can avoid gaming machines where the setting-related notification is being issued.

The setting-related notification can be read as a setting-related performance, and the notification means can be read as a performance means (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 5(c) to 5(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
the notification means is capable of executing, as the setting-related notification, a notification regarding a certain setting value (e.g., setting b) among the plurality of types of setting values;
The first period refers to a period of time following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281),
The notification means does not execute the setting-related notification when a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after executing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value through the setting-related notification. In addition, the setting-related notification makes it easier to identify that the certain setting value has been set.

The notification means may not execute the setting-related notification if a setting value different from the certain setting value [e.g., setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] is set during the first period.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 5(c) to 5(f));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
the notification means is capable of executing, as the setting-related notification, a notification regarding a certain setting value (e.g., setting b) among the plurality of types of setting values;
The first period refers to a period of time following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281),
The notification means performs the setting-related notification more frequently when a certain setting value is set (for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 5B) than when a setting value different from the certain setting value (for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) is set.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after executing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value through the setting-related notification. In addition, the setting-related notification makes it easier to identify that the certain setting value has been set.

The setting-related notification may be a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, and is executed only when the certain setting value is set, but may also be executed when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the frequency of execution will be as described above.

The notification means may be configured to execute the setting-related notification more frequently when a certain setting value is set during the first period than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set, or may be configured to execute the setting-related notification more frequently when the certain setting value is set during a period different from the first period (for example, a period after the start of a game (at the end of a chance zone, at the end of a battle presentation, at the end of a BB, at the end of an AT, etc.) than when a setting value different from the certain setting value is set).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 5(c) to 5(f));
a set value display means (e.g., a set value display 293) capable of displaying the plurality of set values one by one in a predetermined display order (e.g., the display order shown in FIG. 5( a ));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period refers to a period of time following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281),
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value that is less advantageous to the player than the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [e.g., setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [e.g., setting b] is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information about the setting value through the setting-related notification. Also, since a second setting value that is less advantageous to the player is prepared after the first setting value, a fraudster who fraudulently changes the setting value may unknowingly change the first setting value to the second setting value, causing the player to play at a disadvantage.

The second setting value may be the certain setting value, and the notification means may be capable of issuing a notification regarding a certain setting value among the multiple types of setting values as the setting-related notification (the same applies below).

The setting value display means may display the currently set setting value (hereinafter the same).

The device may include a setting value display means for displaying the currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for changing the setting value, the setting value change operation means changing the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
A notification means (e.g., a title panel lamp 164, a performance image display device 157, etc.) capable of executing a setting-related notification regarding the setting value (e.g., a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b, and the notification effects shown in Figures 5(c) to 5(f));
A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying the setting value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing the setting-related notification (for example, a light-off notification to notify that the setting is set to setting b) during a first period (for example, a period from the end of the setting change to the insertion of a medal),
The first period refers to a period of time following the execution of a certain operation (e.g., an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281),
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
the setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value which is one setting value among the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value [e.g., setting b] that is less advantageous to the player than the first setting value [e.g., setting 1],
The set value display means is a means for displaying the first set value [e.g., setting 1] as a default set value to be displayed first [e.g., a set value that is displayed first immediately after shipment from a factory, a set value that is displayed first after a RAM including a memory area (RAM of a main control unit) that stores set values is cleared, or a set value that is displayed first when a backup power source that continues to store the set values in the memory area is lost].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, after performing the certain operation, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Also, even if the gaming store staff forgets to change the settings and the default settings are used, the player can easily play.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the gaming machine is initialized. In other words, when the gaming machine is initialized, the first setting value is set.

The device may include a setting value display means for displaying the currently set setting value, and a setting value change operation means for changing the setting value, the setting value change operation means changing the multiple types of setting values in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be the setting value located at the top of the predetermined order.

Also,
"The first period refers to a period during which no game has been started (for example, no game has been started by operating the start lever 135) since the power to the gaming machine was turned on (for example, from FIG. 13 (c) onward).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the setting-related notification is executed during a period when no play has been started, so the player will not suffer any disadvantage.

"No game has ever been started" may mean that the start lever has never been operated with the bet amount set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when an operation related to the setting change is performed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change (same below).

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation executed after the setting value is determined (for example, step S1115 in FIG. 10).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the setting value has been determined.

More specifically, the certain operation may be an operation to end the setting change process (to turn off the setting change key) after the setting value has been confirmed in the setting change process (after the start lever has been turned on) (the same applies below).

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [e.g., a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means from an ON state to an OFF state (e.g., FIG. 13 (J)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the off state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (e.g., a setting change key) that is switched to an on state when starting the setting change to an off state, where the on state may be a start state and the off state may be an end state (same below). In other words, the operating means may be a means that switches between the start and end of the setting change when operated (same below).

Also,
"A setting value display means [e.g., a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification during the first period (for example, the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 14 (J)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, the notification means executes the setting-related notification to obtain information regarding the setting value, so that the setting value display means does not perform duplicate displays, thereby reducing the control burden.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in a state in which the door body is open during the first period (for example, FIG. 13(c)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is open.

The operating means may be operable when the door is in an open state (same below).

The set value display means (e.g., a dedicated seven-segment display) may be invisible when the door is closed (same below). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to players (same below).

The notification means may be configured to issue a door-open notification when the door body is opened, and may be configured to initiate the setting-related notification when the door-open notification is completed (the same applies below).

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in a state in which the door body is closed during the first period (for example, FIG. 13 (k)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
With this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification even when the door is closed.

The notification means may continue the door open notification until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the notification even if the door body is closed while the door open notification is being executed, and may start the setting-related notification when the door open notification ends (the same applies below).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door is open, and may execute the setting-related notification during the first period even when the door is closed (the same applies below).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door is open or closed, and may end when one or more bets are set (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [e.g., setting b] is set as the setting value.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The certain set value may be the set value that provides the player with the lowest degree of advantage among the multiple set values (hereinafter the same). In this case, a staff member at the gaming establishment will notice the low degree of advantage before opening due to the setting-related notification and can change the set value to one with a higher degree of advantage, and a customer can avoid gaming machines for which the setting-related notification is being issued.

Continuing the explanation, as mentioned above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing with three bets. However, it is also possible to play with two bets. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with three bets in a two-bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with two bets in a three-bet bonus internal win state, and the two-bet bonus internal win state is treated as the normal play state, so that players are encouraged to play with three bets whenever possible.

In this way, the normal gaming state of the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is when the two-coin bet bonus is in an internally won state, but if a player plays with two bets, wins a two-coin bet bonus, and finishes the two-coin bet bonus game, the gaming state changes to a non-internal win state for the two-coin bet bonus. Alternatively, the two-coin bet bonus also changes to a non-internal win state when the reset switch 291 is pressed. In addition, when the setting change process is started, a RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10) is performed, and the system is automatically initialized, changing to a non-internal win state for the two-coin bet bonus.

When the setting change process is started, the initialization may not be performed automatically, but the user may be able to select whether or not to initialize. For example, the setting change procedure may be used to initialize the setting values and the game state. More specifically, as in the case of changing the setting, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, the setting value may be set to setting 1 and the game state may be set to a non-internal winning state for the two-coin bet bonus if the power switch 244 is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292. The game state may also be set to a non-advantageous zone state. The initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 10) is also executed when the reset switch 291 is pressed, but the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while pressing the setting change button 292.

In the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, while the two-coin bet bonus game is being played, the performance image display device 157 displays a display indicating that the two-coin bet bonus game is being played (for example, a flower shape). In addition, the remaining number of payout coins, which is the condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "coins remaining during play"). Note that it is also possible to display only one of the two.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, a setting that is extremely disadvantageous to the player, such as setting b, which is not normally set, is provided from the perspective of measures against fraudsters, and the state in which setting b is set can be avoided by performing a setting change process. However, even if the setting change process is performed to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged, if the player is in a state where the two-coin bet bonus is not an internal win, the player will ultimately remain at a disadvantage. Therefore, a notification is issued to suggest that the two-coin bet bonus is not an internal win state.

In the following description, the first gaming state refers to a non-internal winning state of the two-coin bet bonus, and the second gaming state refers to a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state. The first gaming state can also be a non-advantageous zone state, a non-internal winning state not limited to two-coin bets, the non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state) described above, a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a state set to setting b, while the second gaming state can be a state that is more advantageous than the above, such as an advantageous zone state, an internal winning bonus state, a normal gaming state, a state in which items or points have been acquired, or a state set to any of settings 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, etc.

The first voice is a warning message saying "Please check." The first display is a text display saying "Please check," which is also a warning message.

Meanwhile, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a notification by displaying the text "Completed."

Furthermore, when a game is started in a state where the two-coin bet bonus is not internally won, the effect image display device 157 displays a display indicating that an attempt is being made to transition to the two-coin bet bonus internally won state, a display indicating that the two-coin bet bonus is not internally won, or a display encouraging the player to transition to the two-coin bet bonus internally won state. Hereinafter, these notifications by display are collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As this fourth notification, for example, "Returning Game" is displayed, and the number of games played in the two-coin bet bonus non-internal win state is displayed. A player who knows about this fourth notification will know that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. The fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played in a two-coin bet state, or a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

Figure 23 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. In this Figure 23, each stage is numbered from (1) to (11), and time passes in ascending order of numbers.

In FIG. 23, the following items are shown as component items: power switch 244, front door 102, opening sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and external central terminal board 248, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top side lamps), upper speaker 272 and woofer 277 (speakers). Also, at the very bottom, there is an item for game status.

In FIG. 23 (1), the power switch 244 is off and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted in the setting key switch 281, so it remains off. The seven segments of the setting value display 293 remain off, and the setting value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and monitor LED are also off, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 23 (2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated to the right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. In other words, the setting key switch 281 is on before the power is turned on. Note that, since the power is not turned on before the front door 102 is opened, no detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294.

In FIG. 23 (3), the setting key switch 281 is on and the power switch 244 is turned on (power-on). As a result, the main control unit 300 starts processing to change the settings. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as the default setting value. If the user is able to select whether to initialize as described above, the setting value stored in the power-off process of step S221 at the time of power-off is displayed if the user does not initialize. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting change display to notify the user that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a voice ("setting change in progress") to notify the user that the setting is being changed. In addition, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts to output an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts to light up. When the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external central terminal board 248 to the external device. Also, the game state is the first game state (two-coin bet bonus not internally won state) due to the RAM being cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10). However, if it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, the game state at the time of power cut stored in the power cut process of step S221 will be restored unless initialization is performed. For this reason, the game state may also be the second game state (two-coin bet bonus internally won state).

Once the setting change has started, the setting value will be updated each time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 23 (4), the start lever 135 is operated, the setting value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the setting value display 293 displays the number 0, indicating that the setting value has been confirmed. Even after the setting value is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that, although a voice such as "Settings are being changed" is output from the speakers (272, 277), it would also be acceptable to output a voice such as "Settings have been changed."

In FIG. 23 (5), the setting key inserted in the setting key switch 281 is turned to the left to turn it off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and the seven segments of the setting value display 293 are turned off and hidden. The monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speaker (272, 277) is switched to a sound "The door is open" that warns that the front door 102 is open. The switched sound output of "The door is open" corresponds to an example of a third notification. Note that instead of "The door is open", the sound output may be "The setting change has been completed" or "The setting change is finished". Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value was a setting value other than setting b. If the game state is the first game state at the time when the setting change processing is completed, a first notification command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The sub-control units (first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) execute notification control (presentation control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the presentation image display device 157 displays a first display with text display such as "Please check" as a warning notification.

In FIG. 23 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 23 (6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the opening sensor 294 switches to the L level closed detection signal, the main control unit 300 transmits a door close command to the first sub-control unit 400. When the door close command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first sound such as "Please check" as a warning notification. Note that the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 23 (7), the front door 102 is opened, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern. In addition, the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the first display such as "Please check" continues to be displayed because the game state remains the first game state, but the voice from the speaker (272, 277) returns to the warning voice of "The door is open". In other words, the output of the first voice starts when the front door 102 is closed, and ends when it is opened. In many cases, the staff of the game establishment already realizes that the game state remains the first game state due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing of FIG. 23 (6), and therefore the output of the first voice is ended to avoid redundant notification. It is also possible to end the output of the first voice when the front door 102 is opened a predetermined number of times or more. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during play due to hopper errors, clearing ball jams, etc., opening the front door 102 more than twice may be perceived as annoying by surrounding players.

In FIG. 23 (8), the front door 102 is closed again while the game state remains in the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (high-level signal) (switches to a low-level closed detection signal). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a sound saying "The door is closed," and no repeated warning notification is issued. However, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display saying "Please check" along with the demo animation. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts to light up in white again.

In FIG. 23 (9), medals are inserted by servicing the medals or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Here, two medals are inserted. Since a player would normally bet three medals, two bets are often performed by a gaming parlor staff member. Also, this is often a preparation operation before the store opens. The speaker (272, 277) outputs a medal insertion sound, and the performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of the normal performance (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a warning that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).

In FIG. 23 (10), the start lever 135 is operated with two coins bet, and the game begins. That is, the reels 110 to 112 begin to spin. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display. Here, when the game begins, this first display may be switched to the fourth notification, such as "Returning, 1 game," as described above. Alternatively, from the stage in FIG. 23 (7), a fourth notification, such as "Returning, 0 games," may be displayed instead of or together with the first display, and when the game begins, "Returning, 1 game" may be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated with two coins bet, and an internal win is won on the two-coin bet bonus, a notification is issued to indicate that an internal win has occurred. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to avoid winning the two-coin bet bonus. In this navigation effect, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and information about the reel stopping positions that will prevent the bonus from being won is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 23 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, the first operation of the start lever 135 achieves a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state, and the game state changes to the second game state due to the stop operation that avoids the bonus winning. On the performance image display device 157, a second display in text form such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display, as the game state has transitioned to the second game state. Also, a second sound saying "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

Figure 24 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reels are spinning. In Figure 24, each stage is labeled (1)-(5), (21)-(23), and (11), and time progresses in the order of the labels.

In Figure 24, the same items as in Figure 23 are shown as component items, and at the bottom there is a game status item (same as in Figures 29 to 29).

Figures 24 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In FIG. 24 (21), after the setting change process is completed, the front door 102 is left open and medals are inserted by cleaning the medals or operating the bet buttons 130-132. Here, two medals are inserted as a bet. Since a player would normally bet three medals, a two-coin bet is often performed by an amusement arcade staff member. It is also often a preparation operation before the store opens. The speaker (272, 277) outputs the sound of a medal being inserted, and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the background of a normal effect (normal background display), while the first display, which is a warning notification that the game is in the first game state, continues to be displayed. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 24 (22), the start lever 135 is operated with two coins bet, and the game begins. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start to spin. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game begins, this first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "Returning, 1 game" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 24 (21), a fourth notification such as "Returning, 0 games" may be displayed instead of or together with the first display, and when the game begins, "Returning, 1 game" may be displayed. Note that since the front door 102 remains open, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light up in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 24 (23), while the reels 110-112 are rotating, the front door 102 is closed while the game state is in the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The operation of closing the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to an L level closed detection signal, a first sound such as "Please check" is output from the speakers (272, 277) as a warning notification. In the example in FIG. 24, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. The sound can be used to warn a store clerk performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110-112 are rotating that the game state is in the first game state. Additionally, of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R begin to light up in their normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 begins to light up in white. Note that the normal background display continues on the performance image display device 157, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 24 (11), the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 24 (11) is the same as FIG. 23 (11), in which the two-coin bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the performance image display device 157, a second display in the form of text such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display, as the gaming state has transitioned to the second gaming state. Also, a second audio message saying "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

Figure 25 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the reels are spun before the front door 102 is closed after a setting change, a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, and the front door 102 is closed while the reels are still spinning after the power is restored. In Figure 25, each stage is labeled (1)-(5), (21), (22), and (25)-(27), and time progresses in the order of the labels.

Figures 25(1) to 25(5) are the same as Figures 23(1) to 23(5), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to 23(5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figures 25 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 23 (21) and (22), so the explanations for Figures 23 (21) and (22) will be used and omitted here, but the game begins with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 25 (25), a power cut occurs during a game in which two coins are bet (while reels 110-112 are spinning), resulting in the same state as in FIG. 25 (1). However, the power cut process in step S221 shown in FIG. 8 causes necessary information to be saved in a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In the next Figure 25 (26), power is restored and reels 110-112 return to the state they were in just before the power was cut, with the two-coin bet still in place. In other words, if there were any reels that had already stopped spinning just before the power was cut, those reels remain stopped, and any reels that were spinning just before the power was cut start spinning again. The performance image display device 157 returns to a state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to lighting up the door open pattern. In addition, the game state returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 25 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating and the game state is still in the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to a L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 25, a power outage occurs while the reels are rotating before the front door 102 is closed. If a power outage occurs before the front door 102 is closed, the first sound such as "Please check" is not output from the speaker (272, 277). This is to allow the store staff to concentrate on checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. Note that the first display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the staff may notice that the game is in the first game state by this first display.

Figure 26 is a table summarizing the state of the related components when the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed and the inserted medals are settled and paid out before the front door 102 is closed. In this Figure 26, each stage is given the numbers (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 26(1) to 26(5) are the same as Figures 23(1) to 23(5), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to 23(5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figure 26 (21) is the same as Figure 23 (21), so the explanation for Figure 23 (21) will be used and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but a medal is inserted.

In FIG. 26 (31), when two medals have been bet, the settlement button 134 is pressed, and the hopper unit 180 starts to pay out the two bet medals and the credit medals. On the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after payout has started. Meanwhile, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the settlement pattern. Also, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the next Fig. 26 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in Fig. 26, the front door 102 is closed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first game state, a first sound such as "Please check" is output from the speaker (272, 277) instead of the payout sound. In the performance image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed in the normal background display. The first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

Figure 27 is a table summarizing the state of the related components when a power outage occurs while inserting medals and paying them out before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the front door 102 is closed while paying them out after the power is restored. In Figure 27, each stage is numbered (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 27(1) to 27(5) are the same as Figures 23(1) to 23(5), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to 23(5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figure 27 (21) is the same as Figure 23 (21), so the explanation for Figure 23 (21) will be used and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but a medal is inserted.

Figure 27 (31) is the same as Figure 26 (31), so the explanation for Figure 26 (31) will be reused and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but when the settlement button 134 is pressed with two coins bet, the payout begins.

In FIG. 27 (35), a power interruption occurs during dispensing, resulting in the same state as FIG. 27 (1). However, the power interruption process in step S221 shown in FIG. 8 causes necessary information to be saved to a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In the next Figure 27 (36), power is restored and the payout of the remaining medals that have not yet been paid out begins. The performance image display device 157 returns to a state in which the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the settlement pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound from the speakers (272, 277) resumes. The game state also returns to the first game state.

In FIG. 27 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the game state is in the first game state during payout, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to L level close detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 27, a power outage occurs during payout before the front door 102 is closed. If a power outage occurs before the front door 102 is closed, the speaker (272, 277) does not output the first sound such as "Please check," and the payout sound continues to be output. The first sound is not output so that the store staff can concentrate on checking the payout after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, the staff may notice that the game is in the first game state due to this first display. It is also possible that some or all of the payout sounds may not be output during the period in which the remaining medals are paid out after the return.

Figure 28 is a table summarizing the states of the relevant components when the front door 102 is closed while checking the settings after changing the settings. In this figure 28, each stage is labeled (1) through (5), (41), and (42), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 28(1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23(1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to (5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

In FIG. 28 (41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 28 (5), is returned to the on state. In the state shown in FIG. 28 (41), the front door 102 is open and the power is on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the off state to the on state, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. In addition, the monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 start to light up. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display that notifies the user that the setting is being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also output a sound ("Setting confirmation in progress") that notifies the user that the setting is being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch from the demo pattern lighting to white lighting.

In FIG. 28 (42), the front door 102 is closed while in the first game state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 28 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 28, the front door 102 is closed while the performance image display device 157 is displaying the setting confirmation in progress display. In this case, the speaker (272, 277) outputs a first voice such as "Please check" instead of a voice such as "Setting confirmation in progress". Note that the performance image display device 157 continues to display the setting confirmation in progress display, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 28, the text display of the attention alert "Please check" is referred to as the first display, but if the setting confirmation display is referred to as the first display and the first sound is referred to as the first alert, the example in FIG. 28 is an example in which the first alert (first sound) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Figure 29 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the front door 102 is closed after the setting has been changed and the game has transitioned to the second game state. In Figure 29, each stage is labeled (1) through (5), (21), (22), (45), and (46), and time progresses in the order of the labels.

Figures 29(1) to 29(5) are the same as Figures 23(1) to 23(5), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to 23(5) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process starts and ends.

Figures 29 (21) and (22) are the same as Figures 23 (21) and (22), so the explanations for Figures 23 (21) and (22) will be used and omitted here, but the game begins with a two-coin bet.

In FIG. 29 (45), the front door 102 is left open until the third stop operation, resulting in an internal win state for the two-coin bet bonus, and the game state transitions to the second game state. On the performance image display device 157, a second display in the form of text such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the game state transitions to the second game state. Also, a second sound stating "Completed" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 29 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the opening sensor 294 (switched to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 29 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, but corresponds to a certain operation in the second game state. As described above, when the detection signal from the opening sensor 294 switches to an L level closed detection signal, a door close command is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the door close command is sent from the first sub-control unit 400, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, a first voice such as "Please check" is output from the speaker (272, 277) as a warning notification, but there is no problem even if it is output, and there is an advantage in that the control process is not complicated. In other words, the store clerk is aware of the situation and is playing a game with two bets, and the second display is displayed and the second sound is output at the third stop stage (stage (45) in Figure 29), and furthermore, the "fourth notification" described above is not made in the game that starts after this, so the store clerk does not have to worry about whether the game has transitioned to the second game state.

In the above-described examples in FIG. 23 to FIG. 29, the setting change process is performed, and then the front door 102 is closed as a certain operation. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10) is performed, and the game state becomes the first game state. Therefore, when the setting change process is performed regardless of whether the setting value is actually changed or not, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the game state has transitioned to the second game state as shown in the last example of FIG. 29. In other words, the first sound is output regardless of whether the game state is the first game state or not, as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process, the first sound is not output, but the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is pressed and held. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed while the game state is the first, regardless of whether the setting is changed or not.

Figure 30 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after one setting check, and the inserted medals are settled. In this Figure 30, each stage is numbered from (50) to (59), and time passes in ascending order of numbers.

In Figure 30, the components are shown as items such as the power switch 244, front door 102, opening sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LEDs provided on the main control board and external central terminal board 248, performance image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top side lamps), upper speaker 272 and bass speaker 277 (speakers), and at the very bottom is an item for the medal blocker 172 shown in Figure 4. The game state is always the second game state (same up to Figure 34).

In FIG. 30 (50), the power switch 244 is on and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs a low-level closed detection signal. The setting key switch 281 is off and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248 are off. The performance image display device 157 displays a demo animation, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R are lit with a demo pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white. Nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 and the retraction are referred to as inoperative.

In FIG. 30 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern, and the speakers (272, 277) output a warning sound saying "The door is open." Note that the demo animation continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 30 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated to the right, turning the setting key switch 281 on. That is, when the front door 102 is open and the power is on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The setting value display 293 displays the current setting value "1", and the monitor LED starts to light up. The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the speaker (272, 277) also outputs a sound ("Setting confirmation in progress") to notify that the setting is being confirmed. The title panel lamp 164 switches to a white light, and the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R also switch to a white light. In addition, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, or this protrusion, will be referred to as "activated." While the setting confirmation process is being performed, medals cannot be inserted through the medal insertion slot 141. In other words, it is not possible to insert three medals, four or more medals, or even one or two medals. Furthermore, operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 will not be accepted, or will be invalid even if accepted. Furthermore, operation of the start lever 135 or settlement operation will not be accepted, or will be invalid even if accepted.

In FIG. 30 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, and the setting confirmation process ends. The setting value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The voice from the speakers (272, 277) switches to "The door is open." The performance image display device 157 begins to display a demo animation, and of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R begin to light up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is deactivated.

In FIG. 30 (54), when the front door 102 is opened, the protruding opening/closing piece is pushed down by hand, so that the opening sensor 294 cannot detect the opening/closing piece, thereby pseudo-closing the front door 102. As a result, the front door 102 is open, but the opening sensor 294 outputs an L-level close detection signal. The speakers (272, 277) no longer output a voice message such as "The door is open."

In FIG. 30 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the open sensor 294 outputs a close detection signal. In the previous explanations such as FIG. 30 (51), the setting confirmation process was explained as starting when the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the front door 102 is open and the power is on. However, strictly speaking, the setting confirmation process starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal. Therefore, in FIG. 30 (55), the open detection signal is not output, so the setting confirmation process does not start, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the demo animation, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, the monitor LED starts to light up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on.

In FIG. 30 (56), medals are inserted by servicing the medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, it may be possible to insert medals. Also, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, it may be possible to perform bet operations, start operations, and settlement operations. The performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the normal background. Also, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start to light up in the normal pattern.

In FIG. 30 (57), the hand that had been pushing down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, and the opening sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece and outputs an open detection signal. All of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up in the door open pattern, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a warning sound saying "The door is open." In the state of FIG. 30 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state. Also, in the state of FIG. 30 (57), one or more bets are set. When the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and one or more bets are set, even if an open detection signal is output from the opening sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the normal background display continues on the performance image display device 157. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains inoperative.

In FIG. 30 (58), the settlement button 134 is pressed and payout begins. All of the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) begin to light up in the settlement pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). In addition, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 30 (59), the payout is complete. In this state of FIG. 30 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the payout is complete (the number of bets has not been set), and the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. When this state is reached, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays the current setting value of "1". The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display. Also, the speakers (272, 277) start to output a sound such as "Setting confirmation in progress". The title panel lamp 164 switches to a white light, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to a white light. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains activated.

The example in FIG. 30 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 30 (55)), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), the settlement operation is performed when a bet number of 1 or more is set (FIG. 30 (58)), and when the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation process is started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display) (FIG. 30 (59)).

Figure 31 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and one game is played. In this Figure 31, each stage is labeled (50)-(57), (61), and (62), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figure 31 shows the same component items as Figure 32 (the same up to Figure 34).

Figures 31 (50) to (57) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (57), so the explanations of Figures 30 (50) to (57) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 31 (61), the start lever 135 is operated and the game begins. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start to spin. The top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in their normal patterns. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 31 (62), the third stop operation is performed. In this state of FIG. 31 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the game is over (the bet amount has not been set), and the open sensor 294 is outputting an open detection signal. When this state is reached, the setting confirmation process is started, and the setting value display 293 displays the current setting value of "1". The performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display. Also, the speakers (272, 277) start to output a sound such as "Setting confirmation in progress". The title panel lamp 164 switches to a white light, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to a white light. Also, the medal blocker 172 remains activated.

The example in FIG. 31 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 31 (55)), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), the game is started (FIG. 31 (61)), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display) (FIG. 31 (62)).

To summarise the examples in Figures 30 and 31, if the setting key switch 281 is already on and an open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, when the number of bets has not been set, the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

Figure 32 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In this Figure 32, each stage is assigned the numbers (1) to (3) and (71) to (78), and time progresses in the order of the numbers.

Figures 32(1) to 32(3) are the same as Figures 23(1) to 23(3), so the explanations for Figures 23(1) to 23(3) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but the setting change process has started.

In FIG. 32 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component becomes the same as the state in FIG. 32 (1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, the necessary information is saved to a specified area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cut process of step S221 shown in FIG. 8.

32 (72), the power switch 244 is turned off and the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, and in the next figure (73), the power switch 244 is turned on. When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 9 is started, and first, the start-up initial setting (step S1001) returns the state to the state immediately before the power failure. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, it is stored that the setting key switch 281 was on immediately before the power failure, and the setting value display 293 displays "1", which is the setting value immediately before the power failure. Also, the information backed up at the time of the power failure is returned to the sub-control unit side (400, 500), the performance image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display, and the speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice such as "Setting confirmation in progress". In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. In addition, the medal blocker 172 is not activated.

In addition, in a gaming machine where the sub-controller (400, 500) does not store a backup in the event of a power outage, when the main control unit 300 determines during startup initial setting (step S1001) that the state immediately before the power outage was that the setting was being changed, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub-controller 400, and the sub-controller (400, 500) displays a setting confirmation display based on this setting change command and outputs a sound such as "Setting confirmation in progress."

As shown in the main control unit main processing in FIG. 7, the main control unit initial setting processing (setting change processing (step S1013)) in FIG. 9 is not executed unless the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was returned to the off state before the power was turned on, the judgment in step S1005 is No, and the setting change processing (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (74), the power switch 244 is once turned off, and then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 32 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 32 (76)). By doing so, the setting change processing (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 32 (76), the setting value display 293 displays the setting value "1", and the monitor LED starts to light up. In addition, the performance image display device 157 displays a setting change display, and a sound such as "setting change in progress" is output from the speaker (272, 277). All of the lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start to light up. Also, the medal blocker 172 is not activated.

In FIG. 32 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the setting value is confirmed (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the setting value display 293 displays the number 0, indicating that the setting value is confirmed. Even after the setting value is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that the speakers (272, 277) output a voice message such as "Settings are being changed," but it would also be acceptable to output a voice message such as "Settings have been changed." Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 32 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and the setting value display 293 is hidden. The monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) is switched to a sound "Door is open" that warns that the front door 102 is open. Note that instead of "Door is open", a sound output may be "Setting change completed" or "Setting change is finished". Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting up in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value was a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inoperative.

Figure 33 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, a medal is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medal is settled. In this Figure 33, each stage is given the numbers (50)-(54), (81), (82), (57)-(59), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 33 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (54), so the explanations of Figures 30 (50) to (54) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after a setting check is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In Figure 33 (81), with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are inserted by servicing the medals or operating the bet buttons 130-132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted and the sound of medal insertion is output from the speakers (272, 277). The performance image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to displaying the normal background. Additionally, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R begin to light up in the normal pattern. Additionally, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals are inserted, in FIG. 33 (82), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while a closed detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, so the setting confirmation process does not start, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the normal background, and nothing is being output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, the monitor LED starts to light up as a result of the setting key switch 281 being turned on.

Figures 33 (57) to (59) are the same as Figures 30 (57) to (59), so the explanations of Figures 30 (57) to (59) will be reused and detailed explanations will be omitted here, but the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends, and an open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. After that, the settlement operation is performed, the dispensing is completed, and the setting confirmation process begins.

The example in FIG. 33 described above corresponds to an example in which, even when the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 33 (82)), if a bet of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started (the display of the performance image display device 157 does not display the setting confirmation display), but when a bet of 1 or more is set, the settlement operation is performed (FIG. 33 (58)) and the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation process is started (the display of the performance image display device 157 displays the setting confirmation display) (FIG. 33 (59)).

Figure 34 is a table summarizing the states of the related components when a setting check is performed once, a coin is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and play is performed. In this Figure 34, each stage is given the numbers (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62), and time passes in the order of the numbers.

Figures 34 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (54), so the explanations of Figures 30 (50) to (54) are reused and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after a setting check is performed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

Figures 34 (81) and (82) are the same as Figures 33 (81) and (82), so the explanations of Figures 33 (81) and (82) are used and detailed explanations are omitted here, but after a medal is inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on. In other words, the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet number of 1 or more is set.

Figure 34 (57) is the same as Figure 30 (57), so the explanation for Figure 30 (57) will be used and a detailed explanation will be omitted here, but an open detection signal will be output from the open sensor 294.

Figures 34 (61) and (62) are the same as Figures 31 (61) and (62), so the explanations of Figures 31 (61) and (62) will be reused and detailed explanations will be omitted here, but the start lever 135 is operated to start play, and when the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 34 described above corresponds to an example in which, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet number of 1 or more is set, it is possible to continue playing with the set bet number. In other words, it corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is also accepted. Setting the bet number is given priority, and playing with that bet number is continued. After the game is completed, processing in response to the setting key switch 281 being turned on (processing to confirm the setting) is started.

The example in FIG. 34 also corresponds to an example in which, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 34 (82)), if a bet number of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display), and play is started with the set bet number (FIG. 34 (61)). Once the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is started and the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display (FIG. 34 (62)).

Furthermore, to summarize the examples in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157, and when a state other than the state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting confirmation process is started and the setting confirmation display is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Also, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when one or more bets are set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 293, and when a state other than the state when one or more bets are set (a state when one or more bets are not set, more specifically, a state when the payout process is completed or the game is finished) is reached, the setting value display device 293 displays the setting value.

In addition, whether the timing is in FIG. 33 (57) or FIG. 34 (57), it corresponds to the timing after the setting key switch 281 is turned on when a bet of 1 or more is set (FIG. 33 (82), FIG. 34 (82)). In FIG. 33 (57) and FIG. 34 (57), an operation is performed that causes the opening sensor 294 to detect that the front door 102 is open, such as releasing the hand that has been pressing down the opening/closing piece, while a bet of 1 or more is set, but the setting confirmation process is not started and the performance image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display.

<Setting suggestion production>
As described above, the AT state is one of the game states in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. The AT state is a state in which the operation navigation can be executed. The operation navigation is a presentation that notifies the stop operation content that helps winning by using the liquid crystal display device 157 and the payout number display 127, and is a presentation that notifies the stop operation sequence and the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internal winning role). The AT state is entered when the AT state transition lottery is won in the non-AT state. The AT state is maintained until the number of games granted at the time of transition is consumed. In addition, the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added (added) by the addition presentation. When the number of games to be maintained is consumed, the AT state ends. However, even before the number of games to be maintained is consumed, the AT state ends when the difference number (the difference between the number of paid out game media (e.g., medals) and the number of inserted game media) reaches a specified number.

A setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) that gives suggestions regarding the setting value may be executed during a game in which the AT state ends, or at the start of the next game of that game (when the start lever 135 is turned on) (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as the end of the AT). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by a lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. In step S333 shown in FIG. 11(c), the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 records information indicating whether or not the setting has been changed, and if the setting has been changed, the setting values before and after the setting change. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery based on this information. The probability of executing the setting suggestion effect varies depending on whether or not the setting has been changed, the setting value before the setting change, and the current setting value.

Figure 35 (a) shows a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect will be executed at the end of the AT if no setting change has been made. The lottery table shown in Figure 35 (a) shows the probability of the setting suggestion effect being executed (the probability of winning the execution lottery) (the same applies to subsequent lottery tables).

Here, "no setting change has been made" means that the setting change process shown in FIG. 10 has not been executed, i.e., the setting key switch 281 has not been turned on (the determination result in step S1005 shown in FIG. 9 is No). In the setting change process shown in FIG. 10, in step S1119, preparations are made to send a setting change command to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a setting change has been made depending on whether the setting change command has been received.

In the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion image may be displayed on the effect image display device 157. There are multiple types of setting suggestion images with different suggested contents. Setting suggestion image A is an image that does not suggest a setting value. Setting suggestion image B is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even setting). Setting suggestion image C is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 1 or 5 (odd setting), and setting suggestion image D is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be a high setting of 4 or more. Setting suggestion image F is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 2 or more. Setting suggestion image G is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 5 or more. Setting suggestion image H is an image that suggests that the current setting value is definitely setting b, and a specific example is the display of the god character KGG and the text "The tough battle continues" as shown in FIG. 5(f).

The setting suggestion image I is an image suggesting an increase in the setting. This image will not be displayed if no setting changes have been made, and more details will be given later.

The setting suggestion image J is an image suggesting a setting change. This image will not be displayed if no setting changes have been made, as will be described in more detail below.

When the setting is set to b, only the setting suggestion image H, which is the setting b confirmation effect, is displayed. This setting b confirmation effect is always displayed. The even number suggestion effect (setting suggestion image B) may be executed even when the setting value is odd, and the odd number suggestion effect (setting suggestion image C) may be executed even when the setting value is even. The high setting (setting 4 or higher) suggestion effect (setting suggestion image D) may be executed even when the setting is a low setting such as setting 1 or setting 2. In other words, in these effects, false suggestions may be executed. On the other hand, in the setting 2 or higher suggestion effect (setting suggestion image F) and the setting 5 or higher suggestion effect (setting suggestion image G), false suggestions are not executed. However, the execution probability is lower than in effects in which false suggestions may be executed.

Figure 35 (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the end of the AT when the setting is changed from setting 1. The setting change here may be from setting 1 to setting 2 or higher, which has a higher ball output rate than setting 1, or to setting b, which has a lower ball output rate than setting 1. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the setting has been changed when it receives a setting change command. In the setting change process shown in Figure 10, which is started by turning on the setting key switch 281, if the setting was set to 1 before the process started, and the start lever 135 is turned on without operating the setting change button 292, or if the setting value is changed by operating the setting change button 292 but the setting is finally returned to setting 1 and the start lever 135 is turned on, a setting change command for setting 1 is prepared, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change command. In this case, the setting is reset to 1, but in terms of control, the setting is changed from setting 1. For this reason, the lottery table in Figure 35 (b) also lists the execution probability of "setting 1".

The following will focus on the differences from the lottery table shown in Figure 35(a).

The probability of winning with setting suggestion image A, which does not suggest a setting value, is highest when resetting to setting 1, and decreases as the setting value has a higher ball payout rate.

The setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) cannot be executed when the setting value is changed to a value with a lower ball output rate than the previous setting value, and can be executed when the setting value is changed to a value with a higher ball output rate than the previous setting value. In other words, the setting increase suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the setting value has been changed to a value with a higher ball output rate than the previous setting value. However, it is not necessarily executed when the setting value is changed to a higher ball output rate, and it is not executed unless the lottery is won. In the lottery table of FIG. 35 (b), when the setting is changed to 2 or higher, the execution probability is the same at 5%. For example, when the setting is changed from 1 to 2, the setting increase suggestion effect may be executed. Note that when the setting is changed from 1 to 2 or higher, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect may be higher for the setting value with a higher ball output rate (the same applies below). When the setting is changed from 1 to setting b, the setting value with a lower ball output rate is changed, and the execution probability is 0%, so it is not executed. Also, when changing the setting from setting 1 to setting 1 (resetting setting 1), the payout rate is not changed to a higher setting, so this also has a 0% probability of being executed and will not be executed.

The setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is an effect that can be executed when the setting is changed. Unlike the setting increase suggestion effect, it can also be executed when the setting is changed to a setting with a lower ball payout rate than the previous setting value. In other words, the setting change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the setting has been changed. In the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), when the setting is changed to 2 or higher, the execution probability is the same 10%, but the higher the ball payout rate of the setting value, the higher the execution probability may be (the same applies below). Also, the execution probability is higher than the setting increase suggestion effect, but it may be the same as the setting increase suggestion effect, or conversely, it may be lower (the same applies below). Also, it may be executable when changing from setting 1 to setting b, but in the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), the execution probability is 0%, and the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is not executed. Furthermore, in the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), the execution probability is 0% for setting 1, and the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is not executed, but it may be executed.

Figure 36 (a) shows a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute setting suggestion effects and the like at the end of the AT when the setting is changed from setting 2. The setting change here may be from setting 2 to setting 3 or higher, which has a higher ball payout rate than setting 2, or to setting 1 or setting b, which has a lower ball payout rate than setting 2. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a setting change command and determines that a setting change has been made, even when a reset is made, such as from setting 2 to setting 2. For this reason, the lottery table in Figure 36 (a) also lists the execution probability of "setting 2."

The following will focus on the differences from the lottery table shown in Figure 35(b).

The winning probability of setting suggestion image A, which does not suggest a setting value, is highest when the setting is reset to 2, and decreases as the setting value with a higher ball payout rate is selected. In addition, when the setting is changed to 1, the winning probability is higher than when the setting is changed to 4.

The setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) has a 0% chance of being executed if the setting is changed to setting 1, which has a lower ball payout rate, and will not be executed. Also, when changing the setting from setting 2 to setting 2 (resetting setting 2), since the setting has not been changed to a higher ball payout rate, this also has a 0% chance of being executed and will not be executed.

As described above, the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) can be executed even when the setting is changed to a setting with a lower ball payout rate than the previous setting, and therefore can also be executed when the setting is changed to 1. It may also be executed when the setting is changed from 2 to setting b, but in the lottery table of FIG. 36(a), the execution probability is 0% and the setting change suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the lottery table of FIG. 36(a), the execution probability is 0% for setting 2 and the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is not executed, but it may be executed.

Figure 36 (b) shows a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute setting suggestion effects, etc. at the end of the AT when the setting is changed from setting b. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a setting change command and determines that a setting change has been made, even when the setting is reset from setting b to setting b. For this reason, the lottery table in Figure 36 (b) also lists the execution probability of "setting b." In addition, since the setting change here is from setting b, all setting changes, except for resets from setting b to setting b, result in a change to a setting value with a high ball payout rate.

The following will focus on the differences from the lottery table shown in Figure 36(b).

The probability of winning with setting suggestion image A, which does not suggest a setting value, becomes lower the higher the setting value with a higher payout rate.

As mentioned above, the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) is an effect that can be executed when the setting is changed to a setting with a higher ball payout rate than the previous setting value. However, if the setting is changed from b to setting 1, the execution probability is 0% and the setting increase suggestion effect will not be executed. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to 2 or higher, the setting increase suggestion effect will be executed with a 5% probability. For example, if the setting is changed from b to setting 2, the setting increase suggestion effect may be executed.

The setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) can be executed when changing from setting b to settings 1, 2, or 4 to 6. As shown in FIG. 36(b), each is executed with a 10% probability. However, this effect is not executed when changing from a setting other than b to setting b. Note that it may be prohibited from being executed only when changing from setting b to setting 1.

Setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion announcements) may be performed when the AT ends, or may be spoken by characters during play (game) in the AT state.

Figure 37(a) shows a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the character's lines.

In the performance by the character's lines, the performance of setting b confirmation, the performance of setting increase suggestion, and the performance of setting change suggestion are not executed. Since the performance of setting b confirmation is not executed, the performance related to setting b is not executed in the performance by the character's lines. The performance of setting suggestion by the character's lines may be executed by character line A, which does not suggest the setting value, character line B, which is an even number suggestion performance, character line C, which is an odd number suggestion performance, character line D, which is a high setting (setting 4 or higher) suggestion performance, character line F, which is a setting 2 or higher suggestion performance, and character line G, which is a setting 5 or higher suggestion performance. The execution probability of each is the same as the execution probability of the lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (a). A specific example of character line B, which is an even number suggestion performance, is the line "It may be an even number setting" shown in FIG. 5 (c). A specific example of character line F, which is a setting 2 or higher suggestion performance, is the line "Ah, it's a business review" shown in FIG. 5 (e). A specific example of character dialogue G, which is an indication of a setting of 5 or higher, is the dialogue shown in Figure 5(d), "I want to eat more than five pieces of sugarcane."

Setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion announcements) may also be performed during demo effects.

Figure 37 (b) shows a lottery table that determines whether or not a setting suggestion effect can be executed during a demo effect.

The setting suggestion effect during the demo performance is achieved by turning off the title panel lamp 164. The title panel lamp 164 turns off only when it is set to setting b. When it is set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 always turns off. Therefore, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 during the demo performance corresponds to a setting b confirmation effect, which suggests that the current setting value is confirmed to be setting b.

As explained above, there are effects (hereinafter referred to as "setting b suggestion effects") that are executed only when setting b is set, such as the setting b confirmation effect and the setting suggestion effect during the demo effect. The setting b suggestion effect also includes effects that give suggestions regarding setting b, and can also be called setting b related effects. This setting b suggestion effect may be other than the setting b confirmation effect or the effect of turning off the title panel lamp 164, and is executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects are not executed. For example, it is executed at the timing of turning off the setting key, the timing when the title panel lamp 164 turns off other than during the demo effect, or the timing when a certain image is displayed on the LCD during the demo effect. The other setting suggestion effect here is a suggestion effect regarding a setting value other than setting b (a setting value of any of settings 1, 2, and 4 to 6), and may be an effect that suggests that those setting values are set, or may be a confirmation effect that suggests that those setting values are confirmed, or may be the setting increase suggestion effect or setting change suggestion effect described above (the same applies below). However, the setting b suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects may be executed (for example, when the AT end screen is displayed, etc.), or multiple types of setting b suggestion effects may be provided, with the setting b suggestion first effect of the multiple types of setting b suggestion effects being executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects may be executed, and the setting b suggestion second effect of the multiple setting b suggestion effects being executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects may not be executed.

There may also be times when only the other setting suggestion effects are executed. In the case of the setting suggestion effects using character dialogue as described with reference to FIG. 37(a), these are the times when the character speaks. Other setting suggestion effects may also be executed at times that suggest the profits gained (number of coins won or number of balls won). Also, other setting suggestion effects may not always be executed when setting b is set.

Furthermore, there may be an effect similar to the setting b suggestion effect. Specifically, if the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 during a demo effect is a setting b suggestion effect, the title panel lamp 164 may also be turned off outside of the demo effect, in which case a similar effect will result rather than a setting b suggestion effect. This similar effect is executed, for example, when a navigation effect such as push order navigation is ignored or when an unrecommended game such as double bet is played. By making the behavior of the gaming machine when an unrecommended game is played common (similar) to the behavior of the gaming machine with the setting b suggestion effect, it is possible to subtly suggest that this may be a bad setting.

Note that the setting suggestion effects are not limited to those exemplified above, and other types of setting suggestion effects may be executed, or may be executed at other times.

<Performance using a rotating device>
Next, various effects using the rotation device 140 will be described. This effect is performed using the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the bass speaker 277, the upper speaker 272, etc. This effect is executed during a period including all or part of the effective operation period during which the operation of the rotation device 140 (rotating body 1401) is effective.

First, the roulette effect will be explained. The roulette effect may be executed as an additional effect for the number of games in the AT state. The number of games to be added is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the number of games to be added is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the roulette effect.

Figure 38 shows an example of a roulette effect executed as an additional effect on the number of games in the AT state.

Figure 38 shows the effect image display device 157 during the AT state. The effect image display device 157 shown in Figure 38 (a) notifies the user that a roulette effect will start later. This notification screen is displayed, for example, after the start lever 135 is operated.

When the third stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the effect display of the roulette effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The effect display of the roulette effect becomes the roulette display RLT. The roulette display RLT is displayed during a period including the operation effective period of the rotating body 1401, and includes a roulette wheel image RL and an arrow image AR. The roulette wheel image RL is not displayed in its entirety on the effect image display device 157, but only a part of it is displayed. From the roulette display RLT in FIG. 38(b), it can be confirmed that the roulette wheel image RL has an area RL1 with 20 games added, a losing area RL2 with 0 games added, and an area RL3 with 10 games added. When the roulette display RLT is displayed, the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 can be operated. That is, it can be rotated in the default downward direction and in the opposite upward direction. The rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 may become operable when the notification screen shown in FIG. 38(a) is displayed, or may be operable at all times.

Here, when the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated downward in the default direction, the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise at a slow speed (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(c1)), and the area RL4 where the number of added games is 100 becomes visible (FIG. 38(c1)). The clockwise direction is the downward direction when viewed from the arrow image AR provided at the determined position, and coincides with the operation direction of the rotating body 1401. From the time the third stop is made until the start of the next game, even if the rotating body 1401 is spun vigorously, the roulette wheel image RL only rotates at a slow speed, and each area RL1 to RL4 provided on the roulette wheel image RL can be confirmed. From the time the third stop is made until the start of the next game, the roulette wheel image RL may be rotated at a speed corresponding to the rotation speed of the rotating body 1401. For example, if the rotating body 1401 is spun vigorously, the roulette wheel image RL also rotates vigorously, making it difficult to see each of the regions RL1 to RL4, but if the rotating body 1401 is spun slowly, the roulette wheel image RL also rotates slowly, making it easy to see each of the regions RL1 to RL4.

Furthermore, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed after rotating the rotating body 1401 downward, the roulette wheel image RL will rotate clockwise (see the arrow shown in Figure 38 (c2)).

On the other hand, when the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(d1)). Note that the counterclockwise direction is the upward direction when viewed from the perspective of the arrow image AR, and coincides with the operating direction of the rotating body 1401.

Furthermore, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed after rotating the rotating body 1401 upward, the roulette wheel image RL will rotate counterclockwise (see the arrow shown in Figure 38 (d2)).

As explained with reference to FIG. 38(c2) and FIG. 38(d2), pressing the first chance button 165 takes over the rotation operation of the rotating body 1401 operated previously, and the roulette wheel image RL rotates in the same direction as the direction corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating body 1401 operated previously. While the rotating body 1401 has two operation directions (downward and upward rotation directions), the first chance button 165 has only one operation direction (pushing down), and even with such an operation means with only one operation direction, it functions as a substitute for the rotating body 1401 operated previously. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated by mistake when the rotating body 1401 should be operated, it serves as a substitute for the rotating body 1401, and a performance that matches the player's taste can be executed. For example, if the operation of the first chance button 165 corresponds to only one specific direction, intentionally operating the first chance button 165 to rotate the roulette wheel image RL in that specific direction may cause an uncomfortable feeling, but this is likely to be popular with beginners who tend to use the wrong operating means.

The roulette board display RL rotates within a predetermined time range regardless of the time the first chance button 165 is pressed. For example, whether the first chance button 165 is pressed for 0.5 seconds or for 3 seconds, the roulette board display RL rotates within a range of 1.9 seconds to 2.1 seconds. However, the rotation time of the roulette board display RL may be changed depending on the time the first chance button 165 is pressed.

Figure 39 shows the continuation of the roulette presentation shown in Figure 38.

After the roulette display RLT starts to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, when the start lever 135 is turned on (the next game starts), an operation prompt image OP is added to the roulette display RLT.

Fig. 39(c3) is a continuation example of the case where the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated downward in the default direction, and an operation prompting image OP for prompting the operation of the rotating body 1401 in the downward direction is displayed overlapping the roulette wheel image RL. The operation prompting image OP includes an image OP1 imitating the rotating device 140, a downward arc-shaped arrow image OP2, an image OP3 of a hand, and a text image OP4 such as "rotate". In this example, the downward arc-shaped arrow image OP2 corresponds to an image suggesting the operation direction. Note that the operation prompting image OP may include a remaining period display indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the rotating device 140. However, the effective operation period of the rotating device 140 is not limited to the period during which the operation prompting image OP is displayed, and in this example, it starts before the operation prompting image OP is displayed.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, the roulette wheel image RL starts to rotate at high speed as shown in the next FIG. 39(c4). The high speed rotation display here is clockwise (downward) rotation in response to the downward rotation of the rotating body 1401. In the high speed rotation display, the regions RL1 to RL4 in the roulette wheel image RL cannot be distinguished. After the start lever 135 is turned on, the roulette wheel image RL rotates at high speed at a predetermined speed regardless of the rotation speed of the rotating body 1401. However, even during high speed rotation, the roulette wheel image RL may rotate at a speed corresponding to the rotation speed of the rotating body 1401. For example, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated slowly, the roulette wheel image RL may rotate at high speed (at a speed at which the regions RL1 to RL4 are difficult to distinguish) but at a slower speed than when the rotating body 1401 is rotated vigorously.

In addition, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed as shown in FIG. 38(c1) instead of the rotating body 1401, the roulette wheel image RL will start rotating clockwise at high speed. In other words, it can also be used as a substitute for the first chance button 165.

Furthermore, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward instead of downward, the roulette wheel image RL does not start rotating. However, even if it is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL may start rotating at high speed.

The effective operation period during which the operation of the rotating body 1401 is valid ends when the rotating body 1401 is operated after the operation prompting image OP is displayed.

After a certain time has elapsed since the start of high-speed rotation, the roulette wheel image RL starts to decelerate, and before long each of the regions RL1-4 becomes visible. In FIG. 39(c5), which follows on from FIG. 39(c4), the roulette wheel image RL slows down to the point where it looks like it might stop rotating, and each of the regions RL1-4 becomes visible. In FIG. 39(c5), the losing region RL2 is located at the position of the arrow image AR, but with a little more rotation, region RL1, which represents 20 added games, is likely to be located at the position of the arrow image AR, and is displayed as a provocative display. Note that which region the roulette wheel image RL will stop rotating at when it reaches the position of the arrow image AR is determined by the number of added games that has been previously transmitted from the main control unit 300, and the provocative display is displayed as a special effect.

In FIG. 39(e), which continues from FIG. 39(c5), the roulette wheel image RL stops spinning, and the area RL1 where the number of added games is 20 is located at the position of the arrow image AR. A shining image SHI representing a blessing is displayed on the roulette wheel image RL, and it is announced that the number of AT games will be added by 20 games.

Fig. 39 (d3) is a diagram showing the effect image display device 157 when the display of the roulette display RLT is started on the effect image display device 157, the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward, and then the start lever 135 is turned on. That is, it is a diagram continuing from Fig. 38 (d2). The effect image display device 157 shown in Fig. 39 (d3) also displays an operation prompting image OP overlapping the roulette wheel image RL. The arrow image OP2 in the operation prompting image OP faces downward, but may face upward in accordance with the rotation direction of the rotating body 1401 before the start lever 135 is turned on. Alternatively, in either Fig. 39 (c3) or (d3), the arrow image may be bidirectional (facing downward and upward), or the image relating to the operation direction (arrow image OP2) may not be displayed.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL starts to rotate at high speed, making it impossible to distinguish the regions RL1 to RL4, as shown in FIG. 39(d4). The high speed rotation display here rotates counterclockwise (upward) in response to the upward rotation of the rotating body 1401.

In addition, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed as shown in FIG. 38 (d1) instead of the rotating body 1401, the roulette wheel image RL will start rotating counterclockwise at high speed. In other words, this can also be used as a substitute for the first chance button 165.

Furthermore, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the default downward direction instead of the upward direction, the roulette wheel image RL also starts rotating at high speed. However, if it is rotated in the downward direction, the roulette wheel image RL may not start rotating.

The speed of the high-speed rotation of the roulette wheel image RL is the same as described above.

The effective operation period during which the operation of the rotating body 1401 is valid ends when the rotating body 1401 is operated after the operation prompting image OP is displayed.

After a certain time has elapsed since the start of high-speed rotation, the roulette wheel image RL starts to decelerate, and eventually each of the regions RL1-4 becomes distinguishable. In FIG. 39 (d5), the roulette wheel image RL rotates so slowly that it looks as if it is about to stop, and each of the regions RL1-4 becomes distinguishable. In FIG. 39 (d5), region RL4, which indicates that the number of added games is 100, is located at the position of the arrow image AR, but if it rotates a little more, region RL1, which indicates that the number of added games is 20, will be located at the position of the arrow image AR, and a provocative display is displayed. Here, too, the number of added games has already been determined by the main control unit 300, and the provocative display is displayed as a presentation effect.

When the roulette wheel image RL stops spinning, it will look like that shown in Figure 39 (e).

Figure 40 shows a modified example of the roulette effect shown in Figure 38.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from the roulette presentation shown in Figure 38, and will omit overlapping explanations.

In this modified example, the behavior (rotation direction) of the roulette wheel image RL when the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed is different. When the roulette display RLT starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 40(b)), and the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward and the roulette wheel image RL is rotating counterclockwise (FIG. 40(d1)), pressing the first chance button 165 causes the roulette wheel image RL to rotate in a clockwise direction (downward when viewed from the arrow image AR as a reference) corresponding to the default rotation direction (downward) of the rotating body 1401. In other words, it starts to rotate in the reverse direction. In FIG. 38(d2), when the first chance button 165 was pressed, the roulette wheel image RL rotated in a direction (counterclockwise) corresponding to the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was rotated (upward), but in this modified example, pressing the first chance button 165 uniformly rotates the roulette wheel image RL in a clockwise direction (downward), regardless of the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was previously rotated.

Even after the start lever 135 is turned on, pressing the first chance button 165 causes the roulette wheel image RL to rotate clockwise (downward) regardless of the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was previously rotated.

The modified example described above may cause a sense of discomfort in that the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was previously rotated is not reflected, but for those who know that the first chance button 165 is an operating means for rotating the roulette wheel image RL in a clockwise direction (downward), this is an easy-to-understand effect and is likely to be particularly popular with advanced players.

Next, we will explain a different effect from the roulette effect that uses the rotation device 140.

Figure 41 shows an example of a challenge presentation to increase the defeat rate.

This defeat rate increase challenge effect may be performed during a duel effect.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 41(a) notifies the player that a defeat rate up challenge effect will start. This notification screen is displayed, for example, after the third stop, and the defeat rate up challenge effect is performed until the start lever 135 is turned on (the next game starts).

Following the notification screen, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a defeat rate display image KR showing the current defeat rate on the left side, and an operation prompting image OP on the right side. The defeat rate at the stage in FIG. 41(b) is 0%. Also, the operation prompting image OP is the same as the image explained earlier, so its explanation will be omitted.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the default downward direction, the kill rate rises to 10%, as shown in FIG. 41(c). When the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the opposite upward direction, the kill rate rises to 20%, as shown in FIG. 41(d). In this way, the kill rate rises no matter which direction the rotating body 1401 is rotated in. In other words, the result is the same regardless of which of the multiple operation directions is used. In addition, the rate of increase according to the amount of operation does not change depending on the rotation direction, but may be different. For example, the rate of increase may be higher when rotating in the default downward direction than when rotating in the upward direction.

The rate of increase is determined in advance by a lottery by the first sub-control unit 400, and braking control is performed on the rotating body 1401 just before the determined rate of destruction is reached. The braking control increases the resistance when rotating the rotating body 1401, and the operator senses that the increase in the rate of destruction is coming to an end.

In FIG. 41(e), the predetermined defeat rate (55%) has been reached. The rotating body 1401 can be rotated further, but the defeat rate will not change. After the determined defeat rate is reached, the rotating body 1401 may be locked and made inoperable.

Next, in FIG. 41(f), a knockout rate increase image KRU is displayed on the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157, notifying the user that the knockout rate has increased to 55%. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 41(g), a duel scene in the duel effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In addition, when the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed instead of operating the rotating body 1401, the defeat rate up image KRU is displayed all at once (FIG. 41(f)), and the image of the defeat rate increasing in the defeat rate display image KR is cut. Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed after operating the rotating body 1401 halfway, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 switches to the display screen of the defeat rate up image KRU. Incidentally, when the start lever 135 is operated, the display screen on which the operation prompting image OP was displayed also switches to the display screen of the defeat rate up image KRU. Also, when the start lever 135 is operated, the display screen on which the operation prompting image OP was displayed also switches to the display screen of the defeat rate up image KRU. Also, when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated, the display screen on which the operation prompting image OP was displayed may be switched to the display screen of the defeat rate up image KRU.

The above-described defeat rate increase challenge effect is an effect that changes a numerical value in one direction, but it may be a selection effect that selects an option. That is, the cursor image on the display screen moves by rotating the rotating body 1401. Regardless of the direction in which the rotating body 1401 is operated, the cursor moves in the same direction, and the rotating body 1401 is braked just before it reaches the next option. That is, each time the cursor image reaches the next option, a short brake control is performed, and the operator of the rotating body 1401 can be given the feeling of selection through touch. An option is selected by operating the start lever 135 or the bet buttons 130 to 132. Note that the rotating device 140 may also accept a push operation, and an option may be selected by a push operation.

Figure 42 shows an example of a message presentation.

In the message presentation, the slider of the scroll bar can be moved (scrolled) by rotating the rotor 1401.

The performance image display device 157 shown in Figure 42 (a) displays an introductory image for a message performance, with a vertical scroll bar SB displayed at the right end. Within this vertical scroll bar SB, a slider SBS is displayed, and in Figure 42 (a), the slider SBS is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar SB. Additionally, an icon of the lord's face is displayed at the top of the message area MS, and a message from the lord is displayed.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, the message presentation starts. In FIG. 42(b), an icon of the grandfather's face is additionally displayed in the message area MS, and a message from the grandfather is displayed.

Furthermore, when the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, the slider SBS in the vertical scroll bar SB starts to move downward, and the message area MS also starts to move downward in accordance with the slider SBS. As a result, an icon of the princess's face is additionally displayed below the message area MS, and a message from the princess is displayed (Figure 42 (c)).

As the rotating body 1401 continues to rotate downward, eventually, as shown in Figure 42 (d), the slider SBS reaches the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, and the bottom portion of the message area MS is displayed. If the rotating body 1401 is rotated further downward even though the slider SBS has reached the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, the slider SBS will return slightly upwards in reaction to hitting the lower limit of the scroll bar SB, as shown in Figure 42 (e), and accordingly the message area MS will also return slightly upwards. This return indication indicates that the bottom limit has been reached (that it is not possible to scroll further down).

Now, when the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward, the slider SBS in the vertical scroll bar SB starts to move upward, and the message area MS also starts to move upward in accordance with the slider SBS. In this message presentation, the image also moves in accordance with the direction of operation of the rotating body 1401. Note that when the slider SBS hits the upper limit of the scroll bar SB, the slider SBS is displayed to move slightly downward to indicate that the upper limit has been reached, and accordingly, the message area MS is displayed to move slightly downward as well.

In addition, if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed instead of operating the rotating body 1401, the slider SBS will instantly reach the bottom limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, and the bottom part of the message area MS will also be displayed, as shown in Figure 42 (b'). After this, by rotating the rotating body 1401 upwards, it is possible to go back and view the conversations between each character.

Figure 42 (e') shows a modified display state when the rotating body 1401 is further rotated downwards even though the slider SBS has reached the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB. In this modified example, the image in the message area MS is displayed stretched vertically (so-called stretch overscroll). This display also indicates that the lower limit has been reached.

The above describes various effects using the rotation device 140, but instead of the rotation device 140, it is also possible to use an operating means that can be operated in multiple operating modes (for example, an effect lever that can be operated in a cross direction, etc.).

The rotation device 140 may also be capable of accepting operations other than rotation. For example, it may also be capable of pulling and pushing operations.

The matters described above using Figures 13 to 42 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in Figure 43. Figure 43 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

The upper back surface of the pachinko machine 100P shown in Figure 43 is provided with a ball tank 150P having an opening at the top and for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154P is located below the ball tank 150P and for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150P to a payout device 152P located on the right side of the back surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and is equipped with a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) inside. The dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a specified position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and by driving the payout motor to rotate it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P. In other words, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to a payout control unit (not shown) when a gaming ball is passing, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball is not passing. The gaming ball that passes this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail and reach an upper tray disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100P uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to the award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152P, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes the main control unit that performs control processing for the entire game, a first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P that constitutes a first sub-control unit that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit, a second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that constitutes a second sub-control unit that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit, and a payout control unit that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and has an error release switch 168P that releases errors when operated by a gaming store clerk. It is equipped with a payout board case 172P that houses board 170P, a launch board case 176P that houses launch board 174P that constitutes the launch control unit that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power board case 184P that houses a power board 182P that constitutes the power control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices and is equipped with a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a gaming store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180P that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186P that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit and the card unit.

In this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. In this pachinko machine 100P, the main body 104 is opened, the setting change key 192P is turned on, and then the power switch 178P is turned on to start a setting change process that allows the player to set one of a number of settings with different odds of winning. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this. In addition, the setting confirmation process is started by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, and the current setting value is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P. The setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43 has settings 1, 2, 4-6, and b, which are the same as the settings of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and are displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order as that explained using FIG. 5(a). Setting b is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, and the larger the number, the more favorable the setting value is for the player.

The bonus ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156P and placed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. Note that the bonus ratio/setting display 196P may also be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it is visible to the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, the main body that can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, the main body opening sensor (not shown) that detects when the main body is opened corresponds to the opening sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the role ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 293. In addition, the main board 156P and the external centralized terminal board (not shown) of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43 are each provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on. In addition, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are also provided, and this liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speaker corresponds to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Furthermore, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game table frame is provided with a game table frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

The pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43 is provided on the front with an effect device similar to the rotation device 140 provided on the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. It is also provided with a chance button, which is an effect button. It is also provided with an effect lever that can be operated in the direction of a cross.

According to the above description,
"A setting change control means (e.g., a CPU 304 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that can change a setting value to one of a plurality of setting values;
A presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157) capable of executing a first setting suggestion presentation (e.g., a setting increase suggestion presentation) that suggests that the setting value has been changed by the setting change control means to a setting value with a higher ball payout rate than the setting value before the change;
A gaming machine equipped with
The plurality of set values include a first set value [e.g., setting b] having the lowest ball output rate among the plurality of set values, a second set value [e.g., setting 1] having a higher ball output rate than the first set value, and a third set value [e.g., setting 2] having a higher ball output rate than the second set value,
The production means is
When the setting change control means changes the second setting value to the third setting value, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a 5% probability as shown in FIG. 35(b)).
When the setting change control means changes the first setting value to the second setting value, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed (for example, a probability of 0% as shown in FIG. 36(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43)
He explained:

According to this gaming machine, even if the setting value is increased, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed only when the setting value is increased from the lowest setting value (the first setting value) to a lower setting value (the next higher setting value: for example, the second setting value), thereby increasing the expectation of the first setting suggestion effect and enabling the first setting suggestion effect to be executed more effectively.

The second set value may be the second lowest set value for the ball payout rate among the multiple set values, and the third set value may be the third lowest set value for the ball payout rate among the multiple set values.

Also,
"The production means is
When the setting change control means changes the first setting value [e.g., setting b] to the third setting value [e.g., setting 2], the first setting suggestion effect [e.g., setting increase suggestion effect] may be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When the setting value rises above the threshold, the first setting suggestion effect is executed, which can further increase the expectation of the first setting suggestion effect, and can make the first setting suggestion effect even more effective.

According to the above description,
"A first operating means (e.g., a rotating body 1401) that can be operated by a player in a plurality of operating modes (e.g., a downward rotating operating mode and an upward rotating operating direction),
a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, a title panel lamp 164, a top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, etc.) capable of executing a first game presentation (e.g., a roulette presentation shown in FIG. 38 to FIG. 40, a message presentation shown in FIG. 42) with an operation effective period during which the first operation means is effective;
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100 or a pachinko machine) equipped with
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a first operation mode [for example, an operation mode of rotating downward] during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the first operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "first image") [for example, an image of a roulette wheel image RL rotating clockwise] is displayed,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode [for example, an operation mode of rotating upward] during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the second operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "second image") [for example, an image of a roulette wheel image RL rotating counterclockwise] is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43)
He explained:

This gaming machine displays different images depending on the player's operation, giving the impression that the outcome changes depending on the player's operation, making it possible to encourage players to actively participate in the game.

The multiple operation modes may be an upward rotation operation mode and a downward rotation operation mode, a clockwise rotation operation mode and a counterclockwise rotation operation mode, a push-in operation mode and a pull-out operation mode, a single press, a long press, or a continuous tap operation mode, or a touch operation mode at different locations on the touch panel.

The multiple operation modes may include operation modes in opposite directions, or may include operation modes in multiple directions (for example, the four directions of a cross, or multiple directions in a 360-degree range), or may be a combination of operation modes that are unrelated to each other (such as a combination of pressing and rotating).

Whether it is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, it may be a single operation or multiple operations consisting of a series of single operations.

Also,
"A second operating means (e.g., a first chance button 165) that can be operated by a player is provided,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means [e.g., the rotating body 1401] is operated in the first operation mode [e.g., an operation mode of rotating downward] and then the second operation means is operated in a certain operation mode [e.g., an operation mode of a single press], an image [e.g., an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise in the same manner as the first image] corresponding to the first image [e.g., an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise] is displayed [e.g., FIG. 38(c2)],
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, an operation mode of rotating upward] and then the second operation means is operated in the same operation mode as the certain operation mode [for example, a single-press operation mode], an image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise in the same manner as the second image] corresponding to the second image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise] is displayed [for example, FIG. 38 (d2)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when the second operating means is operated, an image corresponding to the first image according to the operating mode of the first operating means operated immediately before is displayed, so that even if the second operating means is operated by mistake, it serves as a substitute for the first operating means, and an effect can be executed according to the player's taste. If the second operating means is operated intentionally, some players may feel uncomfortable because the result according to the operation is adjusted to the previous operating mode, but this is likely to be popular with beginners who tend to use the wrong operating means.

The second operating means may be an operating means having only one operating mode (e.g., a single press) or an operating means having multiple operating modes (e.g., a single press, a long press, and repeated taps).

The certain operation mode may be a single operation or multiple operations (the same applies below).

In addition, the image corresponding to the first image may be the same image as the first image, an image of a scene common to the scene of the first image, or an image of a scene subsequent to the scene of the first image (the same applies below).

Also,
"A second operating means (e.g., a first chance button 165) that can be operated by a player is provided,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means [e.g., the rotating body 1401] is operated in the first operation mode [e.g., an operation mode of rotating downward] and then the second operation means is operated in a certain operation mode [e.g., an operation mode of a single press], an image [e.g., an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise in the same manner as the first image] corresponding to the first image [e.g., an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise] is displayed [e.g., FIG. 40(c2)],
In the first game presentation, even if the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, an operation mode of rotating upward] and then the second operation means is operated in the same operation mode as the certain operation mode [for example, an operation mode of a single press], an image corresponding to the first image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise in the same manner as the first image] is displayed [for example, FIG. 40(d2)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, when the second operating means is operated, a common image (an image corresponding to the first image) is displayed regardless of the previous operating mode of the first operating means (whether it is the first operating mode or the second operating mode). In other words, an image corresponding to the first image is associated with the certain operating mode of the second operating means, and while some players may feel uncomfortable that the previous player's operating mode is not reflected, it is an easy-to-understand presentation for those who know this association and have operated the second operating means in the certain operating mode. It is particularly likely to be popular with advanced players who are aware of the above association.

The second operating means may be an operating means having only one operating mode (e.g., a single press), or may be an operating means having multiple operating modes (e.g., a single press, a long press, and repeated taps). An example of the one operating mode is a single press.

Also,
"The first operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operating means is operated in a first direction [e.g., downward],
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operating means is operated in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction),
The first image is an image that represents a movement (e.g., a rotation) of a certain image (e.g., a roulette wheel image RL) in a direction corresponding to the first direction (e.g., a clockwise direction, which is a downward direction when viewed from the arrow image AR),
The second image is an image that represents a movement (e.g., a rotation) of the certain image in a direction corresponding to the second direction (e.g., a counterclockwise direction and an upward direction when viewed from the arrow image AR as a reference).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The operation mode is simple, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are easy to distinguish from each other. In addition, the first image is intuitively easy to understand, and the second image is also intuitively easy to understand. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to participate more actively in the game.

The first image may be an image in which the certain image (e.g., an image of a certain object) moves in the same direction as the first direction, an image in which the certain image moves in a direction that can be imagined from the first direction, or an image in which the certain image moves in a direction related to the first direction. The second image may be an image in which the certain image (e.g., an image of a certain object) moves in the same direction as the second direction, an image in which the certain image moves in a direction that can be imagined from the second direction, or an image in which the certain image moves in a direction related to the second direction.

Also,
"The presentation means is capable of executing a second game presentation (for example, a defeat rate up challenge presentation and a selection presentation shown in FIG. 41) that accompanies an operation effective period during which the first operation means is effective,
In the second game presentation, regardless of the operation mode of the first operation means during the operation effective period, a common image [for example, a kill rate display image KR in which the kill rate increases] is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine allows for a wide variety of presentations, which leads to increased interest in the game. In addition, since the second game presentation is unrelated to the operating mode of the first operating means, it may be easier to operate the first operating means, making it easier to earn an operating amount, and allowing players to concentrate on the progress of the game.

The presentation means may be capable of executing an operation promotion presentation (e.g., an operation promotion image) that promotes the operation of the first operation means executed in the first game presentation. The operation promotion presentation may be a presentation that promotes a certain operation mode (e.g., a default direction), a presentation that promotes multiple operation modes, or a presentation that simply promotes an operation without specifying an operation mode.

In addition, in the first game presentation, if the second operation means is operated without operating the first operation means, an image corresponding to an image (e.g., the first image or the second image) that would be displayed if the certain operation mode prompted by the operation promotion presentation is operated may be displayed.

The first operation means may be marked with a display showing the certain operation mode prompted by the operation promotion effect, or may be marked with a display showing the certain operation mode prompted by the operation promotion effect near the first operation means. Since an image corresponding to an image (e.g., the first image or the second image) that would be displayed if the certain operation mode prompted by the operation promotion effect is operated is displayed, the effect is easy to understand and does not feel strange.

There may also be a third presentation in which the amount of presentation update by the second operating means is greater than the amount of presentation update by the first operating means. In the third presentation, when the first operating means is operated to its limit in a certain direction, a display may be displayed indicating that the operation has been performed to the limit.

The first operating means may have a third operating mode. The third operating mode may be, for example, a pushing operating mode, and the first operating means may protrude only when the first operating means is pushed in.

Furthermore, an effect may be presented in which the option displayed on the display means is selected using the first operating means, and a short-term brake control may be applied to the first operating means in accordance with the timing of switching of the option. By applying a short-term brake control to the first operating means, it is possible to convey the sensation of selection through the tactile sense.

According to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a state in which a two-coin bet bonus is not internally won or a state in which setting b is set) and a second game state (e.g., a state in which a two-coin bet bonus is internally won or a state in which setting 1 is set);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice saying "Please check" or turning off the title panel lamp 164));
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (for example, an operation of closing the front door 102 or an operation of turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed in the first game state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted and made aware that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first gaming state may be a non-internal winning state in which a bonus is not won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting the first number of coins (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a first number of coins, and the second gaming state may be an internal winning state in which a bonus is won by betting a second number of coins that is greater than the first number (the same applies below).

The second game state may be a normal game state or an initial setting game state, and the first game state may be a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state [for example, a penalty bonus state, a state in which setting b is set], or the first game state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a state in which a bonus has not been won, a state in which no points or items have been acquired, etc. (the same applies below).

The device is provided with a door body, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or it may be an operation to close the door body (the same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification that suggests that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes the player aware that the player is in the first gaming state (for example, a notification such as "You are in the first gaming state"), or a notification that does not specify a target for the notification (for example, a notification such as "Please check") (the same applies below).

The notification means may include a first notification means [e.g., speaker (272, 277)], a second notification means [e.g., title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [e.g., performance image display device 157] (the same applies below).

Also, the game state when setting b is set may be the first game state, in which case RT may be set to the game mode, and the game mode may change during the game state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, instead of the game state control means, an embodiment may be provided that includes "game control means for controlling a game based on the setting of a first set value and a game based on the setting of a second set value," and the game (first game) executed based on the setting of a first set value may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game (second game) executed based on the setting of a second set value (the same applies below). Also, the first game state may be read as the state in which the first set value is set, and the second game state may be read as the state in which the second set value is set (the same applies below).

In addition, instead of the game state control means, there may be an embodiment that includes "a game control means for controlling a game in an internal winning state in which a certain role is internally won as a result of a lottery in which a predetermined number of coins is bet and a game in a non-internal winning state which is not an internal winning state," and the non-internal winning state may be a state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Also, the first game state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second game state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification during rotation of the reel (for example, FIG. 24 (23)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are spinning.

The reel may be capable of starting to rotate before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A reel [e.g., reels 110-112],
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The reels are capable of starting to spin before the certain operation is performed (e.g., FIG. 24 (22) and FIG. 25 (22)).
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating (for example, FIG. 24 (23)).
The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when a power interruption occurs during rotation of the reel and before the certain operation is performed [e.g., Fig. 25 (25) to (26)], even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the reel [e.g., Fig. 25 (27)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are spinning. On the other hand, after the power outage is restored, the first notification can be omitted and the staff can focus on the confirmation work after the power is restored.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A dispensing means (e.g., a hopper unit 180);
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification during the payout process in the payout means [for example, FIG. 26 (32)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to ensure that the payout process is performed normally.

The payout means may be a means capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a settlement operation after inserting a medal, or a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation has been performed after inserting a medal.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A dispensing means (e.g., a hopper unit 180);
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The payout means is a means capable of starting a payout process before the certain operation is performed (e.g., FIG. 26 (31) or FIG. 27 (31)),
The notification means may execute the first notification during the payout process (for example, FIG. 26 (32)).
The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when a power outage occurs during the payout process before the certain operation is performed [e.g., FIG. 27 (35) to (36)], even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the payout process [e.g., FIG. 27 (37)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally. On the other hand, after the power outage is restored, the first notification can be omitted and the staff can focus on the confirmation work after the power is restored.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A game state control means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control means 300) capable of executing control to transition to one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus non-internal winning state) and a second game state (e.g., a two-coin bet bonus internal winning state);
A notification means (e.g., a speaker (272, 277)) capable of executing a first notification (e.g., a first voice such as "Please check");
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation (e.g., an operation of closing the front door 102) is performed in the first gaming state,
the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state;
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying a first display (e.g., a text display of "Please check") [e.g., FIG. 23 (6)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the gaming machine is the first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, the attention of the gaming facility staff can be alerted even while the staff is performing maintenance work to check whether the display of the display means is operating normally.

The display means may be a means capable of starting to display the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means may be a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the first display is being displayed.

Also,
"The gaming state control means is a means for executing control to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition (for example, a condition in which a bonus role is won after a predetermined number of coins is bet and the bonus role is not won) is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first notification serves as a warning to perform the initial settings.

Also,
"The certain condition is a condition including the execution of one or more games [for example, one or more games must be executed to win a bonus role],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When a gaming establishment employee executes the game before the establishment opens, the player can play from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is a condition that includes playing one or more games with a predetermined number of coins bet, and winning a certain role. In other words, the certain condition may be a condition that may be met by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain role, or more specifically, a condition that may be met by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet, winning a certain role, but not winning the certain role. The same applies hereinafter as explained here.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for not executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined number of times [e.g., the second time] [e.g., FIG. 23 (8)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When the certain operation is performed after the specified number of times (e.g., the second time), the store clerk is often already aware of it, so redundant notifications can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice saying "Completed"] when the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The second notification allows the player to confirm that the unfavorable gaming state has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification suggesting that the game has transitioned to the second game state or that the game is in the second game state (for example, a notification such as "You are in the second game state"), or a notification that does not specify the target of the notification (for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returned") (the same applies below).

Also,
"A setting change means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10) that changes a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage to the player,
The certain operation is an operation that may be performed after the setting change process (for example, a process including the operation of the power switch 244 or the setting key switch 281, which cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened) is completed,
The notification means may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started (for example, FIG. 23 (6)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even though the setting change process has started and adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has begun, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification, making the person making the setting change aware that the player is in the first gaming state.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door is open (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means is a means capable of executing a third notification during the period from when the setting change process is started (e.g., FIG. 23 (3)) until the certain operation is performed (e.g., FIG. 23 (5)),"
The third notification is a notification that is executed when the setting change process is completed (for example, a voice notification such as "The door is open" or "The setting has been changed").
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The notification means may be a means for executing the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies below).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change process has been completed or a notification suggesting that the setting change process has been completed (for example, a notification such as "setting change has been completed"), or a notification about the status of the gaming machine (for example, a notification such as "door is open") (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 34 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 34 (82)], it is possible to continue playing with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 34 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 34 (61) to FIG. 34 (62)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means fraudulently into a false sense of security, which may allow the cheater to be exposed.

When the operation means is operated in the first state, the game may be continued, and after the game ends, the next game may not start unless the setting confirmation process is completed.

If the operation means is operated when no coins have been inserted, the subsequent betting operation may not be accepted. In other words, if the operation means is operated when no betting operation has been performed and the setting confirmation process is being performed, it may be possible that play cannot be started.

When the operating means is operated, this refers to a case where the setting confirmation process is not being executed.

The device is provided with a setting change means for carrying out a setting change process that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and the operating means may be a means that is also operated when changing the setting (the same applies below).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 34 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 34 (82)], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 34 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 34 (61) to FIG. 34 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" [e.g., FIG. 34 (52)] when the operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means fraudulently into a false start, which may enable the cheater to be exposed. In other words, after operating the operating means, a staff member at the gaming establishment can check the first display by the display means, which may enable the cheater to be discovered through the first display and the cheater to be exposed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress).

The device may include a door body [e.g., front door 102] and a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is open, and the display means may be a means that displays the first display when the operation means is operated while the sensor detects that the door body is open [e.g., FIG. 30 (52)], and may not display the first display when the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting the door body [e.g., FIG. 30 (55)].

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A setting confirmation means (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values (e.g., settings 1, 2, 4-6, b) that have different degrees of advantage for the player;
An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that is operated when the setting is confirmed;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157),
A gaming machine equipped with
the operation means is a means which may be operated in a first state,
The first state is a state in which one or more bets have been set (for example, the state of FIG. 34 (81) in which medals have been inserted by retrieving medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132),
When the operation means is operated in the first state [e.g., FIG. 34 (82)], the game can be continued with the bet amount set in the first state [e.g., the bet amount set in FIG. 34 (81)] [e.g., FIG. 34 (61) to FIG. 34 (62)],
The display means may display a first display (e.g., a display of "setting confirmation in progress" (e.g., FIG. 34 (52)) when the operation means is operated,
The display means may not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [e.g., FIG. 33 (82)], and may display the first display when a settlement operation is performed in the first state [e.g., FIG. 33 (58)] and the payout process is completed [e.g., FIG. 33 (59)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Because the operation of the operating means does not interrupt the game, it is possible to lull a cheater who has operated the operating means illegally into a false start, and it may be possible to expose the cheater. In other words, after the operating means is operated, a staff member at the gaming establishment can check the first display by the display means, and the first display may enable the cheater to be discovered and the cheater to be exposed. Also, there may be cases where the first display is not displayed even when the operating means is operated, and even in this case, the first display may be displayed when the player leaves the table after completing the settlement process, and the cheater may be discovered and the cheater may be exposed.

The device may be equipped with a door body [e.g., front door 102] and a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is open, and the display means may be a means [e.g., Fig. 30 (52)] that displays a first display [e.g., a display indicating that settings are being confirmed] when the operation means is operated in a state where the sensor detects that the door body is open, and a means [e.g., Fig. 30 (55)] that does not display the first display when the operation means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detecting the door body.

Also,
"A medal insertion slot [for example, medal insertion slot 141],
The first passage and
a second passageway (e.g., reservoir passageway 173);
A medal blocker (e.g., medal blocker 172) that distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port to either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [e.g., return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal insertion port to the first passage when the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 30 (52)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

After operating the operating means, the arcade staff can check the state of the medals passing through. In addition, since the game cannot be started after operating the operating means, the staff can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake.

The medal return passage is a passage that leads to the medal ejection outlet [e.g., medal payout outlet 155].

The second passage is a medal storage passage [e.g., storage passage 173], and medals that pass through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) [e.g., bucket 181].

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state (for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 3(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The operating means is a means that may be operated even in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 30 (54) (a state in which the opening and closing piece is pushed down by hand to open the front door 102)],
The medal blocker distributes medals inserted from the medal insertion port to the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, FIG. 30 (55)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not impeded.

The device may be equipped with a sensor [e.g., an opening sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable when the door is opened, and the second state may be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

The medal blocker may also distribute medals inserted through the medal insertion port to the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 30 (55)].

Also,
"A setting value display means [e.g., a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value is provided,
The set value display means may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 30 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Maintenance of the gaming machine in the second state is not impeded.

The setting value display means may be a means for not displaying the setting value in the second state even if the operating means is operated.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means [for example, a monitor LED provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248] that can emit light when the operating means is operated."
He also explained:

The light emitting means emits light to confirm that the operation of the operating means is being performed normally. In particular, when the setting value display means does not display the setting value even when the operating means is operated, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the operating means is operated."
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the operation of the operating means is being performed normally. In particular, in cases where the setting value display means does not display the setting value even when the operating means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm this from outside.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display"),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display when a first operation (e.g., an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281) is performed in a first state (e.g., the state of FIG. 33 (81) or FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are inserted by taking care of medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (e.g., FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82)),
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of an amusement facility, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation to be continued with priority. Note that, when maintenance is to be performed to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the state can be changed to a state different from the first state, allowing the maintenance to be carried out in stages.

The first operation refers to the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. The first state refers to a state in which one or more bets have been set, and a state different from the first state refers to a state in which play with the bets set in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and the payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress).

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display"),
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display when a first operation (e.g., an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281) is performed in a first state (e.g., the state of FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are inserted by taking care of medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [e.g., FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82)],
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)).
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display even when a second operation [e.g., an operation for causing the opening sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed while the first state is in the first case after the first case [e.g., FIG. 33 (57) or FIG. 34 (57)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of an amusement facility, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation to be continued with priority. Furthermore, if a second operation is subsequently performed while the display is still in the first state, the first display will not be displayed, allowing the maintenance work to continue with priority. Note that, if maintenance is to be performed to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the display means can be switched to a state different from the first state, allowing the maintenance to be carried out in stages.

The first operation refers to the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. The first state refers to a state in which one or more bets have been set, and a state different from the first state refers to a state in which play with the bets set in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and the payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress).

The device may include a door body [e.g., front door 102] and a sensor [e.g., opening sensor 294] that detects that the door body is open, and the second operation may be an operation that causes the sensor to detect that the door body is open.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a "setting confirmation display");
A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means for not displaying the first display when a first operation (e.g., an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281) is performed in a first state (e.g., the state of FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are inserted by taking care of medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [e.g., FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82)],
When a state different from the first state occurs after the first case (for example, the payout is completed by the settlement operation or the game ends with the bet amount set in the first state) (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first display is displayed by the display means (for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)).
The setting value display means is a means capable of displaying the setting value in the second case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

During maintenance work by a staff member of an amusement facility, the first operation prevents the first display from being displayed, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation to be continued with priority. Furthermore, if a second operation is subsequently performed while the display is still in the first state, the first display will not be displayed, allowing the maintenance work to continue with priority. Note that, if maintenance is to be performed to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, the display means can be switched to a state different from the first state, allowing the maintenance to be carried out in stages.

The set value may be selected from a number of different set values that provide different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first operation refers to the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. The first state refers to a state in which one or more bets have been set, and a state different from the first state refers to a state in which play with the bets set in the first state has ended, or a state in which a settlement operation has been performed in the first state and the payout process has been completed.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (e.g., the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is on. The setting confirmation refers to confirmation of the currently set setting value, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting value, and the display means displays the first display (e.g., a display indicating that setting confirmation is in progress).

In addition,
"The display means is a means for not displaying the set value in the first case.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Since the setting value is not displayed, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation was performed can be continued with even higher priority.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state (e.g., Fig. 33 (52), Fig. 33 (82), Fig. 34 (52), Fig. 34 (82)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Players may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The first state is a state in which one or more bets are set.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by game store staff.

Also,
"A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value is provided,
The setting value display means may not display the setting value even when the first operation is performed (for example, FIG. 30 (55)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

When maintenance work is being performed by a staff member of the gaming establishment, the first operation also hides the setting value, allowing the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation was performed to be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage given to the player, and for example, the set value may affect the probability of winning a special role or a big win, the payout rate of gaming media, or the probability of winning various lotteries (the same applies below).

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means [for example, a monitor LED provided on the main control board and the external central terminal board 248] that can emit light when the first operation is performed."
He also explained:

The light emitting means emits light to confirm that the first operation is being performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by having a transmitting means [e.g., an external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the first operation is performed."
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the first operation is being performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm this from outside.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"An operating means (e.g., a setting key switch 281) that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation;
A setting value display means (e.g., a setting value display 293) capable of displaying a setting value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The set value display means is a means for displaying a set value when an ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 33 (52) or FIG. 34 (52)],
The on operation refers to an operation of switching the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even when the ON operation is performed [for example, FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

In other words, the setting value display means is a means that, when an ON operation is performed, may or may not display the setting value.

Even if an unauthorized person performs the on operation during business hours, the unauthorized person cannot check the setting value.

The device may include a door body and a sensor that detects that the door body is open, and the set value display means may be a means for displaying the set value when the ON operation is performed while the sensor detects that the door body is open, and may be a means for not displaying the set value when the operation means is operated while the sensor is not detecting.

Also,
"Equipped with a door body [e.g., a front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The player may be prohibited from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means for displaying the set value when the operation means is in the off state [e.g., FIG. 32 (73)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The set value can be checked even when the operating means is in the off state, which may improve the ease of maintenance work by game arcade staff.

When the operation means is turned off in the on state and then the operation means is switched to the off state and then power is restored, the display means displays the setting value even when the operation means is in the off state.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a light-emitting means that can emit light when the on operation is performed [for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external central terminal board 248]."
He also explained:

The light emitting means can be illuminated to confirm that the on operation has been performed normally. In particular, when the display means does not display the setting value even when the on operation has been performed, it is useful for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
"A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., an external central terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to an external device [e.g., a hall computer] when the on operation is performed."
He also explained:

It is possible to externally confirm that the ON operation has been performed normally. In particular, in cases where the display means does not display the setting value even when the ON operation has been performed, it is useful to be able to confirm this from the outside.

The actions and effects described in the above-described embodiments are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc. described above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc. In other words, as long as there is no factor preventing the application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, appendices, etc., and applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, appendices, etc., it will still form a unified technical idea.

Below, using Figures 44 to 77, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 44 to 77 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 44 to 77, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 44 to 77 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 44 to 77.

[Embodiment A]
The slot machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels, each decorated with multiple types of patterns, begin to spin when a predetermined rotation start command operation is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start command operation, a lottery is held to determine whether or not multiple types of roles have been internally won, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined rotation stop command operation is received.If the conditions determined by the role based on the result of the lottery and the combination of patterns when the multiple reels stop meet predetermined payout conditions, gaming media are paid out and the game ends, but if they do not meet, the game ends without paying out any gaming media.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 44. Figure 44 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 101, and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the reel window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each reel 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the reel window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 114 that are valid. The winning lines 114 that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, when two medals are bet, three lines including the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are valid, and when three medals are bet, five lines including the right-downward winning line and the right-upward winning line are valid. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five, and may be one line of the middle horizontal winning line. Also, for example, when one medal is bet, the five lines including the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right-downward winning line, and the right-upward winning line may be set as valid winning lines, and the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, a bonus role) has been internally won in an internal winning role lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a gaming medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the bet button 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically (betting operation) using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are configured as seven-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 in this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that notifies information regarding stop operations (e.g., the operation sequence of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in correspondence with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as the left stop button), the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as the middle stop button), and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as the right stop button).

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137-139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation as the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning is referred to as the operation order or push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is referred to as the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", the operation order in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 is referred to as the "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is referred to as the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". In this embodiment, the stop operation and the operation sequence of the combination of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 may be written as "left", and a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the center reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112 may be written as "left center right". Light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies may be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is an outlet for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

A sound hole 181 is provided next to the medal payout outlet 155. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to liven up the game. A performance device 160 is provided at the top of the front door 102, and sound holes 143 are also provided at the top of the performance device 160. The sound holes 181 and 143 are holes for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown, performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

The liquid crystal display device (performance image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a performance device that executes the performance described below. For example, it executes operation navigation that notifies information about the stop operation (for example, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling up and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various pieces of information by the individual player). The information display button 191 is composed of a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of multiple options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and by operating each arrow key, the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow. The OK button 191b is a button for confirming the option where the cursor is positioned. In this embodiment, for example, it is used when setting information using a user menu, when setting volume or light intensity, and when selecting a character (stage) for a performance that is executed after winning a bonus. In this embodiment, the information display button 191 may be written as a cross button 191.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing an effect that prompts the user to operate the button. In this embodiment, when the effect button 192 is operated, an effect is executed as a response effect that suggests the granting of a bonus, such as an additional number of coins in the AT.

It is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, it may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is square and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Figure 45 shows the internal configuration of the slot machine 100, where (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and (b) is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 disposed on the front door 102.

The main body 101 is a box surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and a reel unit 700 equipped with three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below the main control board storage case 210. A sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a sub-control board is arranged on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side panel 260 on the left side as viewed from the front. In addition, an information output circuit 334 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side as viewed from the front.

Also, to the right of the reel unit 700, there is provided a setting key switch 281 for changing the setting value (also called the game mode) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the setting value is a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the game machine to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing for a specified period of time, and is known as the "payout rate." Multiple setting values, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6," can be set.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned ON/OFF by inserting and rotating a specific setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a specific setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, a setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when rotated counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor detects the OFF state.

Then, the hopper unit 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this hopper unit 180, i.e., below the reel unit 700, a power supply device 252 having a voltage monitoring circuit 330 (see FIG. 46) is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be used to turn the slot machine 100 on (power ON) or off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. Furthermore, it is provided with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off.

To the right of the hopper unit 180, there is disposed an auxiliary medal storage 240 for storing medals that overflow from the hopper unit 180, and behind this is disposed an overflow terminal (not shown). The power supply unit 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to this extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the reel window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls the performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the reel window 113, there are provided the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181. An open sensor 294 is provided on the back of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

A door relay board 290 is disposed on the back of the front door 102 below the reel window 113. As shown in FIG. 45(b), this door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293.

The reset switch 291 is a push button switch, and an error in the slot machine 100 can be cleared by pressing (shortly pressing) this reset switch 291.

The setting change button 292 is a push button switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using this setting change button 292 will be described later.

The setting value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display the setting values (game modes) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292 in numbers.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting value display 293 displays the currently set setting value in numbers, so it can be used to check the currently set setting value. In other words, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value check process that allows the setting value to be checked is started, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON → OFF), the setting value check process ends.

The procedure for changing the set value will now be described. The set value change is enabled (the set value change process is started) by inserting the set key (not shown) into the set key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (set key OFF → ON) and switching the power switch 244 from a power-off state (power OFF) to a power-on state (power ON). Each time the set value change button 292 is pressed, the set value changes in sequence from 1 to 6, allowing the desired set value to be selected. The set value selected at that time is confirmed by operating the start lever 135. Finally, the set key is turned counterclockwise (set key ON → OFF) to end the set value change process.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 46. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, information display button 191 sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, and stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130-132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The information display button 191 sensor detects the operation of the information display button 191, and the performance button 192 sensor detects the operation of the performance button 192. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored coins indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

An information output circuit 334 is also connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also includes a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to the speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, which is connected to a shutter sensor 428 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and other components.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 has a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
The arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 47. This figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

Each of the reels 110-112 has a predetermined number of frames (20 frames numbered 1-20) of symbols of multiple types (8 types in this embodiment) as shown on the right side of the figure. The numbers 1-20 shown on the left side of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of the symbols on each of the reels 110-112. For example, in this embodiment, the "bell" symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, the "watermelon" symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "seven 1" symbol is arranged on the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

<Slot Machine Processing>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In these initial settings, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, the sensor circuit 320 detects whether an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130-132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141 has been performed, and if an insertion operation has been performed, the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the number of medals inserted. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is made as to whether the start lever 135 has been operated based on detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever has been operated, the number of medals inserted is confirmed and preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning roles is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning roles, a winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT game state), and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value obtained in step S104. If any winning role (including an activated role) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device (flag) of the role that was internally won is activated (the flag of that winning role is turned ON). In addition, in this step S105, preparations are made to send an internal win command indicating the result of the internal lottery for winning roles to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal win command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and if the result of the internal lottery for winning roles is a miss (non-winner of a winning role), preparations are made to send an internal win command indicating a miss to the first sub-control unit 400.

To give an overview of the internal probability of winning a winning role, the internal probability of winning each role is calculated by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role by the numerical data (65536 in this embodiment) in the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described below. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each role and loss. In the winning role internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any role, and the internal winning role is determined. In practice, in this winning role internal lottery process, lottery data corresponding to the current setting value is used from six lottery data prepared for each setting value. The six lottery data prepared for each setting value have different winning probabilities for at least one role.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the internal lottery for winning roles in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of winning roles for which the stop operation order is required, and when the corresponding reel stop data is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process is executed based on the start operation to start the rotation of all reels 110 to 112.

In step S108, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is referenced in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop data. If all of the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 1 command, for the second stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button acceptance 3 command), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, a reel stop 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a reel stop 3 command).

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is performed for the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139, and if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if a "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon win has occurred. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to send a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if any winning combination that results in a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out. Also, in step S110, preparations are made to send a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to transition the game state (RT game state, AT game state), and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made so that BB play can start from the next time. Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to send a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

This completes one game. The game then progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 49) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Note that Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S203, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the detection signals are stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is executed.

In step S205, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S203 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 48.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 48.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 50. Note that Figure 50 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 50 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 50 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 50(a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S304, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S305, a performance control process (described in detail below) is performed. Here, the performance is prepared according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, an information output process is performed to set up sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 contains a command to send to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 50(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 50(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S501, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 50(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S502, the command set in step S309 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 51. Note that Figure 51 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 51 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 51 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 51 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 in FIG. 51(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. This initialization process includes initial settings for the input/output ports, initialization of the memory area in RAM 508, initialization of the memory area in VRAM 518, etc.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 identifies each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail below) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if the performance data read in step S605 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 51(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 51(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S801, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 51(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S802, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S4006 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 51(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

＜Gameplay＞
Next, the gameplay of this embodiment will be described. Fig. 52(a) is a diagram showing the overall game flow, and is a transition diagram of the game state (also called the AT game state, hereinafter abbreviated as the game state) related to the presentation of the main control unit 300.

Advantageous zone/non-advantageous zone The game state is broadly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone. The non-advantageous zone is the initial state, and is a period during which the operation navigation cannot be executed. In the non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone normal state exists. On the other hand, the advantageous zone is a period during which the operation navigation can be executed. Here, the operation navigation is a performance that notifies the stop operation content that helps the player win using the liquid crystal display device 157 or the payout number display 127, and is a performance that notifies the stop operation sequence and the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internal winning role). In the advantageous zone, there are an advantageous zone normal state, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), a normal AT state, a special zone, a pullback chance zone, and an ending state. In this embodiment, the non-advantageous zone normal state, the advantageous zone normal state, and the CZ are collectively referred to as the "normal state". In addition, the normal AT state, the special zone, the pullback chance zone, and the ending state are collectively referred to as the "AT state".

Regarding the state transition between the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone, if a predetermined condition is met in the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (for example, based on the winning role in the winning role internal lottery process, other than a miss), the zone will transition to the normal state of the advantageous zone (see route R1 in FIG. 52(a)). On the other hand, when the AT state of the advantageous zone ends, the zone will transition to the normal state of the non-advantageous zone (see route R2 in FIG. 52(a)). However, even if the AT state ends, there may be cases where the zone does not transition to the non-advantageous zone (for example, when the AT state ends and transitions to the normal state of the advantageous zone). Note that the AT state in this embodiment is a difference number management type AT state, and when the difference number in the AT state reaches a specified number, the AT state ends. Here, the difference number refers to the difference between the number of game media (for example, medals) paid out and the number of game media inserted.

Character Accompanying State In this embodiment, the game state can be classified from the viewpoint of which character accompanies the main character (Lord). Hereinafter, this game state is referred to as a character accompanying state. The character accompanying state includes a "non-accompanying state" in which only the Lord appears in the performance, a "princess accompanying state" in which the Lord is accompanied by a princess and appears in the performance, a "grandfather accompanying state" in which the Lord is accompanied by a grandfather and appears in the performance, and a "grandfather & princess accompanying state" in which the Lord is accompanied by a princess and a grandfather and appears in the performance. The princess accompanying state, grandfather accompanying state, and grandfather & princess accompanying state are collectively referred to as "accompanying state". In this embodiment, the accompanying state is more advantageous for the player than the non-accompanying state. For example, the probability of transitioning from the current game state to a more favorable game state is set high (for example, there is a high probability of transitioning from the favorable zone normal state to the CZ state, from the CZ state to the AT state, or from the AT state to a specialized zone), the favorable game state is set to continue for a longer period of time (for example, the AT is added and the conditions for ending the AT state are set more favorable), or special effects are executed (for example, a corresponding role winning announcement effect that is executed when the corresponding role of the accompanying character described below is won).

Figure 53 shows the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in each character accompanying state. In more detail, Figure 53(a) shows the characters in the non-accompanying state, Figure 53(b) shows the characters in the princess accompanying state, Figure 53(c) shows the characters in the grandfather accompanying state, and Figure 53(d) shows the characters in the grandfather & princess accompanying state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the character accompaniment state exists in the normal advantageous zone state, the CZ, and the normal AT state. FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the game states and the character accompaniment state shown in FIG. 52(a). For example, in the normal advantageous zone state, there exist a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state, in the CZ there exist a princess accompanying state and an old man accompanying state, and in the normal AT state there exist a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an old man accompanying state, and an old man & princess accompanying state. However, the character accompaniment state may be set in a game state other than the normal advantageous zone state, the CZ, or the normal AT state. For example, the character accompaniment state may be set in the ending state.

・Normal advantageous zone state In the normal advantageous zone state, a CZ transition lottery process is executed for each game to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state. If the CZ transition lottery is won, the game transitions from the normal advantageous zone state to the CZ (see route R3 in FIG. 52(a)). In rare cases, when special conditions are met (for example, when a rare role is won), the game may transition directly from the normal advantageous zone state to the AT state without passing through the CZ state (see route R4 in FIG. 52(a)).

Figure 54(a) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the accompanying lottery process in the normal advantageous zone state (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used in the accompanying lottery process), and Figure 54(b) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the CZ transition lottery process in the normal advantageous zone state (more specifically, the CZ entry lottery table used in the CZ transition lottery process).

The accompanying lottery process is a lottery process that determines the accompanying character, and is executed every time a game is played. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the accompanying lottery process is executed based on the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, if a watermelon is won, there is a 25% selection rate for Old Man to be selected as the accompanying character, if a chance eye is won, there is a 100% selection rate for Old Man to be selected as the accompanying character, if a weak cherry is won, there is a 25% selection rate for Princess to be selected as the accompanying character, and if a strong cherry is won, there is a 100% selection rate for Princess to be selected as the accompanying character.

In addition, the initial character accompaniment state in the normal advantageous zone state is a non-accompaniment state. In addition, once an accompaniment state (for example, princess accompaniment state, old man accompaniment state, old man & princess accompaniment state) is set, it is maintained for the guaranteed number of games (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), and whether the accompaniment state ends or continues is determined based on the result of the accompaniment end lottery executed every time the guaranteed number of games has elapsed (specifically, in the princess accompaniment state, the princess accompaniment end lottery that ends the princess accompaniment state, in the old man accompaniment state, the old man accompaniment end lottery that ends the old man accompaniment state, in the old man & princess accompaniment state, the princess accompaniment end lottery that ends the princess accompaniment state and the old man accompaniment end lottery that ends the old man accompaniment state). For example, the accompaniment end lottery may be a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 based on the bet operation or start lever operation, or the accompaniment state may end when the winning role in the winning role internal lottery process is a replay. Furthermore, in a state where two characters are accompanying each other, that is, in a grandfather and princess accompanying state, restrictions are imposed so that the accompanying state does not end for two consecutive games. This is a measure to reduce disappointment for the player. For example, in a grandfather and princess accompanying state, if the grandfather accompanying state ends in the Nth game, restrictions are imposed so that the princess accompanying state does not end in the N+1th game. Hereinafter, this restriction is also referred to as an accompanying end restriction. Note that, in this embodiment, the accompanying end restriction is set to a restriction that the accompanying state does not end for two consecutive games, but is not limited to this. For example, if one accompanying end lottery is won, restrictions may be imposed so that another accompanying end lottery is not won for a predetermined number of games (e.g., five games, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 54(a), in this embodiment, accompanying characters are associated with winning roles. Specifically, the character associated with watermelon and chance eyes is Old Man, and the character associated with weak cherry and strong cherry is Princess. Hereinafter, the winning role associated with the accompanying character is referred to as the "corresponding role of the accompanying character."

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), a CZ transition lottery process is executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning role in the winning role internal lottery process. For example, in the non-accompanying state, the probability of winning the CZ when a watermelon or weak cherry is won is 0%, and the probability of winning the CZ when a chance eye or strong cherry is won is 2%. Also, for example, in the old man accompanying state, the probability of winning the CZ when a watermelon is won is 25%, the probability of winning the CZ when a chance eye is won is 55%, and the probability of winning the CZ when a weak cherry or strong cherry is won is 0%.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), in this embodiment, transition to CZ is easier in the accompanying state than in the non-accompanying state. Also, even in the accompanying state, transition to CZ is easier in a state where two characters are accompanied (grandfather and princess accompanied state) than in a state where only one character is accompanied (princess accompanied state, grandfather accompanied state). Also, in the internal winning role lottery process in the accompanying state, if the role corresponding to the accompanying character is won, transition to CZ is easier than if other roles are won.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the Grandfather's corresponding role (watermelon, chance eye) in the Grandfather accompanied state and transitioning to CZ is the same as the probability of winning the Princess' corresponding role (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the Princess accompanied state and transitioning to CZ, but they may not be the same, and winning the role of the accompanying character's corresponding role in one accompanying state may be treated as more favorable than winning the role of the accompanying character's corresponding role in another accompanying state.

Game progress in the normal advantageous zone state Next, using Figure 55, game progress in the normal advantageous zone state will be explained.

Figure 55 (a) shows a time chart and example presentation that chronologically shows the progress of the game when transitioning from a non-accompanied state to an accompanied state and then back to a non-accompanied state.

Figure 55 (a) shows a case where the accompanying lottery was won in the M+1th game (when the accompanying lottery based on the weak cherry win was won. See Figure 54 (a)), so the princess accompanying state started in the M+1th game, and the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state ended in the M+21st game. Note that although the princess accompanying state started in the M+1th game, the princess accompanying premonition effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in the M+1th game (for example, the princess appears only halfway on the screen. See Figure 55 (a-1)). In this way, the character accompanying state and the state of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 157 do not necessarily match. Note that even if the princess accompanying premonition effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, the character accompanying state is the princess accompanying state, so the CZ transition lottery is executed based on the princess accompanying state (see Figure 54 (b)). However, when the premonition effect is being executed, the CZ transition lottery may be executed based on the non-accompanying state.

In addition, FIG. 55(a) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games for the princess accompany state ended in the M+21st game, so the accompany end lottery (princess accompany end lottery) started in the M+22nd game, and the accompany end lottery (princess accompany end lottery) was won in the M+23rd game, so the non-accompany state started in the M+23rd game. Note that since the accompany end lottery (princess accompany end lottery) was not won in the M+22nd game, an image of the princess accompany state was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see FIG. 55(a-2)), and since the accompany end lottery (princess accompany end lottery) was won in the M+23rd game, after the accompany end lottery, a blackout image was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see FIG. 55(a-3)), and then an image of the non-accompany state was displayed (see FIG. 55(a-4)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the accompanying state ends, the accompanying character is erased via a blackout or whiteout ending image, and then an image of the non-accompanying state is displayed. This allows the player to clearly recognize that the character's accompanying state has changed. Note that the transition from an accompanying state image to a non-accompanying state image is not limited to this method, and for example, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 may be temporarily blocked using a sliding door or shutter before the transition, or when the accompanying state ends, the stage may be changed to clearly notify the player that the character's accompanying state has changed.

Figure 55 (b) is a time chart showing the progress of the game over time when two characters transition from an accompanying state to a non-accompanying state.

Figure 55 (b) shows a case where, after N playthroughs in the Princess Accompanying state (with 20 games remaining), the player wins the Accompanying lottery in the N+1 playthrough (when the Accompanying lottery is won based on a watermelon win; see Figure 54 (a)), so the Grandfather & Princess Accompanying state starts in the N+1 playthrough, the guaranteed number of games in the Princess Accompanying state ends in the N+21 playthrough, and the guaranteed number of games in the Grandfather Accompanying state ends in the N+22 playthrough.

In addition, FIG. 55(b) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games for the princess accompany state has ended in the N+21st game, so the lottery for ending the accompaniment (lottery for ending the princess accompaniment) starts in the N+22nd game, and the lottery for ending the accompaniment (lottery for ending the princess accompaniment) is won in the N+22nd game, so the grandfather accompanies the player in the N+22nd game.

Figure 55(b) shows a case where the guaranteed number of games for the Grandfather accompaniment state has ended in the N+22nd game, so the lottery for ending the accompaniment (grandfather accompaniment end lottery) is started in the N+23rd game, and the lottery for ending the accompaniment (grandfather accompaniment end lottery) is won in the N+23rd game, but the Grandfather accompaniment state is maintained due to the above-mentioned restriction on ending the accompaniment. However, the lottery for ending the accompaniment (grandfather accompaniment end lottery) is won in the next game, the N+24th game, so the Grandfather accompaniment state ends and a non-accompaniment state begins in the N+24th game. In this way, in this embodiment, the end of the accompaniment state is restricted over two consecutive games, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disappointed.

Effects of the normal advantageous zone state Next, effects of the normal advantageous zone state will be described with reference to Figures 56 and 57. Figures 56 and 57 show an example of effects in a given game in the normal advantageous zone state.

Figure 56 (a) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won and a weak cherry wins in the internal lottery process for winning roles in a game in a non-accompanying state (see characters in Figure 56 (a-1)). According to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 56 (a), a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion presentation is executed based on the start operation, suggesting that either a weak cherry or watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 56 (a-2)), and after the third stop operation, a weak cherry winning notification presentation is executed to notify the winner of a weak cherry based on the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 in Figure 56 (a-3)).

Figure 56 (b) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the internal lottery process for winning a prize in a game in the princess accompaniment state (see the characters in Figure 56 (b-1)) and a weak cherry is won. According to the example of the performance shown in Figure 56 (b), a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion performance is executed based on the start operation, which suggests that either a weak cherry or a watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 56 (b-2)), and after the third stop operation, a weak cherry winning notification performance is executed based on the weak cherry winning (see image d2 in Figure 56 (b-3)), which notifies the weak cherry winning, and a weak cherry winning notification performance exclusive to the princess accompaniment state is executed (see image d3 in Figure 56 (b-3). For example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression, unlike the stopped state). In this way, when a corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, which suggests that the corresponding role (weak cherry) of the accompanying character (princess) will be won. In addition, since strong cherries are also the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the princess accompaniment state, if a strong cherry is won in the internal winning role lottery process for the game in the princess accompaniment state and a strong cherry wins, image d3 is displayed and a corresponding role winning notification performance (see image d3 in Figure 56 (b-3)) is executed, suggesting that the corresponding role of the accompanying character (strong cherry) has been won.

As a result, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, that is, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, making them aware that a special performance has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, that is, players who know that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, emphasizing that they have won the role corresponding to the accompanying character, and stimulating their desire to play.

Figure 56 (c) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won in the internal lottery process for winning roles in a game in the princess accompaniment state (see characters in Figure 56 (c-1)) and a watermelon wins. According to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 56 (c), a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion presentation is executed based on the start operation, suggesting that either a weak cherry or watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 56 (c-2)), and after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification presentation is executed based on the watermelon winning (see image d4 in Figure 56 (c-3)). In the princess accompaniment state, watermelon is not a corresponding role for the accompanying character, so unlike Figure 56 (b), a corresponding role winning notification presentation is not executed.

Figure 57 (a) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won in the internal lottery process for winning roles in a game in the old man accompanying state (see characters in Figure 57 (a-1)) and a watermelon is won. According to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 57 (a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion presentation is executed which suggests that either a weak cherry or a watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 57 (a-2)), and after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification presentation is executed which notifies the player that a watermelon has been won based on the watermelon winning (see image d4 in Figure 57 (a-3)), and a watermelon winning notification presentation exclusive to the old man accompanying state is executed (see image d5 in Figure 57 (a-3). For example, image d5 shows that the old man has a smiling expression, unlike in the stopped state). In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d5 in Figure 57 (a-3)) is executed, suggesting that the accompanying character's corresponding role (watermelon) has been won. Note that in the old man accompanying state, the chance eye is also the accompanying character's corresponding role, so if the chance eye is won in the internal lottery process for winning roles in the game in the old man accompanying state, and the chance eye is won, image d5 is also displayed, and a corresponding role winning notification effect is executed, suggesting that the accompanying character's corresponding role (chance eye) has been won.

As a result, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win watermelon or a chance combination in the old man accompanying state, that is, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the accompanying character's corresponding role, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, making them aware that a special performance has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the accompanying character's corresponding role. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win watermelon or a chance combination in the old man accompanying state, that is, players who know that it is advantageous to win the accompanying character's corresponding role, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, emphasizing that they have won the accompanying character's corresponding role, stimulating the player's desire to play.

Figure 57 (b) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won and a weak cherry is won in the internal lottery process for winning roles in a game in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state (see characters in Figure 57 (b-1)). According to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 57 (b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion presentation is executed, which suggests that either a weak cherry or a watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 57 (b-2)), and based on the third stop operation and the winning of a weak cherry, a weak cherry winning notification presentation is executed, which notifies the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 in Figure 57 (b-3)), and a weak cherry winning notification presentation exclusive to the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state is executed (see images d3 and d5 in Figure 56 (b-3). For example, unlike the Grandfather and Princess stopped state, image d3 shows the princess smiling and image d5 shows the grandfather laughing). In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification performance (see images d3 and d5 in FIG. 56 (b-3)) is executed, suggesting that the accompanying character's (princess) corresponding role (weak cherry) has been won. Note that in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state, strong cherries, chance eyes, and watermelons are also corresponding roles for the accompanying characters, so even if a strong cherry, chance eye, or watermelon is won in the winning role internal lottery process for play in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state, and a cherry, chance eye, or watermelon is won, images d3 and d5 are displayed, and a corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, suggesting that the accompanying character's corresponding role (strong cherry, chance eye, watermelon) has been won.

Figure 57 (c) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won and a watermelon is won in the internal lottery process for winning roles in a game in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state (see characters in Figure 57 (c-1)). According to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 57 (c), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion presentation is executed, which suggests that either a weak cherry or a watermelon will be won (see image d1 in Figure 57 (c-2)), and based on the watermelon winning after the third stop operation, a watermelon winning notification presentation is executed, which notifies the player that a watermelon has been won (see image d4 in Figure 57 (c-3)), and a watermelon winning notification presentation exclusive to the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state is executed (see images d3 and d5 in Figure 56 (c-3). For example, unlike the Grandfather and Princess stopped state, image d3 shows the princess smiling, and image d5 shows the Grandfather laughing). In this manner, if the player wins the role corresponding to the accompanying character in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect (see images d3 and d5 in Figure 56 (c-3)) is executed, which indicates that the accompanying character (old man)'s corresponding role (watermelon) has been won.

In this way, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance eye, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state, that is, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, so that the players can recognize that a special performance has been executed and that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance eye, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state, that is, players who know that it is advantageous to win the role corresponding to the accompanying character, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed, so that the players' motivation to play can be stimulated by emphasizing that they have won the role corresponding to the accompanying character. In particular, since the state in which two characters accompany is more advantageous than the state in which one character accompanies (see FIG. 54(b)), when the corresponding role winning notification performance by two accompanying characters is executed, the interest of the players can be further increased.

In the Grandfather & Princess accompaniment state, image d3 displayed in the corresponding role notification effect in the Princess accompaniment state and image d5 displayed in the corresponding role notification effect in the Grandfather accompaniment state are displayed as the corresponding role winning notification effect, but it is not limited to image d3 and image d5, and it is also possible to display an image that is only displayed in the Grandfather & Princess accompaniment state.

・CZ
CZ is a game state in which the player aims to acquire points in a predetermined period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment). After the end of the predetermined period, CZ executes an AT lottery process to determine whether or not to transition to a normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period. If the player wins the AT lottery process in CZ, the player transitions to the AT normal state (see route R5 in FIG. 52(a)), and if the player does not win the AT lottery process, the player transitions to the advantageous zone normal state (see route R3 in FIG. 52(a)). FIG. 58(c) is a table that diagrammatically illustrates the AT lottery process (more specifically, the point-specific AT lottery table used in the AT lottery process).

As shown in FIG. 58(c), in this embodiment, if the total number of points acquired over a 20-game period is 500 points or between 0 and 50 points, there is a 100% probability, i.e., a guaranteed transition to the AT state. Also, if the total number of points acquired toward 500 is 51 points or more, the higher the probability of transitioning to the AT state, the higher the probability.

The character accompaniment state of the CZ is determined by executing an accompaniment lottery process when transitioning from the normal advantageous zone state. The determined accompaniment character remains the same for a period of 20 games. In more detail, the accompaniment lottery process determines either the princess or the grandfather, so the CZ starts with the princess accompaniment state or the grandfather accompaniment state set (see Figure 52 (b)). In other words, a non-accompaniment state or a grandfather & princess accompaniment state is never set in the CZ.

The mechanism by which points are awarded in a CZ in a companion state set in this way will be explained using Figures 58(a), 58(b), and 60. Note that Figure 60 shows an example of the presentation in a specific play of the CZ.

In the CZ, the character corresponding to each reel is determined by the character arrangement lottery process at the time of betting operation for each game. FIG. 58(a) is a table that shows the character arrangement lottery process (more specifically, the character arrangement pattern lottery table used in the character arrangement lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(a), pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 20%. When pattern 1 is selected, a non-accompanying character is associated with the left reel 110, a lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and an accompanying character is associated with the right reel 112. On the other hand, when pattern 2 is selected, a ninja is associated with the left reel 110, a lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and an accompanying character is associated with the right reel 112. In other words, in either case, the accompanying character set in the character arrangement lottery process is associated with the right reel 112. For example, the game shown in FIG. 60(a) shows a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompaniment state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 60(a-1)). Note that the games shown in FIG. 60(b) and FIG. 60(c) also show a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompaniment state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 60(b-1), FIG. 60(c-1)).

When playing CZ after arranging the characters in this way, if the push order bell is an internal winner and the content of the first stop operation matches the content notified by the operation navigation, the player can earn a number of points based on the character associated with the first stop reel in that game.

Here, first, the push order bell of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a table showing the lottery probability of the push order bell of this embodiment, the payout number in the case of correct operation, and the display mode and payout number for each operation content. The push order bell is composed of overlapping roles, and when the role is internally won in the winning role internal lottery process, the winning role and the payout number are different depending on the content of the stop operation (for example, the order of the stop operation). The maximum payout number is awarded when the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Note that (1) the left, center, and right stop operation may be expressed as an LCR operation, (2) the left, right, and center stop operation may be expressed as an LRC operation, (3) the center, left, and right stop operation may be expressed as a CLR operation, (4) the center, right, and left stop operation may be expressed as a CRL operation, (5) the right, left, and center stop operation may be expressed as an RLC operation, and (6) the right, center, and left stop operation may be expressed as an RCL operation.

The push order bell of this embodiment is divided into six types: (1) push order bell_LCR, where the correct operation is the LCR operation; (2) push order bell_LRC, where the correct operation is the LRC operation; (3) push order bell_CLR, where the correct operation is the CLR operation; (4) push order bell_CRL, where the correct operation is the CRL operation; (5) push order bell_RLC, where the correct operation is the RLC operation; and (6) push order bell_RCL, where the correct operation is the RCL operation. For example, when the push order bell_LCR is internally won and the LCR operation is performed, six medals are paid out when the LCR operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, when the push order bell_CRL is internally won and the CRL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals are paid out, and when the push order bell_RCL is internally won and the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the CZ, when the push order bell is internally won, the operation navigation is executed. Therefore, in a game in which the push order bell of the CZ is internally won, if the correct stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation, the maximum payout number that can be awarded in the game can be acquired and the number of points of the character associated with the first stop reel can be acquired. Here, the number of points based on the character associated with the first stop reel (hereinafter also referred to as the selected character) is determined by the selected character point lottery process. Figure 58 (b) is a table that shows the selected character point lottery process (more specifically, the point lottery table for each selected character used in the selected character point lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 58 (b), when the selected character is a non-accompanying character, the number of points 25 is awarded with an 80% selection probability, and the number of points 55 is awarded with a 20% selection probability. Additionally, if the selected character is a companion character, there is a 10% chance of being selected to receive 25 points, a 45% chance of being selected to receive 55 points, a 35% chance of being selected to receive 100 points, and a 10% chance of being selected to receive 200 points.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), in this embodiment, the expected points to be acquired are greater when the selected character is a Tono or Ninja (expected points are 61.25 for both) than when the selected character is a non-accompanying character (expected points are 31), and the expected points to be acquired are greater when the selected character is a companion character (expected points are 82.25) than when the selected character is a Tono or Ninja. In this way, in this embodiment, it is easier to acquire high points when the selected character is a companion character. In other words, it is set so that the expected points to be acquired are greater when Push Order Bell_RCL or Push Order Bell_RCL, which are push order bells with the first stop operation right being the correct answer, are won and the first stop reel is set to the right.

- CZ performance Figure 60 (a) shows an example of a performance when the push order bell_CRL is internally won and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation in the princess accompanying state (more precisely, in the princess accompanying state where pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process and the grandfather corresponds to the left reel 110, the prince to the middle reel 111, and the princess to the right reel 112), and shows the performance when 55 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. In other words, it shows the performance when the selected character is the prince and 55 points, which has a selection rate of 55%, are selected in the selected character point lottery process shown in Figure 58 (b).

In this case, characters are displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in Figure 60 (a-2), the numbers 312 are displayed in accordance with the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation sequence. Note that the number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for the other stop operations), and after the first stop operation, the number of points acquired is displayed along with the selected character (for example, the image of the boss is displayed along with the text such as 55Pt), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in the CZ is displayed (for example, 55Pt is displayed in the top right corner of the screen).

Figure 60(b) shows an example of the presentation when the push order bell_RCL is internally selected in the princess accompaniment state (more precisely, the princess accompaniment state in which pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the grandfather is associated with the left reel 110, the prince with the middle reel 111, and the princess with the right reel 112), and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification content of the operation navigation, and shows the presentation when 200 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. In other words, it shows the presentation when the selected character is the princess (accompanying character) and the number of points, 200, with a selection rate of 10% is selected in the selected character point lottery process shown in Figure 58(b).

In this case, characters are displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in Figure 60 (b-2), the numbers 321 are displayed in accordance with the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation. Note that the numbers for the first stop operation are displayed larger than the numbers for the other stop operations), the number of points acquired is displayed along with the selected character after the first stop operation (for example, the image of the princess is displayed along with the text "Get 200 Points"), and the total number of points acquired in the CZ is displayed after the third stop operation (for example, 200 Points is displayed in the top right corner of the screen).

Figure 60(c) shows an example of the presentation when the push order bell_LCR is internally selected in the princess accompaniment state (more precisely, the princess accompaniment state in which pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the prince with the middle reel 111, and the princess with the right reel 112), and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification content of the operation navigation, and shows the presentation when 25 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. In other words, it shows the presentation when the selected character is the old man (non-accompanying character) and the number of points, 25, with a selection rate of 80%, is selected in the selected character point lottery process shown in Figure 58(b).

In this case, characters are displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and an operation navigation image is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, as shown in Figure 60 (c-2), the numbers 123 are displayed in accordance with the position of the corresponding reel according to the correct stop operation. Note that the number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for the other stop operations), the number of points acquired is displayed along with the selected character after the first stop operation (for example, the image of an old man and text such as "You got 25 points" are displayed), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points acquired in the CZ is displayed (for example, 250 points or the like is displayed in the top right corner of the screen).

Note that Figure 60 describes a game in which the push order bell is internally won in the CZ, but even if the push order bell is not internally won in the CZ, the character arrangement lottery process is executed and the characters corresponding to each reel are displayed in an arrangement, but since the selected character point lottery process is not executed, points are not awarded.

In the above explanation, the CZ has a fixed period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), but this is not limited to this. For example, if a rare role is won in the winning role internal lottery process, the CZ play period may be extended or the number of games may not be counted.

Normal AT state The normal AT state is set to end when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the initial end difference (for example, in this embodiment, 300 sheets per set). In the normal AT state, a number-adding lottery process that adds a number to the initial end difference, and a specialized zone lottery process that determines whether to move to a specialized zone are executed every game. If the number-adding lottery is won, the number determined by the number-adding lottery is added to the initial end difference. This added difference is called the end difference of the addition. In the normal AT state, when the difference reaches the initial end difference or the end difference of the addition, the normal AT state ends. When the normal AT state ends, it transitions to the pullback chance zone (see route R6 in FIG. 52(a)). Also, if the specialized zone lottery process is won in the normal AT state, it transitions to the specialized zone (see route R7 in FIG. 52(a)). In addition, the specialized zone is an advantageous game state for players who can easily add more coins, and the added coins awarded in the specialized zone are added to the ending difference in the added coins. In addition, when the difference in the number of coins becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 2000 coins in this embodiment) in the normal AT state, the game transitions to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 52(a)).

Figure 61 (a) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the accompanying lottery process in the normal AT state (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used in the accompanying lottery process), which is a lottery process that determines accompanying characters. The contents of the accompanying lottery table shown in Figure 61 (a) are the same as the contents of the accompanying lottery table in the normal advantageous zone state, so a description will be omitted. In other words, in this embodiment, accompanying characters are associated with winning roles even in the normal AT state. Note that the initial character accompanying state in the normal AT state is a non-accompanying state.

Figure 61 (b) is a table that shows a schematic diagram of the number-addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process (more specifically, the number-addition selection table used in the number-addition lottery process, and the specialized zone lottery table used in the specialized zone lottery process). The number-addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process are each executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning role in the winning role internal lottery process. For example, in the number-addition lottery process, in the case of a non-accompanying state, when a watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, the number is added with a 1% probability of winning, and when a chance eye or strong cherry is internally won, the number is added with a 10% probability of winning. Also, for example, in the number-adding lottery process, when the old man is accompanied, if a watermelon is internally won, the number is added with a 20% probability of winning, if a chance eye is internally won, the number is added with a 40% probability of winning, if a weak cherry is internally won, the number is added with a 1% probability of winning, and if a strong cherry is internally won, the number is added with a 10% probability of winning. The number of added coins awarded in the number-adding lottery process is a predetermined number (for example, 20 coins, 50 coins, etc.).

Also, for example, in the specialized zone lottery process, in the case of a non-accompanying state, if a watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 0.5% probability of winning, and if a chance eye or strong cherry is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 1% probability of winning. Also, for example, in the specialized zone lottery process, in the case of a princess accompanying state, if a watermelon is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 0.5% probability of winning, if a chance eye is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 1% probability of winning, if a weak cherry is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 5% probability of winning, and if a strong cherry is internally won, the zone will transition to the specialized zone with a 10% probability of winning.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), in this embodiment, the probability of the number of coins being added is higher in the accompanying state than in the non-accompanying state, and transition to the specialized zone is easier. Also, in the internal lottery process for the winning role in the accompanying state, if the role corresponding to the accompanying character is won, the probability of the number of coins being added is higher than when other roles are won, and transition to the specialized zone is easier. Even in the accompanying state, the probability of the number of coins being added is higher in the accompanying state of two characters than in the accompanying state of one character, and transition to the specialized zone is easier.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the Grandfather's corresponding role (watermelon, chance eye) in the Grandfather accompanied state and winning the number-addition lottery process or the specialized zone lottery process is the same as the probability of winning the Princess' corresponding role (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the Princess accompanied state and winning the number-addition lottery process or the specialized zone lottery process. However, they may not be the same, and winning the role of the accompanying character's corresponding role in one accompanying state may be treated as more favorable than winning the role of the accompanying character's corresponding role in another accompanying state.

・Return Chance Zone The return chance zone is a game state in which there is a possibility of returning to the normal AT state during a predetermined period (for example, 30 games in this embodiment). In the return chance zone, an AT return lottery process is executed to determine whether to return to the normal AT state. If the AT return lottery process is won during a predetermined period, the game state transitions to the normal AT state (see route R6 in FIG. 52(a)). On the other hand, if the AT return lottery is not won during a predetermined period, the game state transitions to the non-advantageous zone normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 52(a)). The AT return lottery may be determined based on, for example, the winning role of the winning role internal lottery process. The return chance zone is a game state in which the operation navigation is executed less frequently than in the normal AT state.

Ending state When the difference in number of coins in the AT state reaches or exceeds a first threshold (for example, 2000 coins in this embodiment), the normal AT state transitions to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 52(a)). In the ending state, the number of coins is not added, which is a game state. In addition, when the difference in number of coins in the AT state reaches a second threshold (for example, 2400 coins in this embodiment) in the ending state, the ending state ends and transitions to the normal non-advantageous zone state (see route R2 in FIG. 52(a)).

Specialized Zone The specialized zone is composed of a predetermined game period (for example, in the present embodiment, 5 games), and is a game state in which it is easy to add the number of coins. When the number of coins is added in the specialized zone, the number of coins added is added to the ending difference number of coins of the addition. When the number of games in the specialized zone is all consumed, the state transitions to the normal AT state (see route R7 in FIG. 52(a)). In the specialized zone, when the push order bell is internally won and the internally won push order bell is won, the number of coins indicating the operation order (more specifically, a three-digit number notified by the operation navigation. For example, in the case of the push order bell_LCR, 123) becomes the number of coins added as it is. In addition, in a game in which the push order bell is internally won in the specialized zone, a freeze is generated before the operation navigation is generated to increase the player's sense of expectation. A freeze is a standby state for delaying the timing of accepting the next operation, and during the freeze period, the reels 11 to 112 do not start spinning even when the start lever 135 is operated, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not accepted, and no operations by the player are accepted. The effect during the freeze period is referred to as a freeze effect. The freeze time in this embodiment has a number of time patterns, and the number of added coins tends to increase as the freeze time becomes longer.

Effects of the specialized zone The effects of the specialized zone will be described below with reference to Figures 62 to 64. In Figures 62 to 64, the upper part is a time chart showing the progress of a specific game in the specialized zone, and the lower part is a diagram showing the state of the reels 110 to 112 at each point in time of the time chart in the upper part and the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 62 shows a game in which the push order bell_LCR is won in the special zone, an LCR operation is performed, the upper bell is won, and 123 additional coins are acquired. Figure 62 shows a case in which the reels 110 to 112 start based on the start lever operation (start operation), and a freeze occurs, and the freeze ends after a predetermined time t1 has passed. In Figure 62, time a-1 is the time of the start operation, time a-2 is the time during the freeze after the start operation, time a-3 is the time when the operation navigation starts, time a-4 is the time when the freeze ends, the start time when the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, time a-5 is the start time when the operation of the cross button 191 can be accepted, time a-6 is the time of the first stop operation, time a-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time a-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time a-9 is the time when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 62, first, the reels 110 to 112 start to spin based on the start operation (see time a-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the liquid crystal display 157 displays an image of the master looking disappointed (see time a-1 in the lower row). In other words, the game is actually frozen, but the reels 110 to 112 start to spin and the liquid crystal display 157 displays an image of the master looking disappointed, which can mislead the player into thinking that the game is not frozen. Next, at time a-2 during the freeze, the reels 110 to 112 are spinning, but the stop buttons 137 to 139, the effect button 191, and the cross button 192 cannot be operated (see time a-2 in the upper row). Therefore, during the freeze, setting operations such as volume setting and light setting are also not possible. Also, the liquid crystal display 157 displays an image indicating that the game is frozen and that button operations are not possible (see time a-2 in the lower row).

Next, at time a-3, the operation navigation starts while the game is frozen (see time a-3 in the upper row), and an image of the operation navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157 (see time a-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 62, the Push Order Bell_LCR has been won, so specifically, the numbers 123, which indicate the LCR operation, which is the correct stopping operation, are displayed on the liquid crystal display 157.

Next, at time a-4 when the freeze ends, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated to stop (see time a-4 in the upper row), and when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time a-6 in the upper row), the left reel 110 stops, and an image of the operation navigation after the first stop operation is displayed on the LCD display 157 (see time a-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time a-7 in the top row), and then a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 139 (see time a-8 in the top row), at which point a-9 arrives, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time a-9 in the top and bottom rows), and an effect image showing the number of coins added is displayed on the LCD display device 157 (see time a-9 in the bottom row). In the game shown in FIG. 62, specifically, 123 coins are added based on the number 123 announced by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 62, immediately after the start operation, the player mistakenly believes that the freeze has not occurred, and then realizes that the freeze is in progress by operating an operating means such as the stop button 138 (as the operation is not accepted even if the player operates it). This makes it possible to give the player a surprise and increase the sense of anticipation that the addition will be made. In addition, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of added coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can know the number of added coins before the stop operation. In addition, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 ends its unacceptable state, it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button 138.

Figure 63 shows a game in which the push order bell_RLC is won in the specialized zone, an RLC operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and an additional number of 231 coins is acquired. Figure 63 shows a case in which a freeze occurs based on the start lever operation (start operation), the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112 is in a waiting state, and after a predetermined time t2 (> predetermined time t1) has elapsed, the freeze ends and reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. In FIG. 63, time b-1 is the time of the start operation, time b-2 is the time during the freeze after the start operation and the start time when operation can be accepted for the effect button 192, time b-3 is the start time after time b-2 when operation can no longer be accepted for the effect button 192, time b-4 is the time when the freeze ends, the time when the reels 110 to 112 start spinning, the start time when operation can be accepted for the cross button 191 and the effect button 192, time b-5 is the start time when operation can be accepted for the stop buttons 137 to 139, the time when operation navigation starts, time b-6 is the time of the first stop operation, time b-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time b-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time b-9 is the time when all reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 63, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, the reels 110 to 112 go into a waiting state (see time b-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the first button operation prompting effect is executed, and the initial image d21 of the first button operation prompting effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time b-1 in the lower row). The first button operation prompting effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a message such as "Fill up the meter by repeatedly pressing the button!!" along with an image of a meter), and is an effect that ends after a period of time has elapsed. Note that at time b-1, it is not possible to accept any operations on the effect button 192 (see time b-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time b-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation on the effect button 192 (see time b-2 in the upper row), and when an operation is performed on the effect button 192, image d22 of the first button operation prompting effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time b-2 in the lower row). Image d22 is composed of an image indicating an operation prompt (for example, an image encouraging button operation together with a message such as "Press the button repeatedly to fill up the meter!!"), an image indicating an operation response (for example, an image in which the value of the meter rises in response to the operation of the effect button 192), and an image indicating the valid period for operation of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the time during which operation of the effect button 192 is valid).

The first button press prompting effect ends when a specified time has elapsed, and therefore there is a problem that it is more likely to be overlooked by the player than an effect that does not end when a specified time has elapsed. However, in this embodiment, the first button press prompting effect is executed during a freeze, so that the player will not miss the first button press prompting effect, and the player can concentrate on the first button press prompting effect, which gives the player a sense of exclusivity and adds excitement to the game.

In other words, while the first button operation promotion effect that was started in the frozen state is being executed, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so that the player will not miss the first button operation promotion effect and can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect.

Next, at time b-3 when it becomes possible to accept operations on the effect button 192 again (see time b-3 in the upper row), a second button operation prompting effect is executed, and image d23 of the second button operation prompting effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time b-1 in the lower row). The second button operation prompting effect is an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 192 again (for example, an image of a full meter is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 together with an image of the full meter that prompts an operation on the effect button 192). The second button operation prompting effect is an effect that does not end with the passage of time, but ends when an operation is performed on the effect button 192.

Next, at time b-4, the freeze ends, the reels 110-112 start spinning, and the operation of the effect button 192 is no longer possible. When the effect button 192 is operated (see time b-4 in the upper and lower rows), the second button operation prompt effect ends, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an effect image d12 indicating the number of added coins (see time b-4 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 63, specifically, an image indicating the addition of 231 coins is displayed based on the number 231 notified by the operation navigation that is executed after this.

In this embodiment, the effective operation period of the effect button 192, which is prompted to be operated by the second button operation prompting effect started in the frozen state, is set to start after the frozen state ends. In this embodiment, since two button operation prompting effects (the first button operation prompting effect and the second button operation prompting effect) are started during the freeze, there is a risk that the frozen state will be prolonged and the effects will become redundant. For this reason, the second button operation prompting effect executed after the first button operation prompting effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the effective operation period of the effect button 192 that is the target of operation is set to start after the freeze ends. This prevents the frozen state from being prolonged and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, at time b-5, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated and the operation navigation starts (see time b-5 in the upper row), and an image of the operation navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157 (see time b-5 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 63, the push order bell_RLC has been won, so specifically, the number 231, which indicates the RLC operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time b-6 in the upper row), the right reel 112 stops, and the LCD display 157 displays an image d11 of the operation navigation after the first stop operation (see time b-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time b-7 in the upper row), and then a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time b-8 in the upper row), and at time b-9, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time b-9 in the upper row).

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 63, a freeze occurs upon the start operation, which increases the sense of anticipation that the number of coins will be added in the game. In addition, the number of coins to be added is notified after the freeze, and then operation navigation is executed, so the player can understand the content of the correct stop operation from the notified number of coins to be added. In addition, because operation navigation is displayed before the unacceptable state of the stop button 138 ends, it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button 138.

Figure 64 shows a game in which the push order bell_RCL is won in the specialized zone, an RCL operation is performed, the lower bell is won, and an additional number of 321 coins is acquired. Figure 64 shows a case in which a freeze occurs based on the start lever operation (start operation), the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112 is in a waiting state, and after a predetermined time t3 (> predetermined time t2) has elapsed, the freeze ends and reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. In FIG. 64, time c-1 is the time of the start operation, time c-2 is the time during the freeze after the start operation and is the start time when operation can be accepted for the effect button 192, time c-3 is after time c-2 and is the start time when operation cannot be accepted for the effect button 192 and is the time when operation navigation starts, time c-4 is the time when the freeze ends and is the time when the reels 110 to 112 start spinning and the start time when operation can be accepted for the stop buttons 137 to 139, time c-5 is the start time when operation can be accepted for the cross button 191, time c-6 is the time of the first stop operation, time c-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time c-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time c-9 is the time after the third stop operation when all reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the game shown in FIG. 64, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 go into a waiting state (see time c-1 in the upper and lower rows), and an initial image d31 (for example, an image of a lord and a samurai facing off) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time c-1 in the lower row), and then an image d32 of the first button operation prompting effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The image d32 is composed of an image indicating an operation prompt (for example, an image encouraging a button operation together with the words "Decide it with one hit!!") and an image indicating the effective operation period of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the time during which the operation of the effect button 192 is effective). The first button operation prompting effect is an operation prompting effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192, and is an effect that ends with the passage of time. Note that at time c-1, operation acceptance for the effect button 192 is not possible (see time c-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time c-2, it becomes possible to accept operation of the effect button 192 (see time c-2 in the upper row). The liquid crystal display device 157 displays image d32 of the first button operation prompt effect (see time c-2 in the lower row).

The first button press prompting effect ends when a specified time has elapsed, and therefore there is a problem that it is more likely to be overlooked by the player than an effect that does not end when a specified time has elapsed. However, in this embodiment, the first button press prompting effect is executed during a freeze, so that the player will not miss the first button press prompting effect, and the player can concentrate on the first button press prompting effect, which gives the player a sense of exclusivity and adds excitement to the game.

In other words, while the first button operation promotion effect that was started in the frozen state is being executed, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so that the player will not miss the first button operation promotion effect and can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect.

Next, at time c-3, when the effect button 192 cannot be operated (see time c-3 in the upper row), the operation navigation starts (see time c-3 in the upper row), and the image d11 of the operation navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time c-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 64, the push order bell_RCL is won, so specifically, the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In other words, the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 64 is an effect that starts during the freeze, and is also an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, so it can also be called a second button operation promotion effect. This second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) is an effect that does not end with the passage of time, and ends when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated.

Next, at time c-4, when the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start spinning and the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be used to stop the reels (see time c-4 in the upper and lower rows), and at time c-5, the cross button 191 can be operated (see time c-5 in the upper row).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effective operation period of the stop buttons 137 to 139, which are prompted to be operated by the second button operation prompting effect (operation navigation) started in the frozen state, is set to start after the frozen state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation prompting effects (first button operation prompting effect, second button operation prompting effect) are started during the freeze, which may prolong the frozen state and make the effects redundant. For this reason, the second button operation prompting effect executed after the first button operation prompting effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the effective operation period of the effect button 192 that is the target of the operation is set to start after the freeze ends. This prevents the frozen state from being prolonged and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation prompting effect.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 139, the right reel 112 stops (see time point c-6 in the upper row), and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an image d11 of the operation navigation after the first stop operation (see time point c-6 in the lower row).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time c-7 in the top row), and then a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time c-8 in the top row), at which point c-9 arrives, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time c-9 in the top and bottom rows), and the LCD display 157 displays a performance image d12 indicating the number of coins to be added (see time c-9 in the bottom row). In the game shown in FIG. 64, specifically, 321 coins are added based on the number 321 announced by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 64, a freeze occurs upon the start operation, which increases the sense of anticipation that the number of coins will be added in the game. In addition, since the operation navigation is executed after the freeze and the number of coins added is notified after the stop operation, the player can know the number of coins added before the stop operation. In addition, since the operation navigation is displayed before the unacceptable state of the stop button 138 ends, it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button 138.

The first button operation promotion effect described in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 192, but is an effect that ends based on the passage of a predetermined time regardless of whether or not the effect button 192 is operated or the number of times. On the other hand, the second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) described in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 is an effect that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time. Therefore, the first button operation promotion effect has a special feeling compared to the second button operation promotion effect, and can increase interest in the game. However, there is a concern that the first button operation promotion effect that ends based on the passage of time may be easily overlooked by the player, so in this embodiment, the first button operation promotion effect is executed during a freeze to draw attention to the first button operation promotion effect.

In addition, in Figures 62 to 64, the volume setting can be performed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) outside of the freeze period, but it is also possible to make it impossible to set the volume (the cross button 191 cannot be accepted) even during play, such as when the reels 110 to 112 are spinning, and to make the volume setting possible (the cross button 191 can be accepted) during non-play times when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

Summary of embodiment A
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (e.g., embodiment A),
A game progress means (e.g., a main control unit 300) for progressing a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) that executes presentations based on instructions from the game progression means;
A gaming machine equipped with operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, a performance button 192, an information display button 191, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.),
The game progression means includes:
A freeze state can be generated to wait for the progress of the game (for example, the freeze of FIG. 62 to FIG. 64),
The performance control means includes:
A first operation prompting effect (for example, the first button operation prompting effect of FIG. 63(b-2) or FIG. 64(c-2)) that may end based on the passage of a predetermined time is executable,
The first basic configuration is that after the freeze state is initiated by the game progression means, the first operation promotion presentation may be started (for example, Figure 63 (b-2), Figure 64 (c-2)).

According to the first basic configuration, a first operation prompting effect is executed, which may end when a predetermined time has elapsed in a frozen state, so that the player can focus on the first operation prompting effect without overlooking it, and can give the player a sense of exclusivity.

In the first basic configuration,
The performance control means includes:
A preferred configuration 1 is that the means is for ending the first operation prompting presentation that started in the frozen state in the frozen state.

According to the preferred configuration 1, the first operation prompting effect that starts in the frozen state ends in the frozen state, so that the player can focus on the first operation prompting effect without overlooking it, and can give the player a sense of exclusivity.

In the first basic configuration, the preferred configuration 1,
The operation means includes a first operation means (e.g., a performance button 192, etc.) capable of changing the performance being executed based on an operation,
The first operation promotion performance is
A second preferred configuration is a presentation that prompts the user to operate the first operating means.

According to the preferred configuration 2, it is possible to draw attention to the first operation promotion presentation that encourages the player to operate the first operating means, and to give the player a sense of something special. In the first basic configuration and the preferred configurations 1 and 2,
The performance control means includes:
A second operation prompting effect (for example, the second button operation prompting effect of FIG. 63(b-3) and FIG. 64(c-3)) that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time is executable,
The performance control means includes:
A preferred configuration 3 is one in which the second operation prompting effect may be started in the frozen state after the first operation prompting effect, which was started after the freeze state was initiated, has been terminated (for example, Figure 63 (b-3), Figure 64 (c-3)).

According to preferred configuration 3, a second operation prompting effect is executed that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time in a frozen state, so that the player can focus on the second operation prompting effect without overlooking it, and can experience a sense of exclusivity.

In a preferred configuration 3,
The second operation promotion performance is
A fourth preferred configuration is a presentation that prompts the user to operate the first operating means (for example, FIG. 63 (b-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 4, two operation promotion effects that encourage operation of the same operating means are executed in succession, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the game.

In a preferred configuration 3,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
and a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) that is operated to start the rotation of the plurality of reels.
the operation means includes a second operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels,
The second operation promotion performance is
A fifth preferred configuration is one in which the display prompts the user to perform a stop operation of the second operating means (for example, FIG. 64 (c-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 5, two operation promotion effects that encourage operation of different operating means are executed in succession, which promotes the progress of the game and increases the sense of anticipation for the game.

(2) As described above, according to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (e.g., embodiment A),
A lottery means (e.g., the main control unit 300, a winning role internal lottery process) for determining whether or not a plurality of types of roles will be won by lottery;
A game state transition means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a game state control process) for controlling the transition of the game state;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, a liquid crystal display device 157, etc.),
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to a second state (e.g., a princess-accompanying state) when a first transition condition is satisfied in a first state (non-accompanying state) during a first period (e.g., a favorable zone normal state) (e.g., when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won and the accompanying lottery process is won, FIG. 54(a)),
The second state in the case where a first role (e.g., a weak cherry or a strong cherry) is won by the lottery means is a more advantageous state than the first state in the case where the first role is won by the lottery means (e.g., the probability of winning the CZ is high, FIG. 54(b)),
The second basic configuration is such that, when the first role is won in the second state of the first period, the performance execution means executes a first suggestive performance suggesting that the first role has been won (e.g., a corresponding role winning notification performance, image d3 in Figure 56(b)), while, when the first role is won in the first state of the first period, the performance execution means does not execute the first suggestive performance (e.g., there is no image d3 in Figure 56(a)).

According to the second basic configuration, for a player who does not know that the second state is an advantageous state if the first role is won, a sense of exclusivity can be created by executing the first suggestion effect when the first role is won, and it is possible to suggest that the second state is an advantageous state if the first role is won. Also, for a player who knows that the second state is an advantageous state if the first role is won, it is possible to ensure that the player does not miss the fact that the first role has been won and to create a sense of excitement.

In the second basic configuration,
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to a third state (e.g., an old man accompanying state) when a second transition condition is established in the first state during the first period (e.g., when a watermelon or a chance number is won and the accompanying lottery process is won, as in FIG. 54(a)),
The third state in the case where the second role (e.g., watermelon or chance eye) is won by the lottery means is a more advantageous state than the first state in the case where the second role is won by the lottery means (e.g., the probability of winning the CZ is high, FIG. 54(b)),
In a preferred configuration 11, the effect execution means executes a second suggestive effect (e.g., a corresponding role winning notification effect, image d5 in Figure 57(a)) suggesting that the second role has been won, when the second role is won in the third state of the first period, while not executing the second suggestive effect, when the second role is won in the first state of the first period.

According to a preferred configuration 11, for a player who does not know that the third state is an advantageous state if the second role is won, a sense of exclusivity can be created by executing the second suggestive performance when the second role is won, and it is possible to suggest that the third state is an advantageous state if the second role is won. Also, for a player who knows that the third state is an advantageous state if the second role is won, it is possible to ensure that the player does not miss the fact that the second role has been won, and to create a sense of excitement.

In a preferred configuration 11,
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to a fourth state (e.g., a grandfather and princess accompanying state) when a third transition condition is established in the second state during the first period (e.g., when a watermelon or a chance symbol is won and also when a winning symbol is won in the accompanying lottery process, FIG. 54(a)),
The fourth state in which the first role is won by the lottery means is a more advantageous state than the second state in which the first role is won by the lottery means (for example, the probability of winning the CZ is high, FIG. 54(b)),
In a preferred configuration 12, the effect execution means executes a third suggestion effect (e.g., a corresponding role winning notification effect, images d3 and d5 in Figure 57 (a)) suggesting that the first role has been won, when the first role is won in the fourth state of the first period.

According to a preferred configuration 12, for a player who does not know that the fourth state is a more advantageous state than the second state if the first role is won, a sense of exclusivity can be created by executing the third suggestive performance when the first role is won, and it is possible to suggest that the fourth state is an advantageous state if the first role is won. Also, for a player who knows that the fourth state is a more advantageous state than the second state if the first role is won, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the fact that the first role has been won and to create a sense of excitement by executing the third suggestive performance when the first role is won.

The third condition may be the same as the second condition.

In a preferred configuration 12,
The first state is a state in which neither the first character image (e.g., a princess image) nor the second character image (e.g., an old man image) is displayed (e.g., FIG. 53(a) ),
The second state is a state in which the first character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 53(b) ),
The third state is a state in which the second character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 53(c) ),
In a preferred configuration 13, the fourth state is a state in which both the first character image and the second character image are displayed (for example, FIG. 53(d)).

According to preferred configuration 13, the player can clearly judge each state of the first period from the character image.

In the preferred configuration 12 or 13,
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the second state when a first downfall condition is established in the fourth state during the first period (for example, when a winning lottery is held to end the game after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed),
The game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the third state when a second downfall condition is established in the fourth state during the first period (for example, when a lottery for ending the princess accompaniment after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed is won),
The gaming state transition means is a means for transitioning to the first state when the second fall condition is established in the second state during the first period,
In a preferred configuration 14, the game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the first state when the first fall condition is established in the third state during the first period.

With the preferred configuration 14, it is possible to transition from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state, providing the player with a more stimulating, tense and entertaining game.

In preferred configurations 11, 12, 13, or 14,
a second period (e.g., CZ) different from the first period;
During the second period, the second state may be reached,
In a preferred configuration 15, the third state may occur during the second period.

According to the preferred configuration 15, even during a second period that is different from the first period, a transition to the second state or the third state occurs, providing the player with more variety in the game and increasing interest.

In addition, a third role (for example, a push order bell) different from both the first role and the second role is provided,
In the second period, in the second state or the third state in the case where the third role is won by the lottery means, a first privilege is granted (for example, the probability of winning an AT transition is increased),
During the first period, the second state when the first role is won by the lottery means, or the third state when the second role is won by the lottery means, may be such that a second benefit is awarded (for example, the probability of winning a CZ transition is increased).

With this configuration, even if the state is the same, the conditions for granting bonuses and the bonuses themselves will differ depending on the period, making it possible to provide a wide variety of presentations and games.

<Setting suggestion production>
Next, we will explain in detail the setting suggestion performance.

In the slot machine 100 of embodiment A, six types of setting values, Settings 1 to 6, are prepared as described above. Setting 1 is the default setting value that is initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, setting 1 is set as the default setting value immediately after shipping from the factory, after the RAM including the memory area that stores the setting values (RAM of the main control unit) is cleared, or when the backup power source that continues to store the setting values in the memory area is lost.

The degree of advantage for the player in terms of gaining profits (or the degree of advantage in terms of payout rate) is higher for setting 2 than for setting 1, higher for setting 3 than for setting 2, higher for setting 4 than for setting 3, higher for setting 5 than for setting 4, and higher for setting 6 than for setting 5. In other words, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player in terms of gaining profits (or setting 6 has the highest payout rate).

Setting b may be provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is less advantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's gain of profits. In other words, setting b is the least advantageous setting in terms of the player's gain of profits (or the payout rate of setting b is the lowest). In the slot machine 100, a setting value display is provided on the back of the front door 102 along with a reset switch and a setting change button, and the setting value display cannot be seen unless the front door 102 is opened. This setting value display is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The setting value display displays the setting value set by the setting change button in numbers. Setting b is displayed in the 7-segment LED setting value display with a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to the most advantageous setting 6. In other words, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If a fraudster who has fraudulently opened the front door 102 performs a fraudulent operation thinking that the setting displayed last is the most advantageous setting, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display, the fraudster may mistake it for setting 6 and change the setting to setting b. In this case, the fraudster can be disadvantaged.

A player usually does not know the setting value, and what the setting value is currently set to is one of the concerns of the player. Therefore, in the slot machine 100, a setting suggestion effect may be executed to suggest the currently set setting value. Suggesting a setting value may also include vaguely suggesting a setting value (setting-related effect, setting-related notification). Furthermore, suggesting a setting value may also include notifying that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification). In other words, there are multiple types of setting suggestion effects. This setting suggestion effect may be executed after the third stop operation is performed in the final game of the AT state (see FIG. 52).

Figure 65 (a) shows the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A.

The lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 45. The change (setting) of the setting value is performed on the main control unit 300 side, and information representing the set setting value is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The main control unit 300 also manages the difference number. The difference number refers to the difference in the amount of game value acquired by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value granted as a result of the game (the number of medals paid out). The difference number includes the cumulative difference number and the difference number in the AT state. The cumulative difference number is the cumulative number since the slot machine 100 was turned on at the earliest timing on the same day, and the power-on after the power is restored due to a momentary power outage is ignored. The cumulative difference number is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across the date. It is also reset when the RAM is cleared or the setting is changed. The counter may be reset when the main power is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power was turned on. The reset timing may be when the main power is turned on, not when the main power is turned off. Information representing the latest cumulative difference number is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The difference number may be counted in another control unit (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) in addition to the main control unit 300, or may be counted in another control unit (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) instead of the main control unit 300. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 executes a lottery process in the final game of the AT state according to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) based on the currently set value and the cumulative difference number. The difference number in the AT state may be used instead of the cumulative difference number. The final game in the AT state may be the final game in the pull-back chance zone shown in FIG. 52 (the 30th game after the transition to the pull-back chance zone without winning the AT pull-back lottery), or the final game in the ending state shown in FIG. 52 (the game when the difference in number of coins in the AT state reaches the second threshold (for example, 2400 coins in this embodiment)).

In setting suggestion effect A, the probability of the effect being executed differs depending on whether the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more or less than 0. The probability of the effect being executed also differs depending on the currently set value. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65 (A), the probability of setting suggestion effect A not being executed tends to be higher the lower the set value is set. This tendency is the same whether the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more or less than 0. However, the probability of setting suggestion effect A not being executed is higher when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more.

When the setting suggestion effect A is executed, a character appears on the liquid crystal display device 157, but the character that appears differs depending on the suggestion content. The baby panda character is a character that suggests that setting 6 is confirmed, the panda character is a character that suggests that setting 5 is confirmed, and the princess character is a character that suggests that setting 4 is confirmed. The setting suggestion effect A in which these three characters appear is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the current setting value is confirmed to be a certain setting value. Also, among settings 1 to 6, settings 4 and above are high settings. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect A in which these three characters appear is also a setting suggestion effect that suggests that a high setting is confirmed. The setting suggestion effect A described above is a setting suggestion effect A for a specific high setting value confirmation. In these three setting suggestion effects A for a specific high setting value confirmation, when the cumulative difference number is 0 or more, it is executed with a 5% execution probability, but when it is less than 0, it is executed with only a 1% execution probability. In other words, it is less likely to be executed when the cumulative difference number is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more. When the cumulative difference number is less than 0, the player is in a losing state. Even if the setting value is set to a high setting, if the cumulative difference number is less than 0 (when losing), executing the setting suggestion effect of setting 6 confirmed, setting 5 confirmed, or setting 4 confirmed will give the player a greater sense of loss and disappointment than usual. In addition, there is a risk that the player will have a bad impression of the slot machine 100 being played. Therefore, when the setting value is set to a high setting and the cumulative difference number is less than 0, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the specific high setting value confirmation is suppressed to be lower than the state in which the cumulative difference number is 1 or more. Note that the execution probability of the state in which the cumulative difference number is less than 0 may be set to 0% instead of 1%. Also, although the execution probability of the state in which the cumulative difference number is less than 0 is set to 1%, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect of setting 5 confirmed (a panda character appears) may be lower than the setting suggestion effect of setting 4 confirmed (a princess character appears), and the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect of setting 6 confirmed (a baby panda character appears) may be lower than the setting suggestion effect of setting 5 confirmed. For example, when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0, the probability of a setting suggestion effect confirming a setting of 4 being executed may be 3%, the probability of a setting suggestion effect confirming a setting of 5 being executed may be 2%, and the probability of a setting suggestion effect confirming a setting of 6 being executed may be 1%.

On the other hand, the Ronin character is a character that suggests a setting value of 2 or higher, and although the specific setting value is unknown, it is never setting 1. The Grandpa character is a character that suggests there is a possibility of a high setting, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes cases where it is not a high setting (false). The Lord character is a character that suggests a setting of 4 or higher, and although the specific setting value is unknown, it is never setting 3 or lower. Setting suggestion performance A, in which these three characters appear, is a setting suggestion performance in which it is unclear what specific setting value the current setting is. In other words, it is a setting suggestion performance in which the specific setting value is unknown, merely suggesting that it may be a certain setting value without suggesting a specific setting value. In a setting suggestion effect in which a ronin character appears to suggest that the setting value is 2 or more, when the setting value is low (settings 1 to 3), the probability of execution is the same whether the cumulative difference is 0 or more or less than 0 (however, the execution probability is 0% for setting 1), but when the setting value is high (settings 4 to 6), the execution probability is higher when the cumulative difference is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when it is less than 0. In a setting suggestion effect in which an old man character appears to suggest that a high setting is possible, when the setting value is low, the execution probability is higher when the cumulative difference is 0 or more than when it is less than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when it is 0 or more, but when the setting value is high, the converse is true when the cumulative difference is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when it is less than 0. In the setting suggestion effect where a Lord character appears to suggest that the setting is 4 or higher, the probability of it being executed is 0% when the setting is 3 or lower, and when the setting is 4 or higher, the probability of it being executed is higher when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 coins than when it is 0 coins or higher, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the cumulative difference is less than 0 coins.

The lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in Figure 65(a) is summarized below, including some overlapping information from previous explanations.

Setting suggestion effect A is an effect in which the probability of execution varies depending on the setting value and the difference in number of coins. When the setting is set to 4 to 6 and the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of execution of setting suggestion effect A for a confirmed type (setting 6 confirmed, setting 5 confirmed, setting 4 confirmed) is higher than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0. Note that, only when the setting value is set to the highest setting (the setting most advantageous for play, the same applies below) setting value (setting 6 in this example), when the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of execution of setting suggestion effect A for a confirmed setting of 6 may be higher than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0.

In addition, when the setting is 4 to 6 and the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of executing ambiguous setting suggestion effect A (setting 4 or more, setting 2 or more, setting suggestion effect A with the possibility of a high setting) is lower than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0. Note that when the setting value is set to a high setting value (settings 4 to 6 in this example), if the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of executing setting suggestion effect A for settings 4 or more may be higher than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0.

When the setting value is set to a high setting (settings 4 to 6) or the highest setting (setting 6) and the difference in number of coins is less than 0, if a setting suggestion effect that notifies the player that the setting is a fixed setting suggestion is executed as the setting suggestion effect, the player may feel a greater sense of loss or disappointment than usual, and may have a negative impression of the slot machine 100 being played. Therefore, when the setting value is set to a high setting or the highest setting and the difference in number of coins is less than 0, the execution rate of fixed setting suggestion effects is lowered and the execution rate of ambiguous setting suggestion effects is increased as the setting suggestion effect, thereby preventing the player from feeling a greater sense of loss or disappointment than usual, and reducing the risk of the player having a negative impression of the slot machine 100 being played.

In addition, when the setting value is set to a low setting (settings 1 to 3) and the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of executing setting suggestion presentation A indicating a high setting is higher than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0. Note that, only when the setting value is set to the lowest setting (the setting most unfavorable to play, same below) setting value (setting 1 in this example), when the difference in number of coins is 0 or more, the probability of executing setting suggestion presentation A indicating a high setting may be higher than when the difference in number of coins is less than 0. By making it easier to execute setting suggestion presentation A indicating a high setting if the difference in number of coins is 0 or more even with a low setting, it is possible to make the player guess that it may be a high setting and encourage them to play for a long time.

Figure 65 (b) shows the lottery table for setting suggestion effect B.

The lottery table shown in FIG. 65(b) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 45. In the lottery using this lottery table, the lottery is based on the currently set setting value, but not on the cumulative difference in number of coins. Therefore, even in the setting suggestion effect B, the probability of the effect being executed differs depending on the currently set setting value, but the probability of the effect being executed is the same whether the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more or less than 0. The setting suggestion effect B is an effect using the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157. If the setting suggestion effect B is not executed, the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes the background image A. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(B), the probability of the setting suggestion effect B not being executed tends to be higher the lower the setting value is set.

Background image B is a background image suggesting that the setting value may be an even number, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes the case where the setting value is an odd number (false). Background image C is a background image suggesting that the setting value may be an odd number, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes the case where the setting value is an even number (false). Background images D and F are background images suggesting that the setting value may be a high setting, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes the case where the setting value is not a high setting (false). Background image G is a background image suggesting that the setting is 4 or higher, and the specific setting value is unknown, but it is not set to 3 or lower. The setting suggestion performance B of background images B to G described above is a setting suggestion performance with an unknown specific setting value that merely suggests that a certain setting value may be present, without suggesting a specific setting value. On the other hand, background image H is a background image suggesting that the setting is set to 6, and the setting suggestion performance B of this background image H is a setting suggestion performance with a specific high setting value. In setting suggestion performance B, there are more types of setting suggestion performance with an unknown specific setting value than types of setting suggestion performance with a confirmed specific high setting value, and setting suggestion performance with an unknown specific setting value is more likely to be executed than setting suggestion performance with a confirmed specific high setting value.

In addition, when comparing background image A of setting suggestion effect B with setting suggestion effect A not being executed, it can be said that setting suggestion effect A is less likely to be executed than setting suggestion effect B. On the other hand, when comparing background image H suggesting that setting 6 is confirmed in setting suggestion effect B with the baby panda character suggesting that setting 6 is confirmed in setting suggestion effect A, if the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more, it can be said that setting suggestion effect B is less likely to be executed than setting suggestion effect A, but if the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0, setting suggestion effect B is more likely to be executed than setting suggestion effect A.

As explained above, setting suggestion effect B is an effect that is executed regardless of the difference in number of coins, and is executed more frequently than setting suggestion effect A. Also, setting suggestion effect B has more types of setting suggestion effects with unknown specific setting values (ambiguous setting suggestion effects) than setting suggestion effect A.

Figure 66 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of how setting suggestion presentation A is executed after setting suggestion presentation B is executed.

Figure 66 (a) is a diagram showing the liquid crystal display device 157 when the final game, which is the 30th game, is started after the transition to the pull-back chance zone shown in Figure 52 without winning the AT pull-back lottery. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in Figure 66 (a), a background image of the moon's surface with the earth visible is displayed as the background image of the moon stage, and an animation of the king running on the moon's surface is displayed. In this final game, the push order bell_RCL is won, and the number 321, which indicates the RCL operation, which is the correct stopping operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In FIG. 66(b), which follows FIG. 66(a), a third stop operation is performed, and the result display ATR of the AT state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The result display ATR of the AT state is a display of the number of medals acquired in the AT state, and in this example, it is displayed that the number was 1080 medals. Also, in this example, when the third stop operation is performed, the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157 is switched from the background image of the moon stage to background image D of setting suggestion performance B. In other words, setting suggestion performance B, which is unrelated to the value of the cumulative number of medals difference, is executed, and background image D (a background image of the sea) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, which suggests that the setting value may be set high.

Fig. 66(c), which follows Fig. 66(b), shows the liquid crystal display device 157 at a predetermined time after the third stop operation is performed. In the state shown in Fig. 66(c), the AT state has been switched to the normal state. More specifically, the non-advantageous zone has been switched to the normal state. However, the first game has not started since the switch to the normal state. In the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in Fig. 66(c), the result display ATR of the AT state is displayed on the background image of the sea, and further, the character display of the setting suggestion effect A is displayed in the lower left. In this example, the character display SS4U of the lower character, which suggests that the setting is 4 or higher, is displayed. The character display of the setting suggestion effect A (the character display SS4U of the lower character) is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the result display ATR of the AT state. Also, it is displayed in a layer in front of the background image (background image of the sea) of the setting suggestion effect B.

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated, the game starts after the game transitions to the normal state of the non-advantageous zone. When the game starts, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the background image of setting suggestion effect B (background image of the sea) disappears from the liquid crystal display 157, and the character display of setting suggestion effect A (lord's character display SS4U) also disappears, and a stage change display is displayed across the entire surface of the liquid crystal display 157. In FIG. 66(d), a stage change display SC1 is displayed across the entire surface of the liquid crystal display 157 to notify players that they have entered the ●×▲ stage, which is the stage in the normal state of the non-advantageous zone.

As explained above, setting suggestion effect B and setting suggestion effect A are executed at the same trigger (for example, when the AT state ends). Also, setting suggestion effect A and setting suggestion effect B may be executed in parallel, in which case setting suggestion effect A is displayed above setting suggestion effect B. In other words, the effect that is executed less frequently is displayed preferentially. Also, as mentioned above, setting suggestion effect A has fewer types of setting suggestion effects with unknown specific setting values (ambiguous setting suggestion effects) than setting suggestion effect B, and setting suggestion effect A, which has fewer types of setting suggestion effects with unknown specific setting values (ambiguous setting suggestion effects), is displayed preferentially over setting suggestion effect B.

Next, a modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion presentation A shown in FIG. 65(a) will be explained. Below, the explanation will focus on the differences from the lottery table for setting suggestion presentation A shown in FIG. 65(a), and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

Figure 67 (a) shows a first modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A.

In the lottery table of the first modification, the probability of execution is different depending on whether the cumulative difference is 0 or more or less than 0, as in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). The execution probability when the cumulative difference is 0 or more in the lottery table of the first modification is the execution probability when the cumulative difference is less than 0 in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a), and the execution probability when the cumulative difference is less than 0 in the lottery table of the first modification is the execution probability when the cumulative difference is 0 or more in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). Therefore, the setting suggestion performance (princess, panda, baby panda) that suggests that the high setting is confirmed is executed with a 5% execution probability when the cumulative difference is less than 0, but is executed with only a 1% execution probability when the cumulative difference is 0 or more. In other words, it is less likely to be executed when the cumulative difference is 0 or more than when it is less than 0. Even when the player is losing (the cumulative difference is less than 0), the player is encouraged to play by suggesting that the setting is set to 6, and the player can be made to hope that there is a possibility of winning in a little while.

Figure 67 (b) shows a second modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A.

The ronin character, which is included in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) and suggests that the setting value is 2 or more, is a character suggesting that the setting 1 is confirmed in the lottery table of the second modified example. The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A, in which the ronin character suggesting that the setting 1 is confirmed, appears, is 30%. In other words, the execution probability of the setting indication effect suggesting that the setting value with the lowest advantage for the player is confirmed to be set is a predetermined probability, and may be, for example, a predetermined probability less than 100%, or may be 100%. In other words, when the setting value is the lowest setting (setting 1 in this example), regardless of the difference in the number of sheets (whether the difference in the number of sheets is 0 or more or less than 0), the setting suggestion effect A suggesting that the setting 1 is confirmed is executed with the same execution probability, and the setting suggestion effect A suggesting that the setting 1 is confirmed may be executed in some cases, or may be executed without fail. When the setting is at the lowest setting (setting 1 in this example), players will appreciate being reminded that the setting is at the lowest setting whether they are winning or losing, and unlike when the setting is high or at the highest, a setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the difference in number of coins, making the machine more appealing to players.

In addition, in this second modified example, the execution probability when the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more and the execution probability when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 may be interchanged as in the first modified example.

Figure 68 shows a third modified example of the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A.

In the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a), the probability of setting suggestion effect A being executed differed depending on whether the cumulative difference in number of coins was 0 or more or less than 0 coins, but in this third modified example, even if the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more, it is divided into two categories, and even if the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 coins, it is divided into two categories. In other words, the probability of setting suggestion effect A being executed differs for each of the four categories of cumulative difference in number: 0 or more and less than 1500 coins, 1500 or more coins, less than 0 coins, -1500 coins or more, and less than -1500 coins. In terms of the degree of win or loss of the player, these four categories indicate that 0 or more and less than 1500 coins means that the player has a small win, 1500 coins or more means that the player has a large win, less than 0 coins and -1500 coins or more means that the player has a small loss, and less than -1500 coins means that the player has a large loss. In a big win state where the cumulative difference in number of coins is 1500 or more, the probability of setting suggestion effect A being executed is higher when the setting value is high (settings 4 to 6) than when the cumulative difference in number of coins is between 0 and less than 1500, but the opposite is true when the setting value is low (settings 1 to 3). In a big loss state where the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than -1500, the probability of setting suggestion effect A being executed is higher when the setting value is low (settings 1 to 3) than when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0, but the opposite is true when the setting value is high (settings 4 to 6). In any of these four categories, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of setting suggestion effect A being executed.

In addition, in each of the setting suggestion performance A in which a ronin character appears suggesting that the setting value is 2 or more, the setting suggestion performance A in which a lord character appears suggesting that the setting is 4 or more, the setting suggestion performance A in which a princess character appears suggesting that setting 4 is confirmed, the setting suggestion performance A in which a panda character appears suggesting that setting 5 is confirmed, and the setting suggestion performance A in which a baby panda character appears suggesting that setting 6 is confirmed, the execution probability in the case of a small win in which the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is 0 or more and less than 1500 is the same as the execution probability in the case of a small loss in which the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is less than 0 and is 1500 or more in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). In addition, in each of the setting suggestion performance A in which a ronin character appears suggesting that the setting value is 2 or more, and the setting suggestion performance A in which a lord character appears suggesting that the setting is 4 or more, the execution probability in the case of a small loss in which the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is less than 0 and is 1500 or more is the same as the execution probability in the case of a small loss in which the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is less than 0 and is 1500 or more in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). In addition, in each of the setting suggestion effect A in which a princess character appears to indicate that setting 4 is confirmed, the setting suggestion effect A in which a panda character appears to indicate that setting 5 is confirmed, and the setting suggestion effect A in which a baby panda character appears to indicate that setting 6 is confirmed, the probability of execution in the case of a big loss in which the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than -1,500 coins is the same as the probability of execution in the case in which the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 coins in the lottery table shown in Figure 65 (a).

In addition, in this third modified example, the execution probability when the cumulative difference in number of coins is 0 or more and the execution probability when the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0 may be interchanged as in the first modified example.

In addition, in the third modified example, the difference in number of coins is divided into four sections (four stages), but it is not limited to four stages, and may be divided into multiple stages such as three stages or five stages or more.

Next, a fourth modified example of the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A will be described. The setting suggestion effect A in this fourth modified example is an effect in which the execution probability differs depending on the setting value and the number of games. That is, when the setting value is set to settings 4 to 6 and the number of games is 1000 or more, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the fixed type (setting 6 fixed, setting 5 fixed, setting 4 fixed) is higher than when the number of games is less than 1000. The higher the number of games, the higher the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the fixed type, which can encourage long-term play. The number of games referred to here is the cumulative number of games. The cumulative number of games is the cumulative number of games since the slot machine 100 was powered on at the earliest timing on the same day, and powering on after power recovery due to a momentary power outage is ignored. The cumulative number of games is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across dates. It is also reset when the RAM is cleared or the settings are changed. Alternatively, it may be reset when the main power is turned off after a predetermined time has passed since the main power was turned on. It should be noted that the timing of resetting does not have to be the timing of turning off the main power, but may be the timing of turning on the main power. Also, instead of the cumulative number of games, it may be the number of games in the AT state, the number of games in the normal AT state among the AT states, the number of games in another predetermined state, or the number of games in a specific period. Also, the number of games is not limited to 1000 games, but may be any predetermined number of games, and may be divided into cases where the number of games is more than the predetermined number and cases where the number of games is less than the predetermined number.

When the setting value is set to a setting between 4 and 6, and the number of games is 1000 or more, the probability of executing a setting suggestion effect A with ambiguous setting suggestions (setting 4 or higher, setting 2 or higher, possibility of a high setting) is lower than when the number of games is less than 1000. Note that when the setting value is set to a high setting value (settings 4 to 6 in this example), and the number of games is 1000 or more, the execution probability may be higher only for setting suggestion effects A with settings of 4 or higher and setting suggestion effects A with the possibility of a high setting than when the number of games is less than 1000.

In addition, the number of games may be divided into more than 1000 games and less than 1000 games, and may be divided into smaller categories so that the more games there are, the more likely it is that a definite setting suggestion effect A will be executed. For example, up to 1000G, a definite setting suggestion effect A may be executed with a 1% probability, from 1001G to 3000G, a definite setting suggestion effect A may be executed with a 5% probability, and from 3001G onwards, a definite setting suggestion effect A may be executed with a 10% probability.

In addition, when the setting value is the minimum setting value (setting 1 in this example), setting suggestion presentation A suggesting that the minimum setting value has been confirmed (setting 1 confirmed in this example) may be executed regardless of the number of games played (with the same execution probability regardless of the number of games played). In addition, when the setting value is the minimum setting value, setting suggestion presentation A suggesting that the minimum setting value has been confirmed may be executed without fail, regardless of the number of games played.

In addition, when the number of games is 1,000 or more, the probability of execution of the entire setting suggestion effect A may be made higher than when the number of games is less than 1,000.

Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect A may be an effect in which the execution probability is different depending on the setting value, the number of games, and the difference in number of coins. For example, the execution rate of the definite setting suggestion effect A may be low regardless of the difference in number of coins up to 1000 games, and the execution probability may be different depending on the difference in number of coins from 1001 games onwards, as in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). Alternatively, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect A of an ambiguous setting suggestion may be high regardless of the difference in number of coins up to 1000 games, and the execution probability may be different depending on the difference in number from 1001 games onwards, as in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). In other words, this fourth modified example may be combined with examples in which the execution probability is different depending on the setting value and the difference in number, such as the present embodiment in FIG. 65(a) and the first, second, and third modified examples.

Furthermore, in this fourth modified example, the execution probability when the number of games is 1000 or more and the execution probability when the number of games is less than 1000 may be switched as in the first modified example.

Next, the fifth modified example of the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A will be described. The setting suggestion effect A in this fifth modified example is an effect in which the execution probability differs depending on the setting value and the time period. That is, when the setting value is set to settings 4 to 6, and before 12 noon, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the fixed type (setting 6 fixed, setting 5 fixed, setting 4 fixed) is lower than that after 12 noon. After 12 noon, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the fixed type becomes higher, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine in the afternoon can be improved. Note that, only when the setting value is set to the highest setting value (setting 6 in this example), the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A of the fixed setting may be higher after 12 noon than before 12 noon. Alternatively, the execution probability of the entire setting suggestion effect A may be higher after 12 noon than before 12 noon in all settings, not just when the setting value is set to settings 4 to 6.

In addition, when the setting value is set to a value between 4 and 6, and before 12 noon, the probability of setting suggestion effect A with ambiguous setting suggestions (setting 4 or higher, setting 2 or higher, possibility of a high setting) is higher than after 12 noon. Note that, only when the setting value is set to the highest setting value (setting 6 in this example), the probability of setting suggestion effect A with ambiguous setting suggestions including setting 6 (setting 4 or higher, setting 2 or higher, possibility of a high setting) may be higher after 12 noon than before 12 noon.

The time periods may also be divided into more detailed categories. For example, the later the time period, the more likely it is that a definite setting suggestion performance A will be executed, or the more likely it is that a vague setting suggestion performance A will be executed. More specifically, a definite setting suggestion performance A may be executed with a 1% probability until 12 noon, a definite setting suggestion performance A may be executed with a 5% probability from 12 noon to 5pm, and a definite setting suggestion performance A may be executed with a 10% probability from 5pm onwards. Alternatively, the execution probability may be increased every predetermined time period (e.g., every 3 hours).

In addition, when the setting value is the minimum setting value (setting 1 in this example), setting suggestion presentation A suggesting that the minimum setting value has been confirmed (setting 1 has been confirmed in this example) may be executed regardless of the time of day (with the same probability of execution at any time of day). In addition, when the setting value is the minimum setting value, setting suggestion presentation A suggesting that the minimum setting value has been confirmed may be executed without fail, regardless of the time of day.

Furthermore, the setting suggestion effect A may be an effect in which the probability of execution varies depending on the setting value, the time period, and the difference in number of coins. For example, the execution rate of a definite setting suggestion effect A may be low regardless of the difference in number of coins until 5:00 p.m., and after 5:00 p.m., the execution rate of an ambiguous setting suggestion effect A may be high regardless of the difference in number of coins ... different depending on the difference in number of coins as shown in the lottery table in FIG. 65(a).

Also, in this fifth variant, the execution probability for times before 12:00 and the execution probability for times after 12:00 may be switched as in the first variant.

Note that in the explanations above, lowering the execution probability also includes setting it to 0%.

In addition, in the lottery table for setting suggestion performance A described so far, where the execution probability was varied according to the accumulated difference in number of coins, instead of the accumulated difference in number, the execution probability may be varied according to the difference in number of coins in the AT state, or the execution probability may be varied according to the difference in number of coins in the normal AT state among the AT states, or the execution probability may be varied according to the difference in number of coins in other specified states, or the execution probability may be varied according to the difference in number of coins in a specific period. Also, instead of distinguishing between the difference in number of coins being 0 or more and less than 0, the difference in number may be distinguished between more than 0 and less than 0.

Furthermore, although the above explanation of the setting suggestion performance was about the slot machine 100, it can also be applied to pachinko machines. Alternatively, the slot machine 100 may be a slot machine that does not use medals and only exchanges electronic data, in which case the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals (hereinafter also referred to as gaming value), and the input of gaming value includes inputting electronic data from a specified external device (an electronic storage device having a function capable of electronically storing the number of medals lent out and the number of medals acquired by winning), and the payout of gaming value includes outputting electronic data to the specified external device (electronic storage device).

<Summary of setting hints>
According to the above description,
"A setting means (e.g., a setting change button 292) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., settings 1 to 6);
A presentation means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing a setting suggestion presentation that suggests the set setting value;
A gaming machine equipped with
The set values include a first set value [e.g., setting 6] and a second set value [e.g., setting 2] that is less advantageous to the player than the first set value;
The presentation means is capable of executing a first setting suggestion presentation that suggests at least the first setting value [for example, a setting suggestion presentation A in which a baby panda character appears to suggest that setting 6 is confirmed],
The presentation means executes the first setting suggestion presentation with a first probability [e.g., 5%] when a first condition [e.g., a condition that the cumulative difference in number of sheets is 0 or more] is satisfied, and executes the first setting suggestion presentation with a second probability [e.g., 1%] when a second condition [e.g., a condition that the cumulative difference in number of sheets is less than 0] is satisfied,
The second probability is lower than the first probability.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, the first setting suggestion effect is performed under different conditions with different execution probabilities, so by setting the conditions in a way that motivates the player to play but does not disappoint the player, the first setting suggestion effect can be used effectively.

The first setting value may be the setting value (e.g., setting 6) that is the most advantageous to the player among the multiple setting values.

The presentation means may be capable of executing a third setting suggestion presentation (e.g., setting suggestion presentation B using the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157) regarding the set setting value, regardless of whether the first condition and the second condition are met. The third setting suggestion presentation may be a presentation suggesting that the set setting value may be one of the setting values (e.g., background image presentation of background images B to G), or a presentation suggesting that it is a specific setting value (e.g., background image presentation of background image H).

The presentation means may be capable of executing a fourth setting suggestion presentation (for example, a setting suggestion presentation A in which a ronin character appears to suggest that the setting value that is set is the second setting value, as shown in FIG. 67(b) ) suggesting that the setting value that is set is the second setting value, and the presentation means may execute the fourth setting suggestion presentation with a fifth probability (for example, 30%) when the first condition (for example, a condition in which the cumulative difference number is 0 or more) is satisfied, and with a sixth probability (for example, 30%) when the second condition (for example, a condition in which the cumulative difference number is less than 0) is satisfied. The fifth probability may be higher than the first probability or higher than the second probability. The sixth probability may also be higher than the first probability or higher than the second probability. The fifth probability may be the same as the sixth probability.

As explained using the lottery table in FIG. 67(a), the first condition may be a condition including that the difference in the amount of game value obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value granted as a result of the game is a number less than 0, and the second condition may be a condition including that the difference in the amount of game value obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value granted as a result of the game is a number equal to or greater than 0.

The first setting suggestion effect may be an effect (e.g., a definite setting suggestion effect A) that suggests with less ambiguity what the setting value is that is set than the second setting suggestion effect. In other words, the first setting suggestion effect may suggest with more specificity what the setting value is that is set than the second setting suggestion effect. For example, the first setting suggestion effect may suggest that the setting value that is set is a specific setting value (e.g., the first setting value).

The first setting suggestion effect may be an effect suggesting that the set setting value may be a relatively high setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value), or may be an effect suggesting that the set setting value is a relatively high setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A with a confirmed specific high setting value). The second setting suggestion effect may be an effect suggesting that the set setting value may be a relatively low setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value), or may be an effect suggesting that the set setting value is a relatively low setting value (for example, a confirmed setting suggestion effect A), or may be an effect suggesting that a relatively low setting value may be included (for example, a relatively low setting value may not be included), or may be an effect suggesting that a relatively low setting value is included (for example, a relatively low setting value is always included).

Also,
"The presentation means is capable of executing a second setting suggestion presentation that suggests at least the first setting value [for example, a setting suggestion presentation A in which a character of a lower character appears to suggest that the setting is 4 or higher],
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect including a suggestion regarding a setting value (e.g., settings 4 and 5) that is less advantageous to the player than the setting value (e.g., setting 6) that is the least advantageous to the player among the setting values suggested by the first setting suggestion effect,
the presentation means executes the second setting suggestion presentation with a third probability [e.g., 2%] when the first condition [e.g., the cumulative difference in number of sheets is 0 or more] is satisfied, and executes the second setting suggestion presentation with a fourth probability [e.g., 3%] when the second condition [e.g., the cumulative difference in number of sheets is less than 0] is satisfied;
the fourth probability being greater than the third probability;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The first setting suggestion effect may be a first effect suggesting that the set setting value is the first setting value [for example, a setting suggestion effect A with a specific high setting value confirmed or a setting suggestion effect A with a confirmed setting value]. The second setting suggestion effect may be a second effect suggesting that the set setting value may be the first setting value [for example, a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value or an ambiguous setting suggestion effect A].

Furthermore, as an example of a case where the first setting suggestion effect is a confirmed setting suggestion effect A and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value, the first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a confirmed setting of 5, and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a setting of 4 or higher, or a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a possible high setting. Furthermore, as an example of a case where the first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value and the second setting suggestion effect is also a setting suggestion effect A with an unknown specific setting value, the first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests either a setting of 5 or a setting of 6, and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a setting of 4 or higher, a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a possible high setting, a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a possible even setting value, or a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a possible odd setting value. In other words, the first setting suggestion effect may be less ambiguous than the second setting suggestion effect and may be an effect that suggests a high setting.

Also, it is possible to ignore the high or low setting value and have the second setting suggestion effect be at least more ambiguous than the first setting suggestion effect. For example, an example of a case in which the first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that does not include a false case in which the specific setting value is unknown, and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that includes a false case in which the specific setting value is unknown, is when the first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests a setting of 4 or higher, and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that also includes a case in which the setting may be high but is not high (a false case).

Also,
"The first condition is a condition that the difference in the amount of game value obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (e.g., the number of medals inserted) from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (e.g., the number of medals paid out) is a number equal to or greater than 0 (e.g., the player is not losing),
The second condition is a condition including that the acquired difference in the amount of game value obtained by subtracting the amount of game value used in the game from the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game is a number less than 0 (for example, a state in which the player is losing).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The difference in the amount of gaming value acquired is accumulated from the earliest time the main power of the gaming machine is turned on on the same day, and is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across dates. It is also reset when the RAM is cleared or settings are changed. It may also be reset when the main power is turned off a predetermined time after it is turned on. Note that the resetting timing does not have to be when the main power is turned off, but may be when the main power is turned on.

The first condition may be only that the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number equal to or greater than 0, and the second condition may be only that the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number less than 0.

The first condition may be at least a condition that the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number equal to or greater than 1, and the second condition may be at least a condition that the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number equal to or less than 0.

As explained using the lottery table of FIG. 68, the first condition may include other conditions in addition to the condition that the acquisition difference in the amount of game value is a number equal to or greater than 0, and the second condition may include other conditions in addition to the condition that the acquisition difference in the amount of game value is a number less than 0. For example, the first condition may be a condition in which the acquisition difference in the amount of game value is a condition in addition to a condition that the acquisition difference is less than a first number (e.g., +1500 coins) or is equal to or greater than the first number, and the second condition may be a condition in which the acquisition difference in the amount of game value is a condition in addition to a condition that the acquisition difference is equal to or greater than a second number (e.g., -1500 coins) or is less than the second number. In this case, if the acquisition difference number of the amount of game value is a number equal to or greater than 0 and is less than the first number, the first setting suggestion presentation (for example, a setting suggestion presentation A in which a baby panda character appears suggesting that setting 6 is confirmed) is executed with a seventh probability (for example, 5%), if the acquisition difference number of the amount of game value is a number equal to or greater than the first number, the first setting suggestion presentation is executed with an eighth probability (for example, 7%), if the acquisition difference number of the amount of game value is a number less than 0 and is a number equal to or greater than the second number, the first setting suggestion presentation is executed with a ninth probability (for example, 2%), and if the acquisition difference number of the amount of game value is a number less than the second number, the first setting suggestion presentation is executed with a tenth probability (for example, 1%), the eighth probability being higher than the seventh probability, the ninth probability being higher than the tenth probability, and the seventh probability being higher than the ninth probability. Furthermore, the eighth probability may be higher than the first probability, and the ninth probability may be higher than the second probability.

The first condition and the second condition may be a condition that adds a condition on the number of plays (number of games) to a condition on the difference in the amount of game value acquired. For example, the first condition may be a condition that at least the difference in the amount of game value acquired is greater than 0 and the number of plays is a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 games) or more, and the second condition may be a condition that at least the difference in the amount of game value acquired is less than 0 and the number of plays is less than the predetermined number. Alternatively, the first condition and the second condition may be a condition on the number of plays (number of games) instead of the condition on the difference in the amount of game value acquired. For example, the first condition may be a condition that at least the number of plays is a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 games) or more, and the second condition may be a condition that at least the number of plays is less than the predetermined number. The first condition may be a condition that the number of plays is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 1000 games), and the second condition may be a condition that the number of plays is less than the predetermined number. As an example of the predetermined number, it is preferable to set it to a number larger than the denominator of the winning probability (AT, bonus, etc.) at the lowest setting. For example, if the winning probability at the lowest setting is 1/300, it is preferable to set the predetermined number of games to a number exceeding 300 games. The purpose of setting the number of plays as a condition is to make it easier for players who have played for a long time to execute the first setting suggestion performance, or to encourage players to play for a long time, so it is preferable to set it to a guideline of winning once.

The first condition and the second condition may be a condition that adds a condition of the current time to the condition of the difference in the amount of game value acquired. For example, the first condition may be a condition that at least the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number greater than 0 and the current time is after a predetermined time (e.g., 12:00 noon), and the second condition may be a condition that at least the difference in the amount of game value acquired is a number less than 0 and the current time is before the predetermined time. Alternatively, the first condition and the second condition may be a condition of the current time instead of the condition of the difference in the amount of game value acquired. For example, the first condition may be a condition that at least the current time is after a predetermined time, and the second condition may be a condition that at least the current time is before the predetermined time. Also, the first condition may be a condition that the current time is after a predetermined time, and the second condition may be a condition that the current time is before the predetermined time.

Note that the division into "greater than" and "less than" in the explanation so far may be "more than" and "less than." Also, the division into "later than" and "earlier than" may be "later than" and "earlier than."

In the second variant, setting suggestion effect A, in which a ronin character appears to suggest that setting 1 is confirmed, is executed with the same probability regardless of the difference in number of coins (whether the difference in number is 0 or more or less than 0 coins), but instead of suggesting setting 1, it may be an effect that suggests the above-mentioned setting b.

The actions and effects described above in the explanation of the setting suggestion presentation are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of the embodiment, variant, or various examples described above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, variants, or various examples. In other words, unless there is a factor preventing the application, the component included only in the description of the embodiment, variant, or various examples may be applied to other embodiments, variants, or various examples and still form a cohesive technical idea.

<Numeric Values>
Next, the display of numerical values will be described in detail.

As mentioned above, in the normal AT state and the specialized zone, the number of medals may be added to the ending difference in the number of medals that is the condition for ending the normal AT state. There are several other presentation styles for this medal number addition in addition to the number additions shown in Figures 61 to 64, and the following describes addition performance 1 in which an update display is performed.

Figure 69 shows the relationship between the number of coins added and the display mode in add-on effect 1.

The number of coins added in the add-on performance 1 is set in units of 10 coins in the range of 30 to 500 coins. Therefore, the minimum number of coins added is 30 coins, and the maximum number of coins added is 500 coins. If the coin-addition lottery is won according to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61(b), the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines the final number of coins (final number of coins added) to be added in this add-on performance 1 from among the multiple numbers of coins added that were set in units of 10 coins in the range of 30 to 500 coins. The number image indicating the final number of coins added determined here is displayed at the end of the add-on performance 1 on the liquid crystal display device 157. At that time, the number image indicating the final number of coins added of 30 to 490 coins or less is displayed in gold, and the number image indicating the final number of coins added of 500 coins is displayed in rainbow colors.

In the add-on performance 1, the display is updated for each section. In the update display, a display suggesting a numerical value is displayed in response to a single press of the performance button 192 shown in FIG. 44. More specifically, each time the performance button 192 is pressed once, a number image incremented by a predetermined number is updated and displayed. The final number of added coins determined by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The CPU of the first sub-control unit 400 determines how to set the section depending on the final number of added coins. In the last section, the number at the end of the section becomes the final number of added coins. The first section is determined from among 30 coins, 40 coins, 50 coins, 60 coins, 70 coins, 80 coins, and 90 coins, and the second and subsequent sections are determined arbitrarily in increments of 10 coins, with the minimum section length being 30 coins. For example, if the final number of added coins is 90, the first section may be 90 coins, making it the only section, or the first section may be 30 coins, the second section also 30 coins, and the third section also 30 coins, making it three sections.

Figure 70 shows a specific example of how to determine the update interval when the first section contains 80 images.

The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 sets the intervals and also determines the update interval for the update display for each interval. The update interval for the added performance is the addition interval, and is shown as the "addition number" in Figure 70.

In the update display, a numerical value is displayed each time the effect button 192 is pressed. If the update display ends with only the first section, the final value in the first section becomes the final number of coins added. On the other hand, if a second section or later is available, the final value in the first section is merely a value that is being added in the middle of the addition.

In FIG. 70, the number displayed each time the effect button 192 is pressed is referred to as the "display number." The multiple display number numbers shown in FIG. 70 include multiple numbers that gradually approach the final number to be added (which may be 80 or a number greater than 80). Also, the difference from the previous number may become smaller as the final number to be added is approached. In other words, the added number may become smaller as the final number to be added is approached. Note that when continuing to the next section, the difference (added number) may become wider at first, and then become smaller as the final value of the section approaches.

In the example shown in FIG. 70, pressing the effect button 192 ten times in succession causes the last updated number image to be displayed, and even if the effect button 192 is pressed more than ten times in succession, a number image showing a larger number will not be displayed.

First, until the effect button 192 is pressed five times, the value obtained by dividing the final number of the first section, "80", by 6 and rounding it up ("13") is added. As a result, the number image displayed in the update display becomes a multiple of "13". The value added when the effect button 192 is pressed the sixth time will be described later, and when the effect button 192 is pressed the seventh time, the value obtained by further halving the value obtained by dividing "80" by 6, subtracting 3 from the result, and rounding the result up ("4") is added. When the effect button 192 is pressed the eighth to tenth times, "1" is added, which corresponds to the minimum addition number. When the effect button 192 is pressed the sixth time, the value added is "80" minus the value added up to this point ("8"). As explained above, by making the final three times the minimum addition number, the player is made aware that the final number of coins to be added or the value at the end of the first section is approaching, which gives the player a sense of suspense.

Figure 71 is a diagram showing the stages of the LCD display device 157 in the top-up performance 1 in which the updated display of up to 80 coins is performed, as described using Figure 70.

The LCD display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(a) displays the opening display of added effect 1. In this added effect 1, the player is prompted to repeatedly tap the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44.

The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(b) displays the lord's character UNT. This lord's character UNT continues to be displayed thereafter for the effective period of operation of the performance button 192.

The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(c) starts displaying an operation prompting display 192i for the effect button 192. This operation prompting display 192i includes a button image that imitates the effect button 192, a downward arrow image that instructs the user to press the button, and a text image that reads "PUSH." The operation prompting display 192i also continues to be displayed during the effective operation period of the effect button 192.

In FIG. 71(d), the first pressing of the effect button 192 is performed, and the LCD display 157 starts updating the display, and displays the number image "13" as the number display AUN during addition. In the updating display, the number display AUN during addition is updated and displayed each time the effect button 192 is pressed until it is pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example). The number display AUN during addition that is displayed thereafter is displayed in a layer in front of the display of the brother's character UNT, and is displayed with priority over the display of the brother's character UNT. On the other hand, the number display AUN during addition is displayed in a layer behind the operation prompt display 192i, and is not displayed with priority over the operation prompt display 192i. The number display AUN during addition may be displayed in a layer in front of the operation prompt display 192i.

In FIG. 71(e), the effect button 192 is pressed for the second time, and the updated AUN is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157. That is, the number image of "26" is displayed with 13 added to the previous AUN. After that, the effect button 192 is pressed repeatedly (the pressing operation is repeated), the AUN is updated and a new number image is displayed. Specifically, in FIG. 71(f) of the third operation, a number image of "39" with 13 added is displayed, in FIG. 71(g) of the fourth operation, a number image of "52" with 13 added is displayed, and in FIG. 71(h) of the fifth operation, a number image of "65" with 13 added is displayed. In FIG. 71(i) of the sixth operation, a number image of "73" with 8 added is displayed. In the seventh operation in FIG. 71(j), a number image of "77" with 4 added is displayed, and the added value (update interval) gradually narrows. In the eighth operation in FIG. 71(k), a number image of "78" with only 1 added is displayed, and in the ninth operation in FIG. 71(l), a number image of "79" with only 1 added is displayed.

As mentioned above, the minimum number of coins to be added is 30, so a number less than "30" cannot be displayed as the final number to be added. Also, because the final number to be added is in increments of 10, a number whose first digit is 1 to 9 cannot be displayed as the final number to be added. The number to be added during addition display AUN displays a number that cannot be displayed as the final number to be added. A player who knows that the final number to be added is in increments of 10 will know that as long as a number whose first digit is not 0 is displayed, it is not the final number to be added but the number to be added during addition AUN, and can play with anticipation as the final number to be added is displayed, which may increase the player's interest in the game.

Figure 72 is a continuation from Figure 71.

In FIG. 72(a), the effect button 192 is pressed for the tenth time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a number image of "80" which is the number image of "79" displayed in FIG. 71(l) with only 1 added. This number image of "80" is the final update number image FUN, and is displayed in normal size. When the last number in the first section is the final number of added coins, the final update number image FUN becomes a type of number image indicating the final number of added coins, and corresponds to an example of a second number image. The final update number image FUN is also displayed in a layer in front of the display of the lord's character UNT, and is displayed with priority over the display of the lord's character UNT, but is displayed in a layer behind the operation prompting display 192i, and is not displayed with priority over the operation prompting display 192i.

In the update display described above, nine number images of the currently added number display AUN and one number image of the last update number image FUN are displayed. That is, ten number images are displayed. The number of ten is a number that was previously determined by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 as described using FIG. 70, and is less than 80, which is the number of integers when counting up to 80 without including zero. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of performance data and lighten the processing load. It also gives the impression that the update display is progressing at a good pace.

The valid operation period of the effect button 192 is the period until the effect button 192 is operated 20 times, but if it is not pressed 20 times before a predetermined time has elapsed, it will end at the time the predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, the effect button 192 is pressed 20 times within the predetermined time (Figures 72 (b) to (c)), and the valid operation period ends.

The update display ends when the last updated number image FUN is displayed. Therefore, the last updated number image FUN is the last image displayed in the update display.

When the last number in the first section is the final number of coins added, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the boss character UNT, the operation prompt display 192i, and the final updated number image FUN disappear from the liquid crystal display 157, and the enlarged number display VLI is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157. This enlarged number display VLI is a type of number image that indicates the final number of coins added, is a larger image than the final updated number image FUN, and is an example of a third number image. By displaying the enlarged number display VLI, it is possible to enhance the addition performance 1 beyond the final number of coins added. Note that, as shown in FIG. 72(d'), the enlarged number display VLI may be displayed at a different angle from the final updated number image FUN. However, it is displayed without changing the angle if the angle is more than 90 degrees.

After the numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the result display of the add-on performance 1. The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(e) displays the result display of the add-on performance 1. As shown in FIG. 72(e), this result display is composed of a number display RUN1 of "80", which is the final number of added coins, a "TOTAL" display RUN2, a "+" symbol display RUN3, and a unit display RUN4 of "coins". The number display RUN1 of "80" is a type of number image indicating the final number of added coins, and corresponds to an example of a certain number image. This number display RUN1 of "80" is an image smaller than the numerical enlargement display VLI and is displayed in gold. By displaying the numerical enlargement display VLI with a large display size in advance, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the number ("80") of the number display RUN1 of "80". In addition, by adding the "TOTAL" display RUN2, the "+" symbol display RUN3, and the "pieces" unit display RUN4 to the "80" number display RUN1, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that this is the result display of the add-on performance 1, i.e., the final number of added coins in this add-on performance 1. The "TOTAL" display RUN2, the "+" symbol display RUN3, and the "pieces" unit display RUN4 are examples of additional images.

On the other hand, if the final number of added coins is 90 or more and does not end in the first section but continues to the second section or later, the process proceeds from FIG. 72(c) to FIG. 72(f). That is, when continuing to the second section, the Lord's character UNT, the operation prompt display 192i, and the final updated number image FUN also disappear from the liquid crystal display 157, but the enlarged numeric display VLI is not displayed, and instead a continuation display is displayed. The liquid crystal display 157 shown in FIG. 72(f) displays a continuation display CTI in which the Lord's character appears again and text such as "Not yet" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), when the final update number image FUN is displayed on the liquid crystal display 157, the player pays attention to whether the number in the final update number image FUN is the final number of added coins, and wishes to continue to the next section shown in FIG. 72(f). Here, the number in the final update number image FUN has a number with a 0 as the first digit, and since the number of added coins during addition display AUN does not display numbers with a 0 as the first digit, the player will notice that the final update number image FUN has been displayed when a number with a 0 as the first digit is displayed. However, the number of added coins during addition display AUN may also display a number with a 0 as the first digit (for example, 10, which is less than the minimum number of added coins, or 40, which is more than the minimum number of added coins).

When continuing to the next section, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(g) starts displaying the operation prompt display 192i of the effect button 192, and the first pressing of the effect button 192 is performed after the continuation. The pressing operation here corresponds to the first pressing operation in the second section. For the second section as well, the addition number is determined as explained using FIG. 70. In FIG. 72(g), the number image of "98", which is 18 added to the last number of the first section, "80", is displayed as the addition-in-progress number display AUN of the update display in the second section.

When the effect button 192 is pressed a second time, the display AUN of the number of added coins being added is updated as shown in FIG. 72(h), and a new number image of "116" with 18 added again is displayed. The display continues to update, and the second section ends. If the last number in the second section is the final number of added coins, the LCD display 157 displays an enlarged number display VLI (see FIG. 72(d)), and finally displays the result of the added effect 1 (see FIG. 72(d)). On the other hand, if the second section does not end and continues to the third section, the LCD display 157 displays a continuation display CTI (see FIG. 72(f)), and the third section begins.

Next, we will explain a modified example of the update display in add-on effect 1.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), when the effect button 192 is pressed for the 10th time, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the last updated number image FUN, which is a number image of "80." The last updated number image FUN starts out displayed in standard size, but is enlarged or reduced until the effect button 192 is pressed 20 times.

Figure 73 (a) shows the first modified example, zoom display.

In the enlarged/reduced display in FIG. 73(a), the display size of the last updated number image FUN changes from the standard size to the enlarged size, then returns from the enlarged size to the standard size, then changes from the standard size to the reduced size, then returns from the reduced size to the standard size, and then changes from the standard size to the enlarged size, and so on.

Figure 73 (b) shows the second modified example, an enlarged display.

In the second variant shown in Figure 73 (b), the standard size and the enlarged size are displayed alternately, and the reduced size is not displayed.

In either the first or second modified example, the timing of the change in the display size may be at predetermined time intervals, or may be the timing of the pressing of the performance button 192. In other words, the display size may change every time the performance button 192 is pressed.

In addition, whether the enlarged size is in the scaled display or the enlarged size is in the enlarged display, it is smaller than the display size of the number image "80" which is the enlarged numeric display VLI in FIG. 72(d).

Furthermore, while it has been explained that the last updated number image FUN is enlarged or scaled, the additional number display AUN during addition may also be enlarged or scaled.

Next, we will explain an example of changing the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in added effect 1.

Figure 74 shows an example of changing the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in added effect 1.

In this example, up to three digits are allowed for the final added amount. The added amount display AUN during addition skips one digit and starts with a two digit number.

Figure 74 (A) is a table showing the possible values for the first digit of the two-digit and three-digit AUN (additional number display).

The first digit can be 0, 3, 5 or 9.

Figure 74 (a) is a table showing the possible values for the second digit of the three-digit AUN (additional number of coins being added).

The second digit can be 1, 4, 6 or 8.

The highest digit in the AUN number displaying the number of coins added during addition is a number that increases by one from 1. Therefore, in the case of a two-digit AUN number displaying the number of coins added during addition, the second digit can be a number from 1 to 9, and in the case of a three-digit AUN number displaying the number of coins added during addition, the third digit can also be a number from 1 to 9.

The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 74(a) displays the opening display of added effect 1, similar to that shown in FIG. 71(a), and the player is prompted to repeatedly tap the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44.

The LCD display device 157 shown in FIG. 74(b) displays the lower character UNT, and also starts displaying the operation prompt display 192i for the performance button 192.

In Fig. 74(c), the effect button 192 is pressed for the first time, and the liquid crystal display 157 displays a two-digit number image "10" as the number of coins being added during addition AUN. In Fig. 74(d), the second operation displays a number image "13" with the first digit being 3, in Fig. 74(e), the third operation displays a number image "15" with the first digit being 5, and in Fig. 74(f), the fourth operation displays a number image "19" with the first digit being 9. Then, in Fig. 74(g), the fifth operation displays a number image "20" with the second digit of the highest digit being carried forward by one and the first digit being 0.

After the number image "99" is displayed as the AUN indicating the number of coins added during addition, the number image "110" is displayed, and after the number image "189" is displayed as the AUN indicating the number of coins added during addition, the number image "210" is displayed.

In this way, when the number of added coins during addition display AUN is displayed and updated to the next number of added coins during addition display AUN, if the final number of added coins is exceeded, the last updated number image FUN, which is a number image indicating the final number of added coins, is displayed instead of the next number of added coins during addition display AUN. For example, if the final number of added coins was 200 coins, the number image "189" is displayed as the number of added coins during addition display AUN, and then the number image "200" is displayed as the last updated number image FUN.

Next, we will explain the added effect 2. Explanations that overlap with those explained in the added effect 1 may be omitted. In addition, the same symbols used in the explanation of the added effect 1 will be used for items with the same names as those explained in the added effect 1.

In the add-on effect 1 explained so far, the display of the number of added coins AUN during the addition was updated in the update display. In other words, the number of added coins itself was displayed. In contrast, in add-on effect 2, the display of the number of added coins, which indicates the addition number (increase in numerical value), is displayed.

Figure 75 (a) shows the relationship between the final number of coins added and the display mode in add-on effect 2.

The final number of coins added in Add-on Performance 2 is set in increments of 10, within the range of 30 to 200 coins. Therefore, the minimum number of coins added is 30 coins, and the maximum number of coins added is 200 coins. The final number of coins added is displayed as a number image at the end of Add-on Performance 2 as the result display of Add-on Performance 2. In this case, if the final number of coins added is two digits, it is displayed in gold, and if it is three digits, it is displayed in rainbow colors.

Figure 75 (b) shows the relationship between the increase value and the display mode of the additional number of coins.

In the add-on performance 2, four values are prepared as the increase value (addition number). The add-on number display showing the increase value displays a number image of "+1" to indicate that the increase value is 1, and a number image of "+5" to indicate that the increase value is 5. These add-on number displays are displayed in blue. The add-on number display also displays a number image of "+10" to indicate that the increase value is 10, and a number image of "+20" to indicate that the increase value is 20. These add-on number displays are displayed in red. In other words, the add-on number display is displayed in blue for single-digit increase values, and in red for double-digit increase values.

As mentioned above, the minimum number of coins added in the add-on effect 2 is 30 coins, so the increased number is composed of a number that cannot be displayed as the final number of coins added. However, an additional increased number of 30 coins may be added.

In addition, the display of the number of added coins is regulated so that it does not consist of only the number image "+1", and number images "+5", "+10", and "+20" also appear, allowing the update display to proceed at a good pace.

Figure 75 (c) shows a modified example of the display mode of the additional number of coins.

In this modified example, when the increase is two digits, the number image of the increase, which indicates the number of added coins, is displayed in the enlarged display described using FIG. 73(a), and when the increase is one digit, the number image of the increase is displayed in the standard size. Note that instead of the enlarged display, it may be displayed in the enlarged display described using FIG. 73(b).

Figure 76 is a diagram showing the state of the LCD display device 157 in stages during added performance 2.

The LCD display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(a) displays the opening display of the additional effect 2. In this additional effect 2, the player is also prompted to repeatedly press the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44.

The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(b) displays a panda character UNP. This panda character UNP continues to be displayed thereafter for the effective period during which the performance button 192 is operated.

On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(c), the display of the operation prompt display 192i for the effect button 192 is started, and the first pressing operation of the effect button 192 is performed. As a result, in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 192, a blue number image of "+1", which is the number display PUN of the additional amount, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In FIG. 76(d), the second pressing of the performance button 192 is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red number image of "+10" which is the additional number display PUN in response to the second pressing of the performance button 192. Note that a blue number image of "+1" which is the additional number display PUN in response to the first pressing of the performance button 192 is also displayed, but the red number image of "+10" displayed later is displayed overlapping this number image. In this way, the additional number display PUNs may be displayed overlapping each other. This overlap will be described in detail using FIG. 76(d'). In FIG. 76(d'), an arrow PUN1v indicating the vertical display range of the number image of "+1" displayed earlier and an arrow PUN1s indicating its horizontal display range are shown. Also, an arrow PUN2v indicating the vertical display range of the number image of "+10" displayed later and an arrow PUN2s indicating its horizontal display range are shown. In the vertical direction, the overlap between the first displayed number image "+1" and the second displayed number image "+10" is indicated by the arrow OLv. On the other hand, in the horizontal direction, the first displayed number image "+1" is entirely within the display range of the second displayed number image "+10", and the horizontal display range of the "+1" number image is the horizontal overlap (see arrow PUN1s). In the number images of the two added number display PUNs displayed in the added performance 2, the vertical overlap does not exceed half the range of the number image, and the horizontal overlap may exceed half the range of the number image. Note that the opposite relationship may be adopted, and the horizontal overlap may not exceed half the range of the number image, and the vertical overlap may exceed half the range of the number image.

In FIG. 76(e), the effect button 192 is pressed a third time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red number image of "+20" which is the number PUN of the additional amount in response to the third pressing of the effect button 192. This red number image of "+20" is displayed in a layer behind the operation prompt display 192i of the effect button 192, and overlaps with the operation prompt display 192i, making a part of it difficult to see. Note that the number image of the number PUN of the additional amount may overlap with the operation prompt display 192i. Also, the blue number image of "+1" which is the number PUN of the additional amount in response to the first pressing of the effect button 192 has disappeared. The number PUN of the additional amount is a display that disappears after a certain period of time has passed. Meanwhile, the red number image of "+10" which is the number PUN of the second pressing is still displayed.

In FIG. 76(g), the effect button 192 is pressed for the tenth time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a blue number image of "+5", which is the number PUN indicating the number of additional coins added in response to the tenth press of the effect button 192.

Next, in the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 76(h), the panda character UNP, the operation prompt display 192i, and the number of added coins display PUN disappear, and the end effect display of the update display is displayed on the entire screen. The update display ends when the end effect display is displayed. Therefore, in the update display for the add-on performance 2, a number image indicating the final number of added coins is not displayed, and the sum of the numbers of the number of added coins display PUN displayed up to that point becomes the final number of added coins. The timing of the display of the end effect display is the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the update display, that is, the timing when the effective operation period of the performance button 192 has elapsed, but it may also be the timing when the number of times the performance button 192 has been operated reaches a predetermined number.

After the update display end effect display is displayed, as shown in Figure 76 (i), the LCD display 157 displays an enlarged numeric display VLI. This enlarged numeric display VLI is a type of number image that indicates the final number of added coins, and is a larger image than the number of added coins display PUN, and corresponds to an example of a third numeric image. Note that the enlarged numeric display VLI here may also be displayed at a different angle from the number of added coins display PUN. However, it is displayed without changing the angle if it is more than 90 degrees.

After the enlarged numerical display VLI is displayed, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the result of the add-on effect 2. The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(j) displays the result of the add-on effect 2, and is composed of a number display RUN1 of "60", which is the final number of added coins, a "TOTAL" display RUN2, a "+" symbol display RUN3, and a unit display RUN4 of "coins". The number display RUN1 of "60" is a type of number image that indicates the final number of added coins, and corresponds to an example of a certain number image. This number display RUN1 of "60" is a smaller display size than the enlarged numerical display VLI, and is displayed in gold.

Next, we will explain an example of changing the way the additional number of coins PUN is displayed in additional performance 2.

In this example, the additional number display PUN will not disappear after a certain amount of time has passed and will continue to be displayed until the end effect display for the update display is displayed.

Figure 77 is a diagram showing the state of the LCD display device 157 in stages in a modified version of added effect 2.

Figures 77(a) to (d) are the same as Figures 76(a) to 76(d).

In FIG. 77(e), the effect button 192 is pressed a third time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red number image of "+20" which is the additional number display PUN in response to the third press of the effect button 192. In this example, in addition to the red number image of "+10" in response to the second press, the blue number image of "+1" in response to the first press of the effect button 192 also remains displayed.

In FIG. 77(g), the performance button 192 is pressed for the tenth time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a blue number image of "+5" which is the additional number display PUN in response to the tenth pressing of the performance button 192. In addition, all the number images which are the additional number display PUN that have been displayed in response to each of the first to ninth operations are still displayed without disappearing. A total of ten number images of the additional number display PUN are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 77(g). For this reason, the number images of the additional number display PUN may overlap each other. In the overlap of the number images of the additional number display PUN, the number image displayed later is displayed overlapping the number image displayed earlier. Note that none of the number images of the 10 additional number display PUNs overlap the operation prompt display 192i of the performance button 192, and the operation prompt display 192i is displayed in the foreground layer. In addition, the number image of the additional number display PUN may overlap the operation prompt display 192i.

Next, in the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 77(h), the panda character UNP, the operation prompt display 192i, and the number images of the 10 added coin number displays PUN all disappear, and the update display end effect display is displayed on the entire screen. Note that the player does not know whether the update display will end or not until the update display end effect display is displayed, but by adding up the numerical values of the 10 added coin number displays PUN displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 77(g), the final number of added coins can be known in advance. On the other hand, by displaying the 10 added coin number displays PUN, it can be given the impression that the final number of added coins has been increased to a considerable number at first glance, which may increase the interest of the game.

After the end effect display of the update display is displayed, the LCD display device 157 displays an enlarged numerical value display VLI (see Figure 77 (i)), and the final number of coins added is notified for the first time. Finally, as the result display of the addition performance 2, the number display RUN1 of "60" which is the final number of coins added, the display RUN2 of "TOTAL", the symbol display RUN3 of "+", and the unit display RUN4 of "coins" are displayed (see Figure 77 (j)).

Figure 77 (d') shows an example where the additional number display PUN is displayed at different angles. When multiple additional number display PUNs are displayed, they may be displayed at different angles in different directions. This may prevent the additional number display PUNs from overlapping. Note that even when the angle is changed, it should not be changed by more than 90 degrees.

In the above explanation, examples have been given of displaying numerical values such as the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e) and the number display RUN1 of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j), but characters or symbols that evoke the numerical values may be displayed, or the numerical values may be displayed based on the number of characters. In addition, examples have been given of displaying numerical values such as the number display AUN during addition shown in FIG. 71(d)-(l), etc., and the number display PUN of the number of added pieces shown in FIG. 76(c)-(g), etc., but characters or symbols that evoke the numerical values may be displayed, or the numerical values may be displayed based on the number of characters.

Although the numerical value was the number of medals, the added effect described here may be the number of games played, the number of stages, or the number of sets. It may also be a numerical value that increases or decreases in the effect (for example, a numerical value representing the number of enemies, the remaining vitality, or the remaining time). Alternatively, it may be the number of balls, as it can be applied to pachinko machines.

In addition, the slot machine 100 may be a slot machine that does not use medals and only exchanges electronic data, in which case the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals (hereinafter also referred to as gaming value), and the input of gaming value includes inputting electronic data from a specified external device (an electronic storage device having a function capable of electronically storing the number of medals loaned and the number of medals won by winning), and the payout of gaming value includes outputting electronic data to the specified external device (electronic storage device).

In addition, the update display was updated and displayed each time the effect button 192 was pressed once, but the value may be updated and displayed every time a predetermined time has elapsed without pressing the effect button 192. Also, although the effect button 192 was pressed repeatedly, it may be pressed and held down.

Furthermore, while we have described update displays in additional effects where a numerical value increases, this technology can also be applied to displays where a numerical value decreases (for example, displays in countdown effects or displays showing the number of enemies remaining in a mission where enemies are defeated).

<Summary of numerical values>
According to the above description,
"A display means [e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157];
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400) for determining a certain number (e.g., the number of the final added amount) to be displayed on the display means from among a number of numbers (e.g., the numbers from 30 to 500 shown in FIG. 69 or the numbers from 30 to 200 shown in FIG. 75(a));
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means displays an update display (e.g., the displays from FIG. 71(d) to FIG. 72(c) or the displays from FIG. 76(c) to FIG. 76(g)) that displays a display suggesting a certain numerical value in response to a predetermined trigger (e.g., pressing of the performance button 192) before displaying a display suggesting the certain numerical value (e.g., RUN1 displaying the number of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e) or RUN1 displaying the number of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j)), and finally displays a display suggesting the certain numerical value,
The display indicating a numerical value (e.g., the number of added pieces during addition display AUN and the number of added pieces display PUN) displayed in the update display includes a display indicating a numerical value different from any of the multiple numerical values (e.g., the display number in FIG. 70, the increased numerical value shown in FIG. 75(b)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

This gaming machine allows for a wide variety of update displays. In addition, the update display can also display a display suggesting a number different from any of the multiple numbers, thereby preventing the final certain number from being revealed.

In addition, the display suggesting numerical values displayed in the update display can be diversified compared to only the multiple numerical values that can be determined by the determination means. Furthermore, by including numerical values that will never actually be determined as the numerical values displayed on the display means, in addition to numerical values that can be determined by the determination means, the impression that a uniform lottery is being held using only numerical values that can be determined can be reduced, and a sense of randomness can be further enhanced, as if there were a variety of selection options, and ultimately the player can be induced to think about not only numerical values that can actually be determined, but also numerical values that will never actually be determined, as if they could possibly be determined.

The display suggesting a certain numerical value may be a display of a character or symbol that is associated with the certain numerical value.

The certain number may be a number representing the number of gaming media, a number representing the number of games played, or a number that increases or decreases during the presentation (for example, a number representing the number of enemies, a number representing remaining vitality, or a number representing the remaining time).

The predetermined trigger may be the operation of an operating means (e.g., each operation) or the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., every second).

The display means displays an update display that displays a numerical value in response to a predetermined trigger before displaying the certain numerical value, and finally displays the certain numerical value, and the numerical value displayed in the update display may include a numerical value different from any of the plurality of numerical values.

Also,
"The display suggesting a certain numerical value is a certain number image showing the certain numerical value [for example, the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e)],
The display indicating the numerical value in the update display is a number image indicating the numerical value [for example, an addition number display AUN],
the display means displays a number image indicating an integer value in the updated display,
In the update display, a number image showing each of the integer values of a specific number (e.g., 10) is displayed;
The specific number is a number that is less than the number of integers (e.g., 80) when counting up to the certain numerical value without including 0.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

This gaming machine can reduce data volume and ease processing burdens.

In addition, the update display uses a number that is fewer than the number of integers when counting up to the certain number, excluding zero, giving the impression that the number is switching at a much faster rate while preventing the number of numbers displayed from becoming limited.

For example, if the certain number is "10," the number of integers when counting up to the certain number without including zero is "1," "2," "3," ... "10," which is 10, but the specific number is a number less than 10.

The update display may be such that the numerical value indicated by the number image increases or decreases each time the number image indicating the numerical value is updated.

The display means may display a number image [e.g., an AUN display showing the number of added coins during addition] indicating an integer number approaching the certain number in the update display.

The numerical value indicated by the numeric image displayed in the update display may be a numerical value indicating the increase or decrease [for example, the number of added coins displayed, PUN].

The number image displayed in the update display may be one that disappears after being displayed [for example, the additional number display PUN in the example of FIG. 76]. For example, it may be one that disappears when a new number image is displayed, or one that disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed.

The number image displayed in the update display may be one that is continuously displayed [for example, the additional number display PUN in the example of FIG. 77]. For example, it may be one that is continuously displayed until the certain number image or the third number image is displayed, or it may be one that is continuously displayed until just before the certain number image or the third number image is displayed, or it may be one that is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

The numerical values indicated by the number images displayed in the updated display may include a number of numerical values [e.g., 13, 26, 39, 52, 65, 73, 77, 78, 79] that gradually approach the certain numerical value [e.g., 80] [e.g., the specific example in FIG. 70]. Furthermore, there may be cases where the difference [e.g., the added number] with the previously displayed numerical value becomes smaller as the certain numerical value is approached [e.g., 13 to 8, 8 to 4, 4 to 1].

The numerical value indicated by the number image displayed in the update display may include any one of the multiple numerical values. In this case, even if a number image indicating any one of the multiple numerical values is displayed, it does not necessarily mean that the certain number image is displayed, and it is possible to keep the attention on the display of the number image until the very end.

Also,
"In the update display, a second number image [for example, a last updated number image FUN] indicating the certain numerical value different from the certain number image is displayed last,
the display means displays a third number image (e.g., a numerical enlargement display VLI) during a period from when the second number image is displayed in the updated display to when the certain number image is displayed,
The third number image is an image showing the certain numerical value and is larger than the second number image (for example, the example shown in FIG. 72 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, by displaying the third number image, it is possible to make the final certain number easier to recognize and also to build excitement beyond that certain number.

The display means may display the number images (e.g., the additional number display PUN in the example of FIG. 77) displayed in the update display at different angles (e.g., FIG. 77(d')).

The display means may display the certain number image in a color corresponding to the numerical value [e.g., gold or rainbow colors].

Also,
"The certain number image [for example, the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e)] is an image smaller than the third number image [for example, the enlarged numeric display VLI shown in FIG. 72(d)],
The display means displays the certain number image together with an additional image that indicates that it is the certain number image [for example, a display RUN2 of "TOTAL", a symbol display RUN3 of "+", and a unit display RUN4 of "sheets"] [for example, FIG. 72(e)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, the additional image makes it easier for the player to recognize the final number image.

The additional image may be, for example, a text image of "total," a symbol image of + or -, or a text image showing units such as "pieces."

The display means may enlarge the number image displayed in the updated display from a normal size, display the image in the normal size, and then reduce the size from the normal size, and then display the image in the normal size [for example, the enlarged display in FIG. 73(a)].

Also,
"The display means displays a third number image [for example, a numerical enlargement display VLI shown in FIG. 76(i)] during the period from when the display of the update display ends until when the certain number image [for example, a number display RUN1 of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j)] is displayed,
The third number image is an image showing the certain numerical value and is larger than the certain number image (for example, FIG. 76(i)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, by displaying the third number image, it is possible to make the final certain number easier to recognize, and to make the game more exciting than the certain number.

In the updated display, a number image showing the certain numerical value that is different from the certain number image is not displayed.

The actions and effects described above in the explanation of the setting suggestion presentation are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of the embodiment, variant, or various examples described above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, variants, or various examples. In other words, unless there is a factor preventing the application, the component included only in the description of the embodiment, variant, or various examples may be applied to other embodiments, variants, or various examples and still form a cohesive technical idea.

Next, using Figures 78 to 106, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 78 to 106 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 78 to 106, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 78 to 106 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 78 to 106.

The slot machine in this example is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels each decorated with multiple types of symbols begin to spin when a predetermined operation to start spin is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the operation to start spin, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spin is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery and the combination of symbols based on the results of the lottery meet the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not meet the conditions, the game ends without paying out any gaming media.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 78 and 79. Figure 78 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). Figure 79 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The slot machine 100 shown in Figure 78 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are stored inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this example, each symbol is printed in an appropriate number at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member, which is then attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels 110-112. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through reel windows 113 provided in front of each of the reels 110-112, making a total of nine symbols visible. To explain this in more detail using FIG. 80(a), the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 2 in the figure; also called symbol position 2) is the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top of the center reel 111 (position 4 in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is the center reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the center reel 111 (position 5 in the figure; also called symbol position 5) is the center reel middle symbol, The symbol displayed on the lower row of the reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is called the middle reel lower row symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7) is called the right reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is called the right reel lower row symbol, and three symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically through the reel window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of symbols of multiple types. In addition, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. In this example, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is disposed on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the reel window 113. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

In this example, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of the left reel middle pattern (pattern position 2), the middle reel middle pattern (pattern position 5), and the right reel middle pattern (pattern position 8). The winning line 114 is a line set at the stop position of the patterns visible through the reel window 113, and is a line that determines whether or not a pattern combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed. This winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 80(a). The winning line 114 that is effective (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as an "effective line") is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 in this example is a three-coin bet exclusive machine, and if the number of medals inserted is less than three, the winning line 114 is not effective, and if the number of medals inserted is three, the winning line 114 is effective. When the winning line 114 is effective, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

The pay lines (winning lines) are not limited to the one middle winning line L1 described above, but may be, for example, one upper pay line consisting of the upper left reel pattern (pattern position 1), the upper middle reel pattern (pattern position 4) and the upper right reel pattern (pattern position 7), or one lower pay line consisting of the lower left reel pattern (pattern position 3), the lower middle reel pattern (pattern position 6) and the lower right reel pattern (pattern position 9). Also, it may be one right-downward pay line consisting of the upper left reel pattern (pattern position 1), the middle middle reel pattern (pattern position 5) and the lower right reel pattern (pattern position 9), or one right-upward pay line consisting of the lower left reel pattern (pattern position 3), the middle middle reel pattern (pattern position 5) and the upper right reel pattern (pattern position 7). Also, there may be one irregular effective line consisting of the middle symbol on the left reel (symbol position 2), the middle symbol on the middle reel (symbol position 5), and the top symbol on the right reel (symbol position 7). Also, the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a right-downward winning line consisting of the top symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the bottom symbol on the right reel, and a right-upward winning line consisting of the bottom symbol on the left reel, the middle symbol on the middle reel, and the top symbol on the right reel, totaling three lines, may be set as effective winning lines, and a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as effective winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, a bonus role) has been internally won in an internal winning role lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if the player won a replay role (details of which will be described later), which is one of the winning roles, in the previous game.

The medal insertion buttons (also called bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this example, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132 is also called a bet operation, and the bet button 132 is also called a MAX bet button. In this example, light-emitting bodies (called bet button lamps) are provided inside the bet buttons 130 to 132, and when the bet buttons 130 to 132 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit to notify the player. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to notify that the game start operation is possible.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. In this example, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137-139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110-112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in correspondence with each of the reels 110-112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137-139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Additionally, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation will be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation will be referred to as the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning will be referred to as the operation sequence or push order. The operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "forward push operation sequence" or simply "forward push", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the right reel 112 is called the "forward sandwich", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "middle push operation sequence" or simply "middle push", the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the second stop reel is the center reel 111 is called the "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push", and the operation sequence of the stop operation where the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the second stop reel is the left reel 110 is called the "reverse sandwich". In this example, an illuminator (called a stop button lamp) is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137-139, and when the stop buttons 137-139 can be operated, the illuminator is lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is an outlet for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided below the stop button unit 136. Below the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.
The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A title panel 160 and a sound hole 143 are provided on the upper part of the front door 102.

A liquid crystal display (performance image display) 157 is provided in the area including the reel window 113 and its surroundings. Of these, the area inside the reel window 113 (the area covering the reel window 113) is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal that allows the reels 110 to 112 to be viewed through the reel window 113.

The PUSH button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a specified effect. In this example, the history of the number of coins won in the AT state up to now can be displayed based on the operation of the PUSH button 192. Note that in this example, an illuminator (called a PUSH button lamp) is provided inside the PUSH button 192, and when the PUSH button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the illuminator can be lit to notify the player.

Figure 79 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by an upper panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a lower panel 264, and a rear panel 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is disposed in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the rear panel 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are disposed below this main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the front, a first sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a first sub-control board that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 is disposed. Additionally, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

The medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110-112, a power supply device 252 having a power board is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when it is closed.

The power supply unit 252 converts AC power supplied from an external source to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a specified voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. It also has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a specified period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

The medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided to the right of the medal payout device 180, with an overflow terminal behind it (not shown). The power supply 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 265, which is connected to the power cord 265 and extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the liquid crystal display device 157 are provided a second sub-board case 230 that houses the second sub-control board that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500, and an upper speaker 272. Below the liquid crystal display device 157 are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Referring to Figures 78 and 79, the liquid crystal display device 157 is a liquid crystal display equipped with a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A equipped with a color filter and a backlight 157B that illuminates the color liquid crystal panel 157A from the back side with white light. The liquid crystal panel 157A is a rectangular panel extending to both the inner and outer areas of the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be adopted. The liquid crystal panel 157A is equipped with R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, for example, and is configured by sealing liquid crystal between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, pixel electrodes, etc. are formed, and this liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between polarizing plates. The liquid crystal panel 157A may be of a normally white type, but in this example, it is of a normally black type.

The backlight 157B includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate with light, and optical members such as a diffusion sheet. The light source is arranged, for example, along the edge of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In this example, the backlight 157 has an opening 157b that penetrates in the thickness direction in the area inside the reel window 113, and the player can see each of the reels 110 to 112 without going through a light guide plate or the like. In this example, the backlight provided on each of the reels 110 to 112 is used to illuminate the area from behind where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap. Since the reel band has a white (or milky white) color, each of the reels 110 to 112 can achieve illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157, and the backlights of each of the reels 110 to 112 can be called a backlight unit, either a part of the backlight 157 or the entire backlight.

In this example, the opening 157b is a single rectangle whose outline matches the reel window 113, but it may be three rectangles corresponding to each of the reels 110-112 so as to fill the gaps between the reels. This improves the clarity of the image displayed in the gaps between the reels.

By blocking light transmission through the liquid crystal panel 157A, a black image appears to be displayed to the player. Also, by transmitting the backlight light equally through R, G, and B, a white image appears to be displayed to the player. When a white image is displayed, it can be said that the liquid crystal panel 157A has high transparency, and when R, G, and B are each controlled to their maximum brightness, it can be said that this is the state in which light is most transparent. The display of black, white, or other colors can be controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The operation of this liquid crystal display device 157 will be explained using Figures 80(b) to (d). These figures show an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 80(b) shows the state of the liquid crystal display 157 when no power is supplied to the slot machine 100. As described above, in this example, the liquid crystal display 157 is a normally black type liquid crystal display, and when the power is off, a black image appears to be displayed to the player, making it difficult to see the reels 110 to 112.

Figure 80 (c) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157. This figure shows that the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image. At this time, in the area inside the reel window 113, light from the reels 110 to 112 acts as a backlight, and the image on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes visible in this area. However, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 reduces the visibility of the patterns on the reels 110 to 112 (making them harder to see).

Figure 80(d) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 that is different from that shown in Figure 80(c). In this figure, the area inside the reel window 113 is different from the example shown in (c) above. Specifically, a white image is displayed in the area inside the reel window 113, ensuring visibility of the reels 110 to 112. In this example, this state is reached after a medal is inserted in one game. In other words, in order to ensure visibility of the reels 110 to 112, the state shown in Figure 80(d) is maintained at least from the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112 until they stop.

As described above, in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is provided with an area that covers the reel window 113, and a white image is displayed to make the reels 110 to 112 visible, while the visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is reduced when an image other than white is displayed. Note that in order to improve the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, it is possible to set the transmittance of each pixel that constitutes the image in the area that covers the reel window 113, and to set the transmittance to 100% (transparent state).

The device that displays the images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this example, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this example, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 81. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel pattern arrangements, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this is also true for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. In this example, a ROM, which is a storage device with a storage area for non-volatilely storing data, and a RAM, which is a storage device with a storage area for temporarily storing data, are used in combination.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupts is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, left reel 110 index sensor, middle reel 111 index sensor, right reel 112 index sensor, PUSH button 192 sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, and right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130-132, respectively, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and turn to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it turns to L level until it turns to L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 339 (notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also includes a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, medal insertion possible lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button 137-139 lamps, PUSH button lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 423, and the CPU 404 monitors the detection results of a door sensor 421 that detects the opening of the front door 102.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the display of the performance image display device 157.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 has a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 82. Note that Figure 82 shows the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional layout.

On each of the reels 110-112, multiple types of symbols (10 types in this example) as shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames numbered 0-19 in this example). The numbers 0-19 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers that indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each of the reels 110-112. For example, in this example, the "bell symbol" is arranged in the number 0 frame of the left reel 110, the "replay symbol" is arranged in the number 1 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "watermelon 1 symbol" is arranged in the number 1 frame of the right reel 112.

Note that "Blue Seven 2" and "Watermelon 2" have star marks on them, which means that "Blue Seven 2" and "Watermelon 2" have the same design as "Blue Seven 1" and "Watermelon 1" but are different designs (also called designs of the same kind). "Similar designs" include designs where the characters are the same but have different expressions, or the object (watermelon) is the same but has different patterns. In this example, star marks are added to make it easier to distinguish between designs of the same kind.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described.

Winning roles on the slot machine 100 include replay roles and minor roles. Note that the types of winning roles are not limited to these roles and can be any type. Among the winning roles in this example, the replay role is sometimes called an "operating role" to distinguish it from winning roles as it allows replay without inserting new medals. In this example, "winning" also includes cases where a symbol combination of an operating role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, a winning replay role.

A replay is a winning role (operating role) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) upon winning, and you can play the next game with the amount of bet set for that game, and no medals are paid out. A minor role is a winning role that pays out a set number of medals upon winning.

<Types of internal winning roles>
Next, some of the internal winning roles (condition devices) of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a table showing the display mode and payout number for each operation content of the common bell and push order role among the internal winning roles. The push order role refers to an internal winning role in which the winning role (the display mode of the reels 110 to 112) differs depending on the contents of the stop operation (in this example, the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation).

In this example, (1) the stop operation of left, center, and right (stop operation with the first stop reel set to the left reel 110, the second stop reel set to the center reel 111, and the third stop reel set to the right reel 112) is an LCR operation, (2) the stop operation of left, right, and center (stop operation with the first stop reel set to the left reel 110, the second stop reel set to the right reel 112, and the third stop reel set to the center reel 111) is an LRC operation, (3) the stop operation of center, left, and right (stop operation with the first stop reel set to the center reel 111, the second stop reel set to the left reel 110, and the third stop reel set to the right reel 112) is a CLR operation, ( 4) A stop operation of center, right, and left (a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110) is sometimes referred to as a CRL operation, (5) a stop operation of right, left, and center (a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the center reel 111) is sometimes referred to as an RLC operation, and (6) a stop operation of right, center, and left (a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the center reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110) is sometimes referred to as an RCL operation.

The winning role in the game is one of the roles corresponding to the internal winning role. These internal winning roles are determined by a lottery (winning role internal lottery) at the start of the game. Here, the winning probability of each internal winning role is generally described as the value obtained by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data corresponding to each internal winning role by the numerical data (65536 in this example) in the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described later. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each internal winning role and loss. In the winning role internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any of the internal winning roles, and the internal winning role is determined. In reality, this lottery data is prepared in settings 1 to 6, each of which has a different winning probability for at least one internal winning role, and the staff of the game arcade can arbitrarily select and set any of the setting values.

Regarding the setting values, the probability of winning the internal winning role may be common to each setting value, while the probability of winning the AT (ease of transitioning to the AT), which will be described later, may be different for settings 1 to 6. For example, in setting 1, the probability of drawing the AT when a certain internal winning role is determined may be probability A, while in setting 6, the probability of drawing the AT when a certain internal winning role is determined may be probability B, which is higher than probability A.

For example, if Push Order Bell_CLR1 or Push Order Bell_CLR2 wins internally in the winning role internal lottery, (1) if an LCR operation or an LRC operation is performed, a miss or 1-coin role is won, and 0 or 1 medals are paid out; (2) if a CLR operation is performed, a bell is won, and 9 medals are paid out; (3) if a CRL operation is performed, a 1-coin role is won, and 1 medal is paid out; (4) if an RLC operation or an RCL operation is performed, a miss or 1-coin role is won, and 0 or 1 medal is paid out. In other words, if a CLR operation is performed, Push Order Bell_CLR1 or Push Order Bell_CLR2 wins a bell, and the maximum number of medals is paid out. Hereinafter, the operation content when the maximum number of medals is paid out in the case of an internal win for a push order role may be referred to as the "correct operation". In this example, a correct operation means that the sequence of operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct.

Similarly, for Push Order Bell_CRL1 or Push Order Bell_CRL2, the correct operation is the CRL operation, and if the CRL operation is performed, a bell is won and 9 medals are paid out. Also, for Push Order Bell_RLC1 or Push Order Bell_RLC2, the correct operation is the RLC operation, and if the RLC operation is performed, a bell is won and 9 medals are paid out, and for Push Order Bell_RCL1 or Push Order Bell_RCL2, the correct operation is the RCL operation, and if the RCL operation is performed, a bell is won and 9 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, for example, if the common bell wins internally in the winning role internal lottery, the bell wins and nine medals are paid out regardless of the operation content. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned push order bell_CLR1, push order bell_CLR2, push order bell_CRL1, push order bell_CRL2, push order bell_RLC1, push order bell_RLC2, push order bell_RCL1 and push order bell_RCL2 are collectively referred to as "push order bells". Of these "push order bells", push order bell_CLR1, push order bell_CLR2, push order bell_CRL1 and push order bell_CRL2 are sometimes referred to as "middle first bells" for convenience of explanation, and push order bell_RLC1, push order bell_RLC2, push order bell_RCL1 and push order bell_RCL2 are sometimes referred to as "right first bells". Additionally, the number of common bells paid out is set to nine, the same as the push order bells, but this is not limited to the number, and the number can be fewer than the push order bells. By reducing the number of common bells, it is possible to reduce the number of medals paid out under normal conditions.

In this example, there is no push order bell for which the correct answer is an LCR or LRC operation (forward push or forward sandwich), but there is a push order bell for which the correct answer is a CLR or CRL operation (middle push) and an RLC or RCL operation (reverse push or reverse sandwich).

The display mode and payout number for each operation when the internal winning role (condition device) is 1-coin role 1-6 and replay 1-7 are as shown in FIG. 83. Note that the internal winning roles are not limited to these, and include rare roles such as watermelon and cherry.

<Types of game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the game states of the slot machine 100 will be described. Fig. 84 is a transition diagram of the game states (specifically, the game states of the AT system) of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. The game states of the AT system are game states related to the performance. The lottery data used in the above-mentioned internal lottery process for winning combinations is set for each game state of the RT system (not shown).

The game state of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a normal mode and an AT mode. The normal mode is a state in which the operation navigation is not executed, and the AT mode is a state in which the operation navigation may be executed. Here, the operation navigation is a notification effect that notifies the stop operation mode (information on the contents of the stop operation), and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, a favorable result is brought to the player. The operation navigation is roughly divided into (1) a push order navigation that notifies information including the operation order (push order) of the stop operation, and (2) a pattern navigation that notifies information including operation timing (for example, the pattern of the stop target). In other words, the push order navigation is an operation navigation that does not include the timing of the push, and the pattern navigation is an operation navigation that includes the timing of the push. In the case of this example, for example, in the AT mode, if the push order bell is internally won, the correct operation content (operation order) may be notified.

Normal mode consists of a normal stage and challenge zone 1 (hereafter abbreviated as CZ1). AT mode consists of challenge zone 2 (hereafter abbreviated as CZ2), an added zone, the normal AT state, and an ending state.

In addition to the six game states described above, the concept of advantageous and non-advantageous zones is established. The advantageous zone is composed of most of the normal stage, CZ1, most of CZ2, the top-up zone, the normal AT state, and the ending state, while the non-advantageous zone is composed of a part of the normal stage and a part of CZ2. In this example, the advantageous zone is a period in which the upper limit number of games is set and the upper limit difference number is set. Specifically, the upper limit number of games is 3000 games, and the upper limit difference number is 2400. Here, the difference number is the cumulative value of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in one game (number of medals paid out - number of medals inserted). The upper limit number of games (upper limit number of games) and the upper limit difference number of medals in the advantageous zone are values that determine the end of the advantageous zone, and the number of games is updated by one game, and the difference number is updated by the result of one game.

In this example, the add-on zone, the normal AT state in which it is not possible to determine whether the upper limit difference number or a number close to the upper limit difference number can be reached, and the ending state in which it is possible to determine whether the upper limit difference number or a number close to the upper limit difference number can be reached are sometimes collectively referred to as the "AT state." In addition, in contrast to this AT state, states that are not in the AT state, that is, the normal stage, CZ1, and CZ2, are sometimes collectively referred to as the "normal state."

In general, in order to realize a game that increases the medal payout in a state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state, it is necessary to suppress the medal payout in the normal state. In addition, with regard to the stopping operation of the gaming machine, it is often recommended that the player perform the stopping operation (forward push or forward sandwich) with the first stopping operation being to the left. Therefore, in this example, when a push order role is provided, a push order bell as shown in FIG. 83 (there is no push order bell with the first stopping operation being to the left as the correct answer, but there is a push order bell with the first stopping operation being in the middle or to the right as the correct answer) is adopted as a method of realizing a game that suppresses the medal payout in the normal state. Although the winning probability of each condition device is not shown in FIG. 83, in this example, the internal winning probability of the common bell is set lower than the internal winning probability of the push order bell. For example, if the internal winning probability of the common bell is probability X, the internal winning probability of the first middle bell is probability Y (the winning probability of each of the first middle bells is Y/4), and the internal winning probability of the first right bell is probability Z (the winning probability of each of the first right bells is Z/4), then probability X is lower than probability Y+Z, which is the sum of probability Y and probability Z (probability X<probability Y+Z). Note that the internal winning probability is not limited to this, and it may also be probability X<probability Y, probability X<probability Z, or probability X=probability Y=probability Z.

In this example, there is no push order bell for which the first stop operation to the left is the correct answer, but this may be provided separately. In this case, the internal winning probability of the push order bell for which the first stop operation to the left is the correct answer can be set lower than the sum of the internal winning probability of the push order bell for which the first stop operation is the correct answer and the internal winning probability of the push order bell for which the first stop operation to the right is the correct answer.

Although the details will be described later, in this example, a stop operation (forward push or forward sandwich) in which the first stop operation is to the left in the normal state is recommended, and in a game in which the push order bell in the normal state is internally won, if a stop operation other than the first stop operation to the left (specifically, the first stop operation to the right during the first stop operation) is performed, a penalty is given. Here, the penalty is specifically a penalty related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state, and in this example, it is a penalty that the AT lottery to determine whether or not to transition from the normal state to the AT state is not performed in the game. Of course, the content of the penalty is not limited to this, and any penalty related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state may be used. For example, in a game in which the number of games in the normal state after the AT state has ended reaches a predetermined threshold (hereinafter referred to as the ceiling game number), a penalty of not counting the number of games in the normal state may be adopted. Also, there may be cases where a stock lottery is not conducted when a stock lottery is conducted according to an internal winning role during a premonition when the AT has already been decided (so-called the main premonition), or where an AT upgrade lottery is conducted during a main premonition to transition to a better AT according to an internal winning role, and penalties are also considered that suppress or do not execute preferential processing.

Figure 84 shows the six game states described above, with the transition conditions for these states written on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

The normal stage is the initial state after the setting is changed. If condition A is met in the normal stage (more specifically, if you win a role other than a miss in the normal stage of the non-favorable zone, which is the initial state, and move to the favorable zone, and then win the CZ transition lottery based on winning a rare role in the normal stage of the favorable zone), you will move to CZ1. CZ1 is a finite-period game state with a fixed number of games. If condition C is met in CZ1 (more specifically, if you win the CZ2 lottery in CZ1, which determines whether to move to CZ2), you will move to CZ2, and if condition B is met in CZ1 (more specifically, if you do not win the CZ2 lottery in CZ1), you will move to the normal stage.

CZ2 is a finite-period game state with a fixed number of games. If condition D is met in CZ2 (more specifically, if the AT lottery that determines whether or not to transition to the AT state is won in CZ2), the game transitions to the added-on zone, and if condition E is met in CZ2 (more specifically, if the AT lottery is not won in CZ2), the game transitions to the normal stage.

The add-on zone is a state in which an add-on lottery is executed to add to the number of plays (number of games) in the AT state. In other words, in the AT state, play can be performed for a number of plays equal to the initial number of AT games granted immediately after winning the AT lottery plus the number of AT games granted in the add-on zone. The add-on zone is a play state for a finite period in which the number of games is fixed. If condition F is met in the add-on zone (more specifically, if the add-on zone ends due to the number of games being consumed), the AT transitions to the normal AT state. Note that the number of AT games may not be granted immediately after winning the AT lottery, and the initial number of AT games may be determined in the add-on zone.

If condition I is met in the normal AT state (more specifically, when all the games in the granted AT state have been played), the game will move to CZ2, and if condition G is met in the normal AT state (more specifically, when the player wins the add-on zone transition lottery that determines whether or not to move to the add-on zone), the game will move to the add-on zone. The add-on zone transition lottery is a lottery based on the winning combination in the internal lottery for winning combinations.

In addition, if condition H is met in the normal AT state (more specifically, if the ending transition condition is met), the state transitions to the ending state. Here, the ending transition condition is met when (1) the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone falls below a specified number of games (e.g., 300 games), (2) the difference in number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds a specified difference in number of coins (e.g., 2,000 coins), or (3) the number of added games when transitioning from the added zone to the normal AT state exceeds a specified number of games (e.g., 2,500 games).

The ending state is the final state of the AT state (advantageous zone). When condition J is satisfied in the ending state (more specifically, when the advantageous zone end condition is satisfied), the system transitions to CZ2. When the advantageous zone end condition is satisfied, (1) the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of 3000 games, or (2) the number of difference sheets in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit of 2400 sheets (note that since the upper limit of the difference sheet number is 2400 sheets, it is possible for the advantageous zone to end beyond 2400 sheets, taking into account the negative amount up to the AT mode). When the ending state ends and transitions to CZ2, the system transitions from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone. That is, the CZ2 state after the ending state ends becomes the CZ2 state of the non-advantageous zone, but in this example, the system is configured to transition to the advantageous zone immediately (for example, after several games are played). For example, there are cases where the zone is CZ2 in terms of presentation but is internally a non-advantageous zone. In addition, when transitioning to CZ2, it may be possible to specify whether the zone is a non-advantageous zone or an advantageous zone in terms of presentation. For example, in the non-advantageous zone after condition J is met, a screen such as "CZ2 preparation in progress" may be displayed, and the CZ2 presentation may be executed once the transition to the advantageous zone has been determined. In this way, the advantageous zone may be reset at the timing of the transition to CZ2, making it possible to transition to the AT state again, thereby increasing the interest in playing on a gaming machine with an advantageous zone.

In this example, if condition I is met in the normal AT state and there is a transition to CZ2, the zone remains favorable. However, even in this case, there may be a transition from the favorable zone to a non-favorable zone. Also, even if the zone is CZ2 in terms of presentation, if it is a non-favorable zone internally, condition D will not be met, but condition D can be met if it is CZ2 and a favorable zone.

In this example, when the AT state (AT normal state, ending state) ends, it transitions to CZ2, and when the AT lottery is won in CZ2, it transitions to the AT state again. In other words, it has a consecutive win feature that repeats the AT state via CZ2. In this example, the AT state when transitioning to the AT state via the normal mode (normal stage, CZ1) is called the AT state of the first win (first time, first set). In addition, transitioning to the AT state again via CZ2 transitioned from the AT state is called consecutive win, and such an AT state is called the AT state of the Nth consecutive win (Nth time, Nth set; N is an integer of 2 or more).
<Reel stop control>
Next, an overview will be given of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112. The stop control of the reels is performed by selecting one of a plurality of predetermined types of reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the internal winning process of the above-mentioned winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data.

In this example, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. Pull-in control refers to control that shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 by a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; up to 4 frames in this case) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Reel stop data is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data is broadly divided into permissive control, which allows the symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed all together on the winning line 114, and prohibitive control, which prevents any symbol combination of a winning combination from being displayed all together on the winning line 114.

Examples of tolerance control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when BB is being internally won (flag is carried over), and control is performed so that the winning combination of symbols is displayed within the range of the number of frames mentioned above even if the timing of the player's operation of each stop button 137-139 is poor. However, since this is only "tolerated," there are cases where the symbol combination is not displayed depending on the timing of the operation of each stop button 137-139.

For example, if the internal win is a watermelon, the watermelon symbol will be arranged in more than four frames, so unless the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is optimal, the watermelon symbol will not stop on the winning line 114.

The above-mentioned pull-in control is a stop control executed in the reel stop control process (step S108 in FIG. 85 described later) of a normal game (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the main game), and is not limited to this pull-in control in a pseudo game that is different from the main game. That is, in a pseudo game, the above-mentioned pull-in control may or may not be executed. For example, a predetermined pattern may be stopped beyond the pull-in range, or may be stopped with a reel action. To explain the playability of a pseudo game, a pseudo game is a game that is executed before the start of reel rotation in a main game when a predetermined condition is met (hereinafter, also referred to as a case where a pseudo game execution condition is met). In a pseudo game, all reels 110 to 112 start rotating by operating the start lever, and each of the corresponding reels 110 to 112 stops by a stop operation. Depending on the stop mode of the reels 110 to 112 in a pseudo game, it may be possible to increase the player's expectations prior to the main game.

<Slot machine operation>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Note that Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In these initial settings, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, the sensor circuit 320 detects whether an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130-132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141 has been performed, and if an insertion operation has been performed, the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the number of medals inserted. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is performed based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320 as to whether the start lever 135 has been operated when the specified number (three medals) of medals have been used, and if it is determined that the start lever has been operated, the number of medals inserted and the valid winning lines are confirmed, and the game begins. In addition, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, an internal lottery process for winning roles is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning roles, a winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT game state), and an internal lottery (lottery for roles) is performed using this and a random number value obtained from the random number generating circuit 316 to determine the internal winning role. If any internal winning role is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device (flag) for the internal winning role is activated (the flag for that internal winning role is turned ON). In addition, in this step S105, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal lottery for winning roles to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and if the result of the internal lottery for winning roles is a loss (non-winning of a winning role), preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

The internal winning command includes information on the internal winning role, as well as information that can identify the result of the AT lottery. Among the above information, the internal winning command, which includes an internal win on the push order bell in the AT state, also includes operation instruction information that indicates the operation sequence (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S104, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set to ON. If the pseudo game flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S106. The pseudo game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a pseudo game is to be executed. When the pseudo game flag is ON, this means that the pseudo game execution conditions described above are met, and a pseudo game is executed in the game.

In step S105, pseudo-game related processing (described in detail below) is executed.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the internal winning combination lottery in step S105. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In step S107, a reel spin start process is executed based on the start operation, which starts the spinning of all reels 110 to 112. Details of the reel spin start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

In step S108, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is referenced in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop data. If all of the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 1 command, for the second stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button acceptance 3 command), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, a reel stop 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a reel stop 3 command).

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is performed for the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137-139, and if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon win has occurred. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to send a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if any winning combination that results in a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out. Also, in step S110, preparations are made to send a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to transition the game state (RT-type game state, AT-type game state). Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to send a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

This completes one game. The game then progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 92) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Pseudo-game related processing>
Next, the pseudo game-related processing will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the pseudo game-related processing flow of step S105 in FIG. 85 in detail. The pseudo game is a type of reel performance in which the rotating reel is made to look as if it has stopped as a performance (also called pseudo stop), and refers to the fact that the rotating reel can be pseudo-stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139, or the situation in which the pseudo stop can be performed. In addition, in such a pseudo game, the game value is not awarded according to the pseudo-stopped stop mode. Furthermore, the pseudo operation for restarting the pseudo-stopped reel is also called a pseudo start operation. And, in order to distinguish from such a pseudo game, the game in which the rotating reel is stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the game value can be awarded according to the stop mode is also called the main game.

In step S1001, reel stop data for a pseudo game is selected. For example, reel stop data in which a predetermined pattern aligns with the winning line L1 and stops pseudo-stop may be selected. Note that reel stop data in which any pattern combination stops can be used as long as the pattern combination is different from the winning combination achieved in the actual game. Also, multiple types of such reel stop data may be prepared and the user may select from among the multiple types.

In step S1002, the pseudo-game reel spin start process (described in detail below) is executed.

In step S1003, the pseudo game reel stop control process (described in detail below) is executed.

In step S1004, the pseudo next game start process (described in detail below) is executed.

In step S1005, the random delay flag is set to ON. The random delay flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a random delay is to be performed. If the random delay flag is ON, random delay reel spin start processing is performed, and if the random delay flag is OFF, normal reel spin start processing is performed.

In step S1006, the pseudo-game flag is set to off.

<Reel Spin Start Processing for Simulated Game>
Next, the reel spin start process of the pseudo game will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start process of the pseudo game in step S1002 of Fig. 86.

In step S1101, the acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1102, preparations are made to send a pseudo-game start command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1103, the start of rotation of the pseudo game is set. Specifically, the rotation of reels 110 to 112 is started using the acceleration parameters set in step S1101.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the rotation speed of reels 110 to 112 is constant. If the rotation speed of reels 110 to 112 is constant, the process proceeds to step S1105; if not, step S1104 is repeated.

In step S1105, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The enablement here refers to the enablement of the stop operation in the simulated game, meaning that the player is now able to perform a simulated stop.

<Reel stop control process for pseudo game>
Next, the reel stop control process of the pseudo game will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Fig. 88 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in step S1003 of Fig. 86.

In step S1201, a pseudo-game restriction timer is set. The pseudo-game restriction timer is a timer that measures the time of one pseudo-game. In this example, the pseudo-game restriction timer is used to limit the execution time of one pseudo-game to a predetermined time TA (specifically, about 50 seconds). In step S1201, a timer value equivalent to the predetermined time TA is set as the initial value in the pseudo-game restriction timer. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 of FIG. 92) of the main control unit 300 is executed.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been operated. If any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1203; if not, the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1203, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that were operated to stop are pseudo-stopped.

In step S1204, preparations are made to send a sub-command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an operation on the stop button has been accepted.

In step S1205, it is determined whether all reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped. If all reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped, the process proceeds to step S1208; if not, the process returns to step S1202.

On the other hand, in step S1206, it is determined whether the pseudo-game restriction timer has timed out, that is, whether a predetermined time TA corresponding to the set timer value has elapsed. If the pseudo-game restriction timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1207; if not, the process returns to step 1202.

In step S1207, since the predetermined time TA has elapsed without any operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139, all reels 110-112 are pseudo-stopped. In this way, in order to promote the progress of the pseudo game in this example, the pseudo game has a function of automatically pseudo-stopping the reels 110-112 if no stop operation is performed.

In step S1208, preparations are made to send a sub-command for pseudo game winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a pattern corresponding to a certain role is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, a command corresponding to the pseudo-stopped pattern is sent. This enables the first sub-control unit 400 to perform control according to the sub-command for pseudo game winning determination, and for example, when a pattern corresponding to a replay or bell is pseudo-stopped, a corresponding performance can be executed.

This type of processing is necessary in pseudo-games when a stop operation is required at an appropriate operation timing, and by notifying the first sub-control unit 400 of the appearance of the pseudo-stopped pattern, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the pseudo-stopped pattern, which allows for more consistency in the effect than a configuration that performs an effect as if the pattern is pseudo-stopped even when it is not, and allows the game to be provided with a similar feeling to the actual game.

In step S1209, a pseudo-game end timer is set. The pseudo-game end timer is a timer that measures the time interval between the pseudo-game and the actual game, and is provided to ensure time to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that the pseudo-game has ended, an effect that the actual game is about to start, etc.). In this example, the time interval between the pseudo-game and the actual game is set to a predetermined time TC (specifically, about 1 second), so in step S1209, a timer value equivalent to the predetermined time TC is set as the initial value in the pseudo-game end timer. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 of FIG. 92) of the main control unit 300 is executed. In addition, in step S1209, preparations are made to send a pseudo-game end command indicating that the pseudo-game has ended to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Pseudo next game start process>
Next, the pseudo-next game start process will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo-next game start process in step S1004 in Fig. 86.

In this example, after the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in FIG. 88, the game does not immediately proceed to the actual game, but instead performs the process of inserting a coin and accepting a start operation in step S102 in a pseudo manner. This allows the player to experience a pseudo game that is closer to the actual game. Therefore, the pseudo game in this example includes the start of this pseudo next game in a broad sense.

In step S1301, preparations are made to send a pseudo-next game start command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the pseudo-next game start process has started.

In step S1302, an MB timer is set. The MB timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo bet operation can be accepted, and is set to a timer value equivalent to 20 seconds, for example, as the initial value. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 (timer update process of step S205 in FIG. 92) is executed. In this example, the MB timer is used to limit the time during which a single pseudo bet operation can be accepted, ensuring that the game progresses smoothly.

In step S1303, it is determined whether the MAX BET button 132 has been operated by the player. If an operation is detected, the process proceeds to step S1305; if an operation is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether the MB timer has timed out. If it has not timed out, the process returns to step S1303. If it has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, preparations are made to send a pseudo bet acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that a pseudo bet operation has been accepted. Even if the MB timer expires, the pseudo bet acceptance command can be sent, allowing the first sub-control unit 400 to proceed with its presentation processing.

From step S1306 onwards, processing related to the pseudo start operation of the start lever 135 is executed. In step S1306, preparations are made to send a pseudo lever reception wait start command to the first sub-control unit 400, which indicates that waiting for the pseudo start operation has begun.

In step S1307, an SR timer is set. The SR timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo start operation can be accepted, and is set to a timer value equivalent to 20 seconds, for example, as its initial value. This timer value is decremented each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 (timer update process of step S205 in FIG. 92) is executed. In this example, the SR timer is used to limit the time during which a single pseudo start operation can be accepted, ensuring smooth gameplay.

In step S1308, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated by the player. If operation is detected, the process ends. If operation is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1309, where it is determined whether the SR timer has timed out. If it has not timed out, the process returns to step S1308, and if it has timed out, the process ends.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, the reel spin start process will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the reel spin start process in step S107 in Fig. 85.

In step S1401, a wait timer of 4.1 seconds is set. This timer is used to ensure that the interval between games is at least 4.1 seconds, and the game interval is limited to at least 4.1 seconds regardless of whether or not a pseudo game is being played. This allows the feeling of game progress to match that of a game that is played only in the main game.

In step S1402, the acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1403, preparations are made to send the game start command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1404, the 7-segment setting process is executed. In this process, display settings related to the operation navigation are made.

In step S1405, it is determined whether the random delay flag is set to on. If the random delay flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S1407; if not, the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the acceleration parameters set in step S1402 are used to start the rotation of reels 110 to 112. Meanwhile, in step S1407, a random delayed rotation start process (described in detail below) is executed.

In step S1408, it is determined whether the rotation speed of reels 110 to 112 is constant. If the rotation speed of reels 110 to 112 is constant, the process proceeds to step S1409; if not, step S1408 is repeated.

In step S1409, operation of stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled.

<Random delay rotation start process>
Next, the random delay rotation start process will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a flow chart showing in detail the flow of the random delay rotation start process in step S1407 in Fig. 90.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time TC has elapsed based on the measurement of the pseudo game end timer. If the predetermined time TC has elapsed based on the measurement of the pseudo game end timer, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if not, step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the left reel 110 starts to spin, and in step S1503, it is determined whether the acceleration of the left reel 110 has ended. If the acceleration of the left reel 110 has ended, the process proceeds to step S1504, and if not, step S1503 is repeated.

In step S1504, a rotation start timer for the center reel 111 is set. Specifically, a timer value equivalent to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer for the center reel 111 is decremented each time the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 of FIG. 92) is executed.

In step S1505, it is determined whether the rotation start timer for the center reel 111 has timed out, i.e., whether the waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer for the center reel 111 has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1506; if not, step S1505 is repeated.

In step S1506, the center reel 111 starts to rotate. Note that, although the center reel 111 starts to rotate in step S1506, the center reel 111 is in a pseudo-stop state until it starts to rotate.

In step S1507, it is determined whether the acceleration of the center reel 111 has ended. If the acceleration of the center reel 111 has ended, the process proceeds to step S1508; if not, the process repeats step S1507.

In step S1508, a rotation start timer for the right reel 112 is set. Specifically, a timer value equivalent to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer for the right reel 112 is decremented each time the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 of FIG. 92) is executed.

In step S1509, it is determined whether the spin start timer for the right reel 112 has timed out, i.e., whether the waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the spin start timer for the right reel 112 has timed out, the process proceeds to step S1510; if not, step S1509 is repeated.

In step S1510, the right reel 112 starts to spin. Note that, although the right reel 112 starts to spin in step S1510, the right reel 112 is in a pseudo-stop state until it starts to spin.

In step S1511, the random delay flag is set to off.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 92. Note that Fig. 92 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, approximately once every 2 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this example, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S203, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the detection signals are stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is executed.

In step S205, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S203 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 85.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 85.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 93. Note that Figure 93 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 93 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 93 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, we will explain the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 using Figure 93 (a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S304, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S305, a performance control process is performed. Here, preparation for the performance is performed according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 contains a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S309, an information output process is performed to set up sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 contains a command to send to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 93(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 93(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this example), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S501, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 93(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S502, the command set in step S309 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 94. Note that Figure 94 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 94 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 94 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 94 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 94(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings, the memory area in the RAM 508, the memory area in the VRAM 518, etc. are initialized.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 identifies each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail below) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if the performance data read in step S605 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 94(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 94(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this example), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S801, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S802, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 94(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Simulated gaming effects>
Next, the effects of the pseudo game executed in the add-on zone will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a diagram showing the display modes of the reels 110 to 112 in the pseudo game and the effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in chronological order.

Figure 95(a) shows the display and effects of the reels 110-112 when the peach seven symbols are aligned on a predetermined effect line, and Figure 95(b) shows the display and effects of the reels 110-112 when the peach seven symbols are not aligned on a predetermined effect line. Here, the predetermined effect line specifically refers to any of the lines shown in Figure 80(a) including the upper horizontal effect line at symbol position 1, symbol position 4, and symbol position 7, the middle horizontal effect line at symbol position 2, symbol position 5, and symbol position 8, the lower horizontal effect line at symbol position 3, symbol position 6, and symbol position 9, the downward right effect line at symbol position 1, symbol position 5, and symbol position 9, and the upward right effect line at symbol position 3, symbol position 5, and symbol position 7.

In the pseudo game shown in FIG. 95(a), the slot machine 100 first starts to rotate the reels 110-112 based on the start lever operation, and starts to execute the "Aim" effect using the liquid crystal display 157 to indicate that the player should aim for the peach seven symbol (see (a1) in FIG. 95(a)). The slot machine 100 then stops the peach seven symbol on the left reel 110 in the middle position based on the first stop operation on the left reel 110 (see (a2) in FIG. 95(a)), and then stops the peach seven symbol on the middle reel 110 in the middle position based on the second stop operation on the middle reel 111 (see (a3) in FIG. 95(a)). That is, (a2) and (a3) show the case where the player succeeds in the eye-pressing operation in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and is able to stop the peach seven symbol on the effect line, and the peach seven symbol is in tenpai. With the Peach Seven symbol in tenpai status in this way, the slot machine 100 then stops the Peach Seven symbol on the right reel 112 in the middle position based on the third stop operation on the right reel 112 (see (a4) in FIG. 95(a)), and executes an emphasis effect using the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the Peach Seven symbols have lined up on the effect line (see (a5) in FIG. 95(a). For example, a large Peach Seven symbol is displayed across the entire screen to emphasize that the Peach Seven symbols have lined up). Note that when the Peach Seven symbols line up on a specified effect line, a special bonus of a specified number of additional games (for example, 30 games) is awarded.

In more detail, in this example, when the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai on a specific performance line, not only if the player's third stop operation is successful (if the Peach Seven symbol can be stopped within the reel-in range), but also if the player's third stop operation is unsuccessful (if the Peach Seven symbol cannot be stopped within the reel-in range), the slot machine 100 executes a reel performance that executes special reel control to stop the Peach Seven symbol on the performance line on which the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai (hereinafter referred to as the tenpai line). For example, special reel control may be executed to stop the third stopped reel on the tenpai line with a reel action based on the third stop operation, or special reel control may be executed to spin the third stopped reel at high speed and stop it on the tenpai line based on the third stop operation.

On the other hand, in the pseudo game shown in FIG. 95(b), the slot machine 100 first starts the rotation of the reels 110-112 based on the operation of the start lever of the pseudo game, and starts executing the "Aim" effect using the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the player should aim for the peach seven symbol (see (b1) in FIG. 95(b)). Next, the slot machine 100 stops the peach seven symbol on the left reel 110 in the middle position based on the first stop operation for the left reel 110 (see (b2) in FIG. 95(b)), and then stops the watermelon 1 symbol on the middle reel 111 in the middle position based on the second stop operation for the middle reel 111 (see (b3) in FIG. 95(b)). That is, (b2) and (b3) show the case where the player succeeded in the eye-pressing operation in the first stop operation, but failed in the eye-pressing operation in the second stop operation, and was unable to place the peach seven symbol on the effect line. In this manner, when the Peach Seven symbol is not in tenpai status, the slot machine 100 stops the watermelon 1 symbol on the right reel 112 in the middle position based on the third stopping operation on the right reel 112 (see (b4) in Figure 95(b)), and executes a failure effect using the liquid crystal display device 157 to indicate that the Peach Seven symbol did not line up on the effect line (see (b5) in Figure 95(b); for example, an image with the entire screen black is displayed).

In more detail, in this example, if the Peach Seven symbol is not in tenpai on the specified performance line, the special reel control described above will not be executed regardless of the content of the third stop operation performed by the player.

In this way, in the simulated game of this example, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute special reel control to align the Peach Seven symbol on the performance line based on the contents of the first and second stop operations, i.e., the display state (outcome) of the reels 110 to 112 up to the second stop operation. If the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai status, special reel control is executed to align the Peach Seven symbol on the performance line regardless of the contents of the third stop operation, whereas if not, special reel control is not executed and the Peach Seven symbol is controlled not to align on the performance line. This allows for consistency between the outcome and the performance, and a reel performance with a good-looking display state of the reels 110 to 112 can be executed.

Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control process of the pseudo game shown in Figure 95. Figure 96 is a flowchart showing in detail step S1203 of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in Figure 88, and the process shown in this flowchart is performed each time a pseudo stop operation is performed. Note that Figure 96 shows a case where, when the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai, special reel control is executed in which the third stopped reel is rotated at four times the normal speed to align the Peach Seven symbol on one of the performance lines.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the reel that has been stopped is a reel that spins at high speed. As described above, the reel that has the potential to spin at high speed is the third stopped reel, so if the reel that has been stopped is the first or second stopped reel, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the reel that has been stopped is the third stopped reel, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113 of the stopped reel. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the peach seven symbol is positioned in the number 2 position on each of the reels 110 to 112, so when a peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113, it means that any one of the symbols number 1 to 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle position on the reel window 113. If a peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113, the process proceeds to step S2004; if not, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In this example, the number of the symbol that stops and is displayed in the middle position of the reel window 113 is referred to as the stop position of the reel. In this example, the numbers 0 to 19 of each reel correspond to a 1-byte value; for example, symbol number 1 is "00000001" in 1-byte value, and symbol number 3 is "00000011". In this example, when two peach seven symbols are displayed in the reel window 113 by the first stop operation and the second stop operation, reel control that does not allow the peach seven symbols to be in tenpai (for example, reel control that stops the peach seven symbol in the lower position on the left reel 110 and stops the peach seven symbol in the upper position on the center reel 111) is not performed.

In step S2003, the stop position after high-speed rotation is set to 128. Here, the stop position after high-speed rotation means the stop position of the third stop reel when the third stop reel is rotated at high speed (the number of the symbol that stops at the middle position of the reel window 113). As shown in FIG. 82, the symbol number is composed of numbers 0 to 19, so the number 128 is the number of a symbol that does not actually exist. In other words, in the first stop operation or the second stop operation, if the peach seven symbol is not displayed on the reel window 113, 128 is set to the stop position after high-speed rotation, and although it would normally be sufficient to refer to whether it is within 0 to 19, a value that is deliberately set far beyond 19 is set to improve the efficiency of the control process. More specifically, since the stop position after high-speed rotation is composed of a 1-byte variable, 128 is set to the stop position after high-speed rotation by setting the seventh bit to 1 (bit string "10000000"). This results in a process in which high-speed rotation processing is not executed in S2006, which will be described later. The stopping position after high-speed rotation is initialized based on the operation of the start lever 135.

In step S2004, it is determined whether the stop position of the reel that has been stopped (the number of the symbol that stops in the middle position of the reel window 113) is the stop position after high-speed spinning. Note that since the stop position after high-speed spinning is initialized based on the operation of the start lever 135, the stop position after high-speed spinning in step S2004 for the first stop operation is "00000000". If the stop position of the reel that has been stopped is the stop position after high-speed spinning, the process ends, and if the stop position of the reel that has been stopped is not the stop position after high-speed spinning, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, an exclusive OR (XOR) is calculated between the stop position after high-speed spin in step S2004 and the stop position of the reel that was stopped, and the calculated value is set as the new stop position after high-speed spin. Note that if the process proceeds to step S2005 via step S2003, the seventh bit of the stop position after high-speed spin remains set to 1 even if an exclusive OR (XOR) is calculated. In other words, if the Peach Seven symbol is not displayed as stopped on the reel window 113 in the first or second stop operation, the seventh bit of the stop position after high-speed spin is set to 1.

For example, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 110 and the Peach Seven symbol is the middle stopped symbol, step S2001: NO, step S2002: YES, step S2004: NO (the middle stopped symbol is number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010), and the stopping position after high speed rotation is the initial value, number 0 (1 byte value: 00000000)), and in step S2005, the exclusive OR of the 1 byte value: 00000000 and the 1 byte value: 00000010 is calculated, and the stopping position after high speed rotation is number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010).

Next, the second stopped reel is set to middle reel 111, and if the Peach Seven symbol is the middle stopping symbol, step S2001: NO, step S2002: YES, step S2004: YES (middle stopping symbol number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010), the stopping position after high speed rotation is number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010)), and processing ends. In other words, if the second stopping operation is performed and the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai horizontally, step S2004 ends processing with YES, so the stopping position after high speed rotation remains number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010). In addition, if the Peach Seven symbol stops in the upper or lower row in the first stopping operation, and the Peach Seven symbol stops in the middle row in the second stopping operation, and the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai diagonally, step S2004 will be NO, and an exclusive OR operation will be performed for each stopping operation to determine the stop position after high-speed spinning, and the final stop position after high-speed spinning will be determined.

On the other hand, for example, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 110 and the peach seven symbol is not displayed stopped on the reel window 113, the process proceeds to step S2001: NO, step S2002: NO, and in step S2003, the stopping position after high speed spinning will be number 128 (the seventh bit is set to 1), so the process proceeds to step S2004: NO, and in step S2005, the stopping position after high speed spinning will be number 128 (the seventh bit is set to 1).

Next, if the second stopped reel is set to center reel 111 and the Peach Seven symbol is not displayed stopped on the reel window 113, the process proceeds to step S2001: NO, step S2002: NO, and in step S2003, the stopping position after high-speed spinning will be number 128, so the process proceeds to step S2004: NO, and in step S2005, the stopping position after high-speed spinning will be number 128 or higher (the seventh bit is set to 1). In other words, if the second stopping operation is performed and the Peach Seven symbol is not in tenpai, the seventh bit of the stopping position after high-speed spinning will remain set to 1.

If the reel on which the stopping operation was performed in step S2001 is the third stopped reel (step S2001: YES), step S2006 determines whether the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai or not. Specifically, if the Peach Seven symbol is not in tenpai, the seventh bit of the stop position after the high-speed rotation is set to 1, so it is determined whether the seventh bit of the stop position after the high-speed rotation is 1 or not. If the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai, that is, if the seventh bit of the stop position after the high-speed rotation is not set to 1 (step S2006: NO), proceed to step S2007, and if the Peach Seven symbol is not in tenpai, that is, if the seventh bit of the stop position after the high-speed rotation is set to 1 (step S2006: YES), end the process.

In step S2007, since the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai on a predetermined horizontal performance line, the speed of the third stopped reel is set to high speed rotation (4x), and then in step S2008, the stop position after high speed rotation is set to the stop position of the third stopped reel. For example, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 110 and the Peach Seven symbol is the middle stop symbol, and the second stopped reel is the middle reel 111 and the Peach Seven symbol is the middle stop symbol, the stop position after high speed rotation will be number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010), so the right reel 112 is spun at high speed to stop the Peach Seven symbol in the middle position of the reel window 113.

In this way, the stopping position after high speed spinning is compared with the symbols stopped by the first and second stop operations (step S2004) and an exclusive OR is calculated (step S2005), and the stopping position after high speed spinning is sequentially maintained and updated to determine, thereby performing a reel action according to the stopping mode.

Note that in Figures 95 and 96, when the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai, a reel action (high-speed spin) is performed based on the third stop operation, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the Peach Seven symbol is in tenpai, a wait process may be performed based on the third stop operation, a tenpai voice may be output to indicate that the reel is in tenpai, the reel backlight may be illuminated, the side lamp 144 may be illuminated, or the third stop operation may be frozen.

<Continuous performance>
Next, the continuous performance executed in CZ2 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the transition of the continuous performance in a chronological order. This continuous performance is a performance executed over four games, and is configured to notify information indicating whether or not it is possible to transition to the AT state (more specifically, the added zone) in the final game (fourth game). For example, the continuous performance may be configured as an image performance using a liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 97, and may be a performance in which a lord and a samurai face off against each other. In this case, when the lord wins this battle, the word "victory" is displayed, and the next game will transition to the AT state (more specifically, the added zone).

In this example of the continuous effects, if a penalty occurs in one game of the continuous effects, the effect (part of the continuous effects) that was executed in the game in which the penalty occurred will be executed again in the next game. As described above, the penalty in this example occurs when a stop operation other than sequential push/sequential push (first stop left) is performed in a game in which the push order bell is won in the normal state.

In this example, in the case where a stop operation other than the forward push/forward sandwich (first stop left) is performed in a normal game, a recommended operation notification is executed to notify the player of a recommended operation. The recommended operation notification is an image presentation using the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, as shown in FIG. 97, an image (hereinafter also referred to as a left push recommendation display) d1 displaying a wording indicating a recommended operation such as "left push recommended" in a rectangular area may be displayed superimposed on the image of the continuous performance. In this case, the image of the continuous performance is displayed behind the left push recommendation display d1, so that part of the image of the continuous performance is difficult to see. In other words, in a game in which a penalty occurs, the left push recommendation display d1 covers part of the image of the continuous performance, so that part of the image of the continuous performance is difficult to see, but part of this continuous performance is executed again in the next game, so that the player can grasp the content of the performance (part of the continuous performance) executed in the game in which the penalty occurs.

Figure 97(a) shows the progression of consecutive effects when an internal win occurs on the push order bell in the third game of the consecutive effects (the N+2nd game in Figure 97(a)) and a stop operation is performed to the right of the first stop, resulting in a penalty occurring in the third game of the consecutive effects.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(a), because the first stop right stop operation was performed in the third game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and because a penalty occurred in the third game of the continuous performance, performance 3, which is the performance for the third game of the continuous performance, is executed again in the next game, the fourth game of the continuous performance (the N+3 game in FIG. 97(a)). As a result, the continuous performance continues for five games, and the result of the AT lottery is notified in the fifth game (the N+4 game in FIG. 97(a)).

Figure 97(b) shows the progression of consecutive effects when an internal win occurs on a miss in the first game of the consecutive effects (the Nth game in Figure 97(b)) and a stop operation is performed to the right of the first stop, and when an internal win occurs on the push order bell in the third game of the consecutive effects (the N+2th game in Figure 97(b)) and a stop operation is performed to the right of the first stop, resulting in a penalty in the third game of the consecutive effects.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(b), since the first stop right stop operation was performed in the first game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the first game of the continuous performance. Since no penalty occurred in the first game of the continuous performance, the performance is not executed again in the next game. Furthermore, since the first stop right stop operation was performed in the third game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and since a penalty occurred in the third game of the continuous performance, performance 3, which is the performance of the third game of the continuous performance, is executed again in the next game, the fourth game of the continuous performance (the N+3 game in FIG. 97(a)). As a result, the continuous performance continues for five games, and the result of the AT lottery is notified in the fifth game (the N+4 game in FIG. 97(b)).

Figure 97(c) shows the progression of consecutive effects when an internal win occurs on the push order bell and a stop operation is performed to the right of the first stop in the second game (game N+1 in Figure 97(c)) and third game (game N+2 in Figure 97(c)) of the consecutive effects, resulting in a penalty in the second and third games of the consecutive effects.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(c), since the first stop right stop operation was performed in the second game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the second game of the continuous performance, and since a penalty occurred in the second game of the continuous performance, performance 2, which is the performance of the second game of the continuous performance, is executed again in the next game, the third game of the continuous performance. Next, since the first stop right stop operation was performed in the third game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and since a penalty occurred in the third game of the continuous performance, performance 2, which is the performance of the second game of the continuous performance, is executed again in the next game, the fourth game of the continuous performance. As a result, the continuous performance continues for six games, and the result of the AT lottery is notified in the sixth game (the N+5th game in FIG. 97(c)).

Conventionally, when a continuous performance is executed, the counter MC of the main control unit 300, which manages the number of games in the continuous performance, and the counter SC of the first sub-control unit 400, which manages the performance of the continuous performance, may have a risk of the counter value of the counter MC and the counter value of the counter SC becoming misaligned when a penalty occurs (for example, when a penalty occurs, the counter value is not updated in the counter MC, but is updated in the counter SC), and there was a risk of a misalignment occurring between the game progress and the performance progress (for example, the AT state is started, but the performance of the AT state is not started). Figure 106 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a misalignment occurs between the game progress and the performance progress. Figure 106(a) is a diagram showing the progression of the continuous performance when no penalty is performed, and Figure 106(b) is a diagram showing the progression of the continuous performance when a penalty is performed. As shown in Figure 106(b), a problem occurs in which a misalignment occurs between the game progress and the performance progress for the number of games for which a penalty is performed (for example, even if the push order bell is won in AT play, the operation navigation is not executed). Therefore, in this example, as described above, the effect that was executed in the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game, so that there is no discrepancy between the game progress and the effect progress.

In this example, the consecutive effects executed in CZ2 have been described, but the effect executed in the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game is not limited to CZ2. For example, it may be applied to the consecutive effects in CZ1. It may also be applied to the consecutive effects that notify whether or not to move to CZ1 in the normal stage.

Figure 98 is a time chart showing the progression of presentation in a game in which no penalty occurs. In detail, Figure 98(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between each operation in the Nth game and the N+1th game in Figure 97(b) and the presentation executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and Figure 98(b) is a diagram showing the presentation state of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each point in time in Figure 98(a).

The slot machine 100 starts to display an image of effect 1 on the liquid crystal display 157 based on the start lever operation of the Nth game (see time A1 of the start lever operation), and because the first stop operation of the Nth game was to the right, starts to display a left push recommendation display d1 on the liquid crystal display 157 based on the first stop operation (see time A2 of the first stop operation). At time A2, the image of effect 1 and the left push recommendation display d1 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 157.

Next, when the second and third stop operations of the Nth game are performed, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the NEXT display d2 in a position that does not overlap with the left push recommendation display d1 based on the third stop operation (see time A3 of the third stop operation). The NEXT display d2 is an image display that suggests development to the next game, and may be, for example, an image in which the word NEXT is displayed in a rectangular frame. At time A3, the image of the performance 1, the left push recommendation display d1, and the NEXT display d2 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157. Next, the slot machine 100 ends the left push recommendation display d1 at time A4 when a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from time A3. That is, in a game in which no penalty is generated, the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed from time A2 of the first stop operation to time A4 when a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from time A3 of the third stop operation, and the display ends regardless of the player's operation. At time A4, the image of performance 1 and the NEXT display d2 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the start lever is operated for the N+1th game, the slot machine 100 ends effect 1 and starts effect 2 based on the start lever operation for the N+1th game, and ends the NEXT display d2 (see time A5 of the start lever operation). In other words, the NEXT display d2 is displayed from time A3 of the third stop operation to time A5 of the start lever operation. At time A5, an image of effect 2 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 99 is a time chart showing the progression of presentation in a game in which a penalty has occurred. In detail, Figure 99(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between each operation in the N+2th game and the N+3th game in Figure 97(b) and the presentation executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and Figure 99(b) is a diagram showing the presentation state of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each point in time in Figure 99(a).

The slot machine 100 starts to display an image of effect 3 on the liquid crystal display 157 based on the start lever operation in the N+2th game (see time A1 of the start lever operation), and because the first stop operation in the N+2th game was to the right, starts to display a left push recommendation display d1 on the liquid crystal display 157 based on the first stop operation (see time A2 of the first stop operation). At time A2, the image of effect 3 and the left push recommendation display d1 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 157.

Next, when the second and third stop operations of the N+2th game are performed, the slot machine 100 starts to display the darkening display d3 as the background image of the left push recommendation display d1 based on the third stop operation (see time A3 of the third stop operation). The darkening display d3 is an image obtained by darkening the image of effect 3 that was displayed as the background of the left push recommendation display d1. This allows the player to understand that the game in question is one in which a penalty has been applied. At time A3, the left push recommendation display d1 and the darkening display d3 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the start lever is operated for the N+3 game, the slot machine 100 ends Presentation 3 based on the start lever operation for the N+3 game, restarts Presentation 3, ends the left push recommendation display d1, and ends the blackout display d3 (see time A4 of the start lever operation). That is, in a game in which a penalty has occurred, the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed from time A2 of the first stop operation to time A4 of the start lever operation, and the display is ended based on the player's operation. Also, the blackout display d3 is displayed from time A3 of the third stop operation to time A4 of the start lever operation. Note that in a game in which a penalty has occurred, the NEXT display d2 is not displayed. At time A4, an image of Presentation 3 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Thus, the display period for the left push recommendation indicator d1 differs between games in which no penalty occurs and games in which a penalty occurs, but it is designed to continue to be displayed from the first stop operation to at least the third stop operation. This is because if it was displayed only for a moment, it could be confused with the effect triggered by the stop operation.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 98, in a game in which no penalty occurs, the NEXT display d2 ends based on the start lever operation, but the NEXT display d2 may also end based on a bet operation. Also, as shown in FIG. 99, in a game in which a penalty occurs, the left push recommendation display d1 ends based on the start lever operation, or the blackout display d3 ends based on a bet operation, but the left push recommendation display d1 ends based on the blackout display d3.

<Penalty Play>
Next, the penalty game of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the above-mentioned continuous performance in a chronological order, and FIG. 100(b) is a diagram showing the transition of a performance that is not a continuous performance (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a non-continuous performance) in a chronological order. The penalty of this example occurs when a stop operation other than the first stop operation left (specifically, during the first stop operation, the first stop operation right) is performed in a game in which the push order bell is internally won in a normal game, but the re-execution of the performance process is a process that is performed during the performance execution and when a penalty occurs.

Figure 100(a) shows the progression of consecutive effects when an internal win occurs on the push order bell in the third game of the consecutive effects (the N+2nd game in Figure 100(a)) and a stop operation is performed to the right of the first stop, resulting in a penalty in the third game of the consecutive effects. This has been described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the non-sequential presentation shown in FIG. 100(b), an internal win occurred on the push order bell in the N+1th game of the non-sequential presentation, and a stop operation was performed to the right of the first stop, so a recommended operation notification was executed in the N+1th game of the non-sequential presentation, and a penalty occurred in the N+1st game of the non-sequential presentation. However, since a continuous presentation is not being executed, the presentation executed in the N+1st game will not be executed again in the N+2nd game of the non-sequential presentation in the next game.

In addition, in the non-sequential presentation shown in FIG. 100(b), an internal win for Cherry occurs in the N+3rd game of the non-sequential presentation, and the first stop operation to the right is performed, so a recommended operation notification is executed in the N+3rd game of the non-sequential presentation, but no penalty occurs. Similarly, an internal win for Replay occurs in the N+5th game of the non-sequential presentation, and the first stop operation to the right is performed, so a recommended operation notification is executed in the N+5th game of the non-sequential presentation, but no penalty occurs.

In this example, even if a penalty occurs while a non-sequential presentation is being executed, the presentation of the game in which the penalty occurred will not be re-executed in the next game. This is because when a non-sequential presentation is being executed, there is no need to synchronize game progress with presentation progress.

As shown in FIG. 100, the left push recommendation display d1 in this example is displayed in the same display mode (for example, a rectangular frame screen is displayed in the center of the screen superimposed on the performance image, and the words "Left push recommended" are displayed within the frame) regardless of the performance image displayed in the background (for example, whether the image displayed in the background is (A) an image from a series of performances in which a lord and a samurai face off, or (B) an image from a series of performances in which a lord and an old man are sitting opposite each other). This prevents the player from mistaking the left push recommendation display d1 for a type of anticipation-building effect.

In addition, in this example, if a penalty occurs during consecutive presentations, the consecutive presentation of the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game, but the case in which the presentation of the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game is not limited to this. For example, if a premonition state is provided to increase anticipation for the transition to the AT state, and a premonition presentation that increases anticipation for the transition to the AT state is executed in the premonition state, if a penalty occurs during this premonition presentation, the premonition presentation of the game in which the penalty occurred may be executed again in the next game.

In addition, in this example, if a penalty occurs during consecutive effects, the same effect as the effect in the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game, but it is not necessary to be limited to the same effect, and it is sufficient to execute processing related to the same effect again. For example, the same effect lottery processing may be executed as processing related to the same effect. This effect lottery processing employs a configuration in which one of multiple effects is determined by lottery processing and the determined effect is executed, so that in the next game, an effect different from the effect in the game in which the penalty occurred may be executed. For example, an effect including a chance-up pattern was executed in the game in which the penalty occurred, but in the next game, an effect not including a chance-up pattern may be executed. In this way, when a penalty occurs, the same effect processing may be executed in the next game.

In addition, special processing may be performed in the next game after the game in which a penalty occurred. This special processing includes performing rare role avoidance navigation in the next game (for example, performing push order navigation that does not result in a rare role even if a rare role is internally won), or not performing preferential processing (for example, not performing the AT addition lottery in a case where an AT addition lottery is performed in addition to the AT lottery if no penalty has occurred). By performing special processing, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering excessive disadvantages.

<Notification of recommended operation>
Next, the display form of the left push recommendation indication d1 will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the display form of the left push recommendation indication d1 on the liquid crystal display device 157.

Figure 101(a) is the same as Figure 80(c) and shows a case where an image is displayed using the entire liquid crystal display device 157. In this case, the visibility of the patterns on the reels 110 to 112 is reduced (they are hard to see). Figure 101(b) is the same as Figure 80(d) and shows a state in which the rules 110 to 112 are rotating, and the visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured in the inner area of the reel window 113. Note that an image of a continuous performance is displayed in the area above and outside the reel window 113.

Figure 101 (c1) shows a case where the dialogue d5 of the continuous performance is displayed in the upper outer area of the reel window 113 in the state of Figure 101 (b). Also, Figure 101 (c2) shows a case where the first stop operation is performed in the state of Figure 101 (c1) and a penalty occurs. Specifically, it shows a case where an internal win is made on the push order bell during the continuous performance and the first stop operation is performed, so that the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed in the game. As shown in Figures 101 (c1) and (c2), the left push recommendation display d1 is designed not to overlap the display area of the dialogue d5 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 and the display related to the game value (medals), the number of reserved coins display d6, the number of coins inserted display d7, and the number of coins paid out display d8.

Figure 101 (d) shows the display state of the liquid crystal display device when an error occurs in the slot machine 100. In this case, the image area of the error display d4 is the entire area outside the reel window 113, and the image area of the text portion of the error display d4 is at least partially overlapped with the image area of the left push recommendation display d1.

Fig. 101 (c3) shows a modified display mode of the left push recommendation display d1 shown in Fig. 101 (c2). The image area of the left push recommendation display d1 shown in Fig. 101 (c3) is the entire area outside the reel window 113. In this way, the left push recommendation display d1 may be displayed over the entire area outside the reel window 113. Note that instead of the words "Left push recommended", a "Caution" or an "!" mark or any other display that can identify that a non-recommended operation has been performed may be used, and the entire screen may be grayed out without displaying any words or marks.

<Operation when power outage or error occurs while executing recommended operation notification>
Figure 102(a) is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 when a power outage/restoration occurs while a recommended operation notification is being executed, and Figure 102(b) is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 when an error is detected while a recommended operation notification is being executed.

Figure 102 (a1) shows an example of a case where a power outage/restoration occurs while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed with the reels 110-112 stopped. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the running screen d11, then the demo screen d12, and then executes the presentation screen for the next game based on the start operation of the next game. Therefore, in this case, the left push recommendation display d1 will not be displayed again after power is restored. Note that a dedicated screen for when power is restored may be displayed instead of the demo screen d12.

Figure 102 (a2) shows an example of a case where a power outage/restoration occurs while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed while the reels 110-112 are spinning. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the startup screen d11, then displays the recovery screen d13, and then executes the presentation of the next game based on the start operation of the next game. Therefore, in this case, the left push recommendation display d1 will not be displayed again after power is restored.

Figure 102 (a3) shows another example of a case where power is interrupted and restored while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed while the reels 110-112 are spinning. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the running screen d11, then displays the presentation screen displayed at the time of the power interruption again, and then executes the presentation for the next game based on the start operation for the next game. Therefore, in this case, after power is restored, the presentation screen displayed at the time of the power interruption returns, but the left push recommendation display d1 is not displayed again.

Figure 102 (a4) shows another example of a case where power is interrupted/restored while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed while the reels 110-112 are spinning. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the running screen d11, then displays the presentation screen at the time of power interruption again and the left push recommendation display d1 again, and executes the presentation of the next game based on the start operation of the next game. Therefore, in this case, after power is restored, the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed again along with the presentation screen at the time of power interruption. Note that the left push recommendation display d1 after power is restored may end after a predetermined time T1 has elapsed after the third stop operation (if no penalty occurred in the game where power was interrupted, see Figure 98), or may end based on the start operation of the next game (if a penalty occurred in the game where power was interrupted, see Figure 99).

Figure 102 (b1) shows an example of a case where an error is detected while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed when the reels 110-112 of a game in which a penalty has occurred are stopped. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the error screen d14 when the error is detected, and then when the error is resolved, it displays again the presentation screen shown at the time of power outage and the left push recommendation display d1, and executes the presentation for the next game based on the start operation of the next game. The redisplayed left push recommendation display d1 ends based on the start operation of the next game. This is based on the fact that the left push recommendation display d1 displayed in a game in which a penalty has occurred ends when the start operation of the next game is performed, as explained in Figure 99.

Figure 102 (b2) shows an example of a case where an error is detected while the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed in a state where the reels 110 to 112 of a game in which a penalty has not occurred are stopped. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the error screen d14 when an error is detected, and then when the error is recovered, (a) if the error recovery is within a predetermined time T1 from the third stop operation, the display screen at the time of power failure is displayed again and the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed again, whereas (b) if the error recovery exceeds the predetermined time T1 from the third stop operation, only the display screen at the time of power failure is displayed again and the left push recommendation display d1 is not displayed again. This is based on the fact that the left push recommendation display d1 of a game in which a penalty has not occurred ends after the predetermined time T1 has elapsed from the third stop operation, as explained in Figure 98. Therefore, in the case of (a), the left push recommendation display d1 displayed again ends after the predetermined time T1 has elapsed from the third stop operation.

Recently, so-called medal-less (coin-less) slot machines have been envisaged, which do not use game media such as medals or game balls, but manage the amount of game value by electronically storable information. In medal-less slot machines, the amount of game value owned by the player is stored on a card that the player can carry, and the amount of game value owned by the player is transferred to the slot machine by inserting the card into a card unit connected to the slot machine, and the game can be played using the game value. When the game is stopped, the amount of game value stored in the slot machine can be stored on the card by transferring (counting) the amount of game value from the slot machine to the card unit. In this example, the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed even on a medal-less gaming machine, but even when the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed, the above-mentioned counting is possible, and even when the counting button for counting is pressed, a notification that the left push recommendation display d1 is being counted (counting in progress notification) is displayed or notified from the liquid crystal display 157 or various speakers. The display indicating that counting is in progress may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the left-push recommendation display d1, or the display indicating that counting is in progress may be preferentially displayed in a position that overlaps with the left-push recommendation display d1.

<Other ways to deal with penalties>
In this example, if a penalty occurs while a consecutive performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 103(a), the performance executed in the game in which the penalty occurred (performance 2 in FIG. 103(a)) is executed again in the next game, thereby preventing a discrepancy between the number of games played in the game and the performance progress. However, the method of dealing with a penalty occurring while a consecutive performance is being executed is not limited to this method.

For example, as shown in FIG. 103(b), if a presentation game number counter that manages the presentation progress is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, the method of updating this presentation game number counter may be modified. Note that, as a premise, the game number counter that manages the game progress does not update the counter value in a game in which a penalty has occurred.

In this case, in both games where no penalty occurs and games where a penalty occurs, the presentation game number counter is updated by incrementing (e.g., incrementing by 1) based on the start lever operation, while in games where a penalty occurs, a decrement update is performed to reset the counter (e.g., decrementing by 1) based on the third stop operation. This eliminates the discrepancy between the number of games played in the game where a penalty occurs and the presentation progress. Since increments and decrements are performed on the presentation game number counter in the game where a penalty occurs, the player can clearly understand that a penalty has occurred in that game.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 103(c), even if a penalty occurs, the consecutive presentation may be executed without delay to the end according to the story, and the final presentation (AT confirmation in FIG. 103(c)) may be executed again. In other words, even if the consecutive presentation ends, the final presentation of the consecutive presentation may be executed again for the number of games in which the penalty occurred, thereby eliminating the discrepancy between the number of games in the game progress and the presentation progress. Note that when an extra AT confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as the final presentation, a message such as "Waiting" may be displayed to let the player know that the presentation progress is being adjusted.

In addition, in the modified examples shown in Figures 103(b) and 103(c), the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed in a common manner, and the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed at least until the third stop operation. Similarly, in the modified examples shown in Figures 103(b) and 103(c), the left push recommendation display d1 is at least partially overlapped with the display regarding the error, but is not overlapped with the display regarding the game value.

<Display of number of coins acquired in AT state>
Next, the display of the number of medals acquired in the AT state will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104(a) shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first AT state. In the game shown in FIG. 104(a), the operation navigation image d21 is also displayed because the push order bell is internally won. In the AT state, as shown in FIG. 104(a), when the push order role is internally won, the AT screen d20 is displayed, which includes the operation navigation image d21, the AT set number display d22 showing the number of sets in the AT state, the remaining number of games d23 in the AT state, and the number of medals acquired in the AT state (acquired number) d24. The acquired number is the difference number, which is the sum of the number of medals paid out minus the number of medals inserted.

Figure 104 (b) shows the acquired number history screen d30 that is displayed when the PUSH button 192 is operated on the AT screen d20 shown in Figure 104 (a). Since the AT state shown in Figure 104 (a) is the first consecutive AT state, the acquired number history screen d30 displays an icon d31 indicating that it is the first consecutive AT state, as well as the current acquired number d32 in the first consecutive AT state. Since it is in the first consecutive AT state, the acquired number d24 and the acquired number d32 are the same value.

Figure 104 (c) shows the AT screen d20 in the third consecutive AT state. In addition to the AT count display d22, the number of remaining games d23, and the number of acquired coins d24, the AT screen d20 shown in Figure 104 (c) displays an explanatory image d25 showing how to transition to the acquired coin count history screen d30.

Figure 104 (d) shows the acquired number history screen d30 that is displayed when the PUSH button 192 is operated on the AT screen d20 shown in Figure 104 (c). Since the AT state shown in Figure 104 (c) is the third consecutive AT state, the acquired number history screen d30 displays icons d31A, d31B, and d31C indicating the first, second, and third consecutive AT states, respectively, and displays the acquired numbers d32A, d32B, and d32C acquired in the first, second, and third consecutive AT states, respectively. In this way, the acquired number history screen d30 allows you to check the number of acquired coins for each consecutive AT state.

Figure 104 (e) shows a modified example of the AT screen d20. As shown in Figure 104 (e), in addition to the display items of the AT screen d20 described above, an AT screen d20A may be provided which displays a total d25 of the number of coins won in all AT states. In the AT state of the second set or later, it is possible to grasp the number of coins won in the AT state of that set and the total number of coins won in the AT states of all sets. In other words, the number of coins won d24 and the total d25 may be displayed on the screen of one performance image display device.

In this example, a display indicating that the specified number has been reached (for example, a display indicating that the number of acquired coins has reached a specified number, such as "XXX coins OVER" every 250 coins) is displayed, but in the first consecutive AT state, this may be performed based on the value of the acquired number d24, and in the second consecutive AT state and thereafter, this may be performed based on the total value d25. This is to avoid displaying the same value for the specified number of coins reached every set, which may be annoying to the player. The display indicating that the specified number has been reached may also suggest a set value (for example, "displaying 456 coins, etc."). In this case, for example, in the first consecutive AT state, the set value may be suggested based on the value of the acquired number d24, and in the second consecutive AT state and thereafter, the set value may be suggested based on the total value d25.

Figure 104 (f) is a modified example of displaying the total value d25, similar to Figure 104 (e), but shows a case where the total value d25 is displayed using a display means other than the liquid crystal display device 157 (for example, a 7-segment display or liquid crystal display device provided on the top of the cabinet). When displaying the total value d25 using a different display means, (a) the total value d25 may be displayed only in the AT state and not in CZ2, or (b) the total value d25 may be displayed in both the AT state and CZ2. In addition, a display indicating that a specified number of coins has been reached may be performed using a different display means. In this case, it is preferable that the size of the numbers displayed on the different display means is larger than the size of the numbers displayed in the number of coins acquired d24 and the total value d25. In this way, by displaying the total value d25 using a different display means, the acquisition status of the game value can be appealed to those around you. Recently, gaming machines that do not use gaming media such as medals or gaming balls are also being considered. When gaming media were used, the status of the winning balls could be appealed to those around by placing the winning gaming media in a coin box, but this is not possible with gaming machines that do not use gaming media. However, by displaying the total value d25 using a different display means as in this example, even gaming machines that do not use gaming media can appeal to the public the status of the winning balls.

Figure 105 is a graph showing an example of the increase or decrease in the difference in number of coins when the AT state continues for a series of three consecutive wins. Figure 105 shows a case where the AT state continues for three consecutive wins. Note that Figure 105 shows a case where the difference in number of coins reaches the upper limit of the favorable zone of 2400 in the first AT state, the second AT state, and the third AT state, respectively, and therefore the AT state (favorable zone) ends and transitions to CZ2 occur.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 105, in the first AT state, the number of coins acquired from the start of the AT state to the end of the AT state is counted, and the counted number of coins acquired is displayed on the AT screen d20 as the number of coins acquired d24. As a result, in the first AT state, it is possible to display 2400 or more coins (for example, 3400 coins in FIG. 105) as the number of coins acquired d24. In contrast, in the second and subsequent AT states, the number of coins acquired from the start of CZ2 (CZ2 after the advantageous zone) to the end of the AT state is counted, and the counted number of coins acquired is displayed on the AT screen d20 as the number of coins acquired d24. The reason why the counting period for the number of coins acquired in the second and subsequent AT states is set to after the start of the AT state is that if the medals increase in CZ2, the advantageous zone will end before the display of the number of coins acquired d24 reaches 2400 coins, and this is to prevent dissatisfaction of the player that the number of coins acquired did not reach 2400 coins even though the advantageous zone has been completed.

Note that when the number of coins acquired d24 is displayed for the first time in the AT state, it only covers the number of coins acquired in the AT state, and does not include the number of coins acquired in CZ2. However, after the ending state, the number of coins acquired d24 may include the number of coins acquired in CZ2. For example, if the number of medals acquired in CZ2 is > 0, the AT state (advantageous zone) will end when the number of coins acquired in the AT state is 2,400 or less, so this is to give the player a sense of satisfaction that they have acquired game value up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone.

<Other gaming machines>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that does not use medals and only exchanges electronic data, in which case the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and inserting the game medium includes inputting electronic data from a specific external device (an electronic storage device having a function capable of electronically storing the number of medals dispensed and the number of medals acquired by winning), and paying out the game medium includes outputting electronic data to the specific external device (electronic storage device). In the case of such medal-less slot machines, counting of game media is possible at any time, so that counting is possible and a notification regarding counting is made even when, for example, the above-mentioned recommended operation notification is being executed.

<Summary of this example>
(1) Some gaming machines execute effects using reels. For example, JP 2013-094347 A discloses a gaming machine that executes a reel effect when a specific combination is won and stopping operations are performed in a specific operation sequence.

However, in the reel effect of the above document, if the conditions for executing the reel effect are met, the reel effect will be executed even if the eye-pressing operation is unsuccessful, which results in an ineffective reel effect and an unattractive display of the reel effect.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that has a good-looking reel display mode when performing reel effects.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
A symbol display means (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which is driven to rotate;
A display area (e.g., a reel window 113) in which the symbol display means can be viewed;
A specific event execution means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a pseudo game related process S105, etc.) capable of executing a specific event (e.g., a reel effect such as a reel action, a sound output, a lamp effect, a freeze process, etc.);
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event when a specific situation (for example, a tenpai situation) occurs;
the specific event execution means is means for not executing the specific event when the specific situation does not exist,
The specific situation is a situation in which the symbol display means is in a specific display mode in the display area.
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, when the display mode of the symbol display means is in a specific display mode, a specific event is executed, and when the display mode is not in the specific display mode, the specific event is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent inconsistencies between the display mode of the symbol display means and the execution of a specific event. In other words, according to the first basic configuration, it is possible to achieve consistency between the results and the presentation, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a good-looking display mode of the symbol display means.

In the first basic configuration,
The specific situation is a situation in which, at a first time point (e.g., at the time point of the second stop operation), the symbol display means is in the specific display mode (e.g., a display mode in which a peach seven symbol is in tenpai on a predetermined performance line) in the display area,
the specific event execution means is means for executing the specific event at a second time point (e.g., a time point of a third stop operation) after the first time point when the specific situation exists at the first time point;
the specific event execution means is means for not executing the specific event at the second time point when the specific situation does not exist at the first time point;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies between the display mode of the pattern display means at a first point in time and the execution of a specific event at a second point in time.

In a preferred configuration A1,
The symbol display means is composed of a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112),
a plurality of stop operation receiving means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for stopping each of the plurality of reels;
the first time point being a time point after a first stop operation and before a final stop operation for the plurality of reels;
The second time point is the time point of the final stop operation.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A2.

According to the preferred configuration A2, it is possible to determine whether or not a specific event will be executed based on the final stop operation depending on the display state before the final stop operation, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

In a preferred configuration A2,
The plurality of types of symbols include a specific symbol (e.g., a peach seven symbol),
The specific display mode is a display mode in which the specific pattern is in tenpai status in the display area.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, a specific event is executed when a specific pattern is displayed in a tenpai state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In a preferred configuration A3,
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event regardless of which line the specific pattern is in tenpai status on in the display area.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A4.

The preferred configuration A4 allows players freedom in the timing of their stopping operations, allowing them to enjoy a variety of games.

In a preferred configuration A4,
The specific event is an effect related to the plurality of reels.
This is referred to as preferred configuration A5.

The preferred configuration A5 can prevent inconsistencies between the reel display mode and the reel presentation.

In a preferred configuration A5,
The specific event is a performance in which the specific pattern is displayed on the line on which the specific pattern is in tenpai status in the display area based on the final stop operation.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A6.

According to the preferred configuration A6, a reel effect is executed in which a specific symbol stops on a line where the specific symbol is in tenpai status based on the final stopping operation, so that the player can experience a sense of accomplishment and something special.

In a preferred configuration A6,
the specific event execution means is means for executing the specific event regardless of which of the plurality of reels the final stop operation is performed on.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A7.

The preferred configuration A7 allows players to have more freedom in the order in which they perform the stop operations, allowing them to enjoy more variety in their play.

In the preferred configuration A1, the preferred configuration A2, the preferred configuration A3, the preferred configuration A4, the preferred configuration A5, the preferred configuration A6, or the preferred configuration A7,
a permission means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a pseudo game flag, etc.) for permitting the specific event execution means to execute the specific event at a time point prior to the first time point;
the specific event execution means is means for executing the specific event when the allowing means allows the execution of the specific event and the specific situation exists;
the specific event execution means is means for allowing the specific event to be executed by the allowing means and not executing the specific event when the specific situation does not exist;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A8.

According to the preferred configuration A8, by allowing the execution of a specific event in advance, the control load at the first and second points in time can be reduced.

(2) Some gaming machines impose a penalty when an unrecommended stopping operation is performed (for example, JP 2011-125640 A, JP 2016-107129 A).

However, gaming machines that impose such penalties are configured to issue a warning message when a penalty is imposed, but the message is uniform and may not be appropriate to the progress of the game.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into consideration the progress of the game, even when a penalty is imposed.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
An operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by a player;
A notification means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
A specific event execution means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a specific event (e.g., a performance such as a continuous performance, a performance process for executing a performance such as a continuous performance),
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event again in a game following the first game when the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event is executed (for example, FIG. 97).
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, if a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in a first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player can understand the content of the specific event.

In the second basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, forward push (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
the notification means is means for executing the predetermined notification when an operation of a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (e.g., center push (during the first stop operation), reverse push (right of the first stop operation)) is performed,
The specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation during a game in which the first presentation process is executed and a prescribed notification is issued, the first presentation process is executed again during the next game, so that even if the player makes an operational mistake and is unable to understand the contents of the first presentation process, the player can still understand the contents of the first presentation process during the next game.

In a preferred configuration B1,
the notification means is a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., left press recommendation display d1) regarding the recommended operation mode as the predetermined notification on a display unit (e.g., a display screen of liquid crystal display device 157);
the specific event execution means is a first performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a first performance display (e.g., a performance image of a continuous performance) based on the execution of the first performance process on the display unit,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display by superimposing it on a display area of the first performance display (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
When the display means displays the predetermined display in a manner superimposed on a display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B2.

According to the preferred configuration B2, even if a part of the first presentation display becomes obscured by the predetermined display, the content of the first presentation display can be understood in the next game.

In a preferred configuration B2,
A lottery result means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a winning role internal lottery process) is provided for determining the lottery result of the winning role based on the lottery information.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (e.g., a push order bell win) as the lottery result,
the first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of game value (for example, the number of medals paid out) to be awarded varies depending on the operation mode of the operation means.
This is referred to as preferred configuration B3.

According to the preferred configuration B3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first performance display, it is possible to prevent the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration B3,
The game includes a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated and have a plurality of different patterns applied thereto;
the operation means are a plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which a larger number of game values are awarded when the stop operation means corresponding to a specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode in which the stop operation means corresponding to a reel other than the specific reel among the multiple reels is operated first than when the stop operation means corresponding to the specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push, first stop operation left) (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, while the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.).
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B4.

According to the preferred configuration B4, the base for awarding game value can be lowered by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of game value awarded varies depending on the manner in which the stop operation means is operated.

In a preferred configuration B4,
A first game state (e.g., a normal state) and a second game state (e.g., an AT state) which is more advantageous than the first game state and in which a notification of an operation mode is executed, and a game state control means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a game state control process S111) for controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state,
the specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
the non-specific operation manner is the non-recommended operation manner,
The game state control means is a means for executing a first process (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of lowering the probability of conducting an AT lottery, a process of not conducting or suppressing an additional lottery if an AT has been won in the previous game, a process of not counting the number of games toward the ceiling, etc.) in relation to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when an operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game of the first game state,
The game state control means is a means for executing a second process (such as a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of increasing the probability of drawing an AT lottery, a process of drawing an additional lottery if an AT has been won in the previous game, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.) in relation to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is operated in the first game of the first game state,
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in terms of transition control from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, by setting an operation mode that does not award the first amount of game value but is not disadvantageous in terms of transition control as the recommended operation mode, it is possible to lower the base for awarding game value in the first game state while correspondingly increasing the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state.

In a preferred configuration B5,
the notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first gaming state.
This is referred to as preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, when an operation of a non-specific operation mode is performed, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that the operation of the recommended operation mode can be made known.

In a preferred configuration B4,
The specific lottery result includes a first specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL),
The first specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when an operation means corresponding to a first reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first specific operation manner (e.g., sequential push), a first quantity (e.g., 9 coins) of game value is not awarded, and, when an operation means corresponding to a second reel (e.g., center reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first non-specific operation manner (e.g., center push), the first quantity of game value is awarded.
The second specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when operated in the first specific operation mode, the first amount of game value is not awarded, and, when operated in a second non-specific operation mode (e.g., reverse push) in which an operation means corresponding to a third reel (e.g., the right reel 112) among the plurality of reels is operated first, the first amount of game value is awarded;
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result;
the predetermined selection result is a selection result in which a predetermined amount of game value (e.g., 9 coins, a number less than 9 coins, etc.) is awarded when the first specific operation mode is operated,
the lottery result means is capable of determining the predetermined lottery result with a fourth probability lower than a third probability obtained by adding up a first probability for determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability for determining the second specific lottery result;
This is referred to as preferred configuration B7.

According to a preferred configuration B7, the amount of game value that can be acquired in the first game state can be reduced, and the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state can be increased accordingly.

In the preferred configuration B2, the preferred configuration B3, the preferred configuration B4, the preferred configuration B5, the preferred configuration B6, or the preferred configuration B7,
A second performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second performance display (e.g., a performance image of a non-continuous performance) on the display unit,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a certain game among a series of effects performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) , etc.),
The second effect display is an effect display that is not performed across multiple games but is performed in a single game (for example, FIG. 100(b) ),
The first effect display means is a means for displaying the first effect display in a game following the first game when the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first effect display is displayed (e.g., FIG. 100(a) , etc.),
The second effect display means is a means for not displaying the second effect display in a game following the second game when the predetermined display is displayed in the second game in which the second effect display is displayed (for example, FIG. 100(b) and the like),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B8.

According to the preferred configuration B8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of effects, the content of the effects cannot be understood, so the effects are repeated in the next game. However, since repeating the effects of a single game in the next game could be redundant or could be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, the effects are not repeated. As a result, the content of the effects can be understood and the player's misunderstanding can be prevented.

(3) There are gaming machines that display the number of medals won in an advantageous state, and when the advantageous state ends and another advantageous state starts within a specified period, the number of medals won from the previous advantageous state is displayed in the current advantageous state (for example, JP 2013-220228 A).

However, if the number of coins won from the previous advantageous state is carried over and displayed in the current advantageous state, there is a problem that it may encourage gambling.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that allows players to keep track of the number of coins they have won while also suppressing their gambling tendencies.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
An update means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that executes an update process related to a predetermined event (e.g., the awarding of a gaming value);
A display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) that performs a first display (e.g., a display of the acquired number d31, d32) regarding the predetermined event updated by the update means;
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming state control means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a gaming state control process S111) that controls transitions between a plurality of gaming states,
The plurality of gaming states includes a first gaming state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to a player,
the display means is means capable of displaying the first display in the first gaming state,
The update means is a means for starting the update process from a first timing (for example, the timing when the AT state is started) in the first gaming state of the first win (hereinafter referred to as the "first gaming state of the first win");
The update means is a means for starting the update process from a second timing (for example, the timing at which the CZ2 state in the advantageous zone is started) different from the first timing in the first game state from the first winning state (hereinafter, referred to as the "first game state from the second winning state onwards"), which is considered to be a consecutive winning state from the first winning state.
This is the third basic structure.

According to the third basic configuration, the start timing of the update process is different for the first game state of the first win and the first game state of the second or subsequent wins, so that updates regarding the specified events can be divided and updates can be performed taking into account the fact that a winning streak is in progress. In other words, it is possible to grasp the update value of the specified event in the first game state while suppressing gambling greed.

In the third basic configuration,
The plurality of gaming states includes a second gaming state (e.g., a normal state (CZ2)),
The game state control means is a means capable of controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state,
The game state control means is a means for controlling a transition to the first game state of the first win when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a second game state (hereinafter referred to as a "second game state") that has not been transitioned from the first game state (for example, when an AT lottery is won),
The game state control means is a means for controlling a transition to a new second game state (hereinafter referred to as a "new second game state") when the first game state of the first win is ended,
The game state control means is a means for controlling a transition to a first game state for the second or subsequent game when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the new second game state,
The first timing is a timing at which a first gaming state of the first win is started,
The second timing is a timing related to the start of the new second gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, during a winning streak, updates can be made taking into account the degree of update of a specified event in the second game state during that time.

In a preferred configuration C1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display in the first gaming state up to the previous time in a consecutive game situation (hereinafter referred to as the "first gaming state in a consecutive game") at least in the second or subsequent first gaming state (for example, FIG. 104(d)),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C2.

According to the preferred configuration C2, it is possible to check the history of the first display up to the previous first gaming state during a consecutive win situation.

In a preferred configuration C2, the consecutive win refers to the establishment of the predetermined condition in the new second gaming state, and the transition to the first gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C3.

According to a preferred configuration C3, the first display during a winning streak can be displayed as history by repeating the transition between the first and second game states.

In a preferred configuration C3,
The predetermined event is related to the awarding of a gaming value,
The first display is an display regarding a total number of the granted game values for each of the first game states in the consecutive win mode.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, the player can grasp the total amount of game value acquired for each advantageous first game state.

In the preferred configuration C1, the preferred configuration C2, the preferred configuration C3, or the preferred configuration C4,
The game state control means is capable of controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state in an advantageous period (e.g., an advantageous period);
The game state control means is a means for ending the advantageous zone when the first game state of the first win ends (for example, when condition J in FIG. 84 is established),
The game state control means is a means for starting the new second game state in association with the start of the new advantageous zone (for example, the game consumption in CZ2 after the condition J in FIG. 84 is established),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, a new advantageous period begins when the first gaming state ends, so that even in an advantageous period with an upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest.

In a preferred configuration C5,
The advantageous section is a period that ends when a predetermined limiter condition is satisfied (for example, when condition J in FIG. 84 is satisfied),
the display means is means capable of displaying the first display that does not reflect the predetermined event in the second gaming state before the predetermined limiter condition is established in the first gaming state of the first win,
the display means is means for displaying the first display reflecting the predetermined event in the second gaming state after the predetermined limiter condition is established in the first gaming state of the first win,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration C6.

According to the preferred configuration C6, when the player completes the advantageous zone, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction that he or she has acquired gaming value up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone.

(4) Some gaming machines impose a penalty when an unrecommended stopping operation is performed (for example, JP 2011-125640 A, JP 2016-107129 A).

However, gaming machines that impose such penalties are configured to issue a warning message when a penalty is imposed, but the message is uniform and may not be appropriate to the progress of the game.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into consideration the progress of the game, even when a penalty is imposed.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
An operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by a player;
A notification means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
A specific event execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of specific events (for example, a plurality of types of continuous performances (a continuous performance in which the Lord confronts a samurai, a continuous performance in which the Lord chases an old man, etc.), a performance process for executing a plurality of types of continuous performances);
A gaming machine equipped with
the specific event execution means is means for, when the notification means executes the predetermined notification in a first game in which one of the plurality of types of specific events (for example, a continuous performance in which a lord and a samurai face off) has been executed, executing the one specific event again in a game following the first game;
the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the same notification manner regardless of which of the plurality of types of the one specific event executed in the first game is.
This is the fourth basic structure.

According to the fourth basic configuration, if a specific event and a prescribed notification are executed in a first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so the player can understand the content of the specific event. In addition, regardless of the type of specific event executed, the prescribed notification is executed in the same notification mode, so it can be clearly recognized as a notification separate from the specific event, and the prescribed notification will not be mistaken for an anticipation effect.

In the fourth basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, forward push (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification when an operation of a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (for example, a center push (during a first stop operation), a reverse push (right of a first stop operation)) is performed,
The one specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D1.

According to the preferred configuration D1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation during a game in which the first presentation process is executed and a prescribed notification is issued, the first presentation process is executed again during the next game, so that even if the player makes an operational mistake and is unable to understand the contents of the first presentation process, the player can still understand the contents of the first presentation process during the next game.

In a preferred configuration D1,
the notification means is a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., left press recommendation display d1) regarding the recommended operation mode as the predetermined notification on a display unit (e.g., a display screen of liquid crystal display device 157);
the specific event execution means is a first performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a first performance display (e.g., a performance image of a continuous performance) based on the execution of the first performance process on the display unit,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display by superimposing it on a display area of the first performance display (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
When the display means displays the predetermined display in a manner superimposed on a display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D2.

According to the preferred configuration D2, even if a part of the first presentation display becomes obscured by the predetermined display, the content of the first presentation display can be understood in the next game.

In a preferred configuration D2,
A lottery result means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a winning role internal lottery process) is provided for determining the lottery result of the winning role based on the lottery information.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (e.g., a push order bell win) as the lottery result,
the first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of game value (for example, the number of medals paid out) to be awarded varies depending on the operation mode of the operation means.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D3.

According to a preferred configuration D3, the conditions for re-executing the first performance display can be limited to prevent the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration D3,
The game includes a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated and have a plurality of different patterns applied thereto;
the operation means are a plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which a larger number of game values are awarded when the stop operation means corresponding to a specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode in which the stop operation means corresponding to a reel other than the specific reel among the multiple reels is operated first than when the stop operation means corresponding to the specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push, first stop operation left) (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, while the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.).
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D4.

According to the preferred configuration D4, the base for awarding game value can be lowered by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of game value awarded varies depending on the manner in which the stop operation means is operated.

In a preferred configuration D4,
A first game state (e.g., a normal state) and a second game state (e.g., an AT state) which is more advantageous than the first game state and in which a notification of an operation mode is executed, and a game state control means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a game state control process S111) for controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state,
the specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation manner is the non-recommended operation manner,
The game state control means is a means for executing a first process (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of lowering the probability of conducting an AT lottery, a process of not conducting or suppressing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of not counting the number of games toward the ceiling, etc.) with respect to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when an operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of not counting the number of games toward the ceiling, etc.),
The game state control means is a means for executing a second process (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of increasing the probability of drawing an AT lottery, a process of drawing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.) in relation to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when an operation of the specific operation mode is performed in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.),
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in terms of transition control from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as preferred configuration D5.

According to the preferred configuration D5, by setting an operation mode that does not award the first amount of game value but is not disadvantageous in terms of transition control as the recommended operation mode, it is possible to lower the base for awarding game value in the first game state while correspondingly increasing the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state.

In a preferred configuration D5,
the notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D6.

According to the preferred configuration D6, when an operation of a non-specific operation mode is performed, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that the operation of the recommended operation mode can be made known.

In a preferred configuration D4,
The specific lottery result includes a first specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL),
The first specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when an operation means corresponding to a first reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first specific operation manner (e.g., sequential push), a first quantity (e.g., 9 coins) of game value is not awarded, and, when an operation means corresponding to a second reel (e.g., center reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first non-specific operation manner (e.g., center push), the first quantity of game value is awarded.
The second specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when operated in the first specific operation mode, the first amount of game value is not awarded, and, when operated in a second non-specific operation mode (e.g., reverse push) in which an operation means corresponding to a third reel (e.g., the right reel 112) among the plurality of reels is operated first, the first amount of game value is awarded;
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result;
the predetermined selection result is a selection result in which a predetermined amount of game value (e.g., 9 coins, a number less than 9 coins, etc.) is awarded when the first specific operation mode is operated,
A preferred configuration D7 is that the lottery result means is capable of determining the specified lottery result with a fourth probability lower than a third probability obtained by adding up a first probability for determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability for determining the second specific lottery result.

According to a preferred configuration D7, the amount of game value that can be acquired in the first game state can be reduced, and the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state can be increased accordingly.

In the preferred configuration D2, the preferred configuration D3, the preferred configuration D4, the preferred configuration D5, the preferred configuration D6, or the preferred configuration D7,
A second performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second performance display (e.g., a performance image of a non-continuous performance) on the display unit,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a certain game among a series of effects performed over a plurality of games (e.g., FIG. 100(a)),
The second effect display is an effect display that is not performed across multiple games but is performed in a single game (e.g., FIG. 100(b)),
The first effect display means is a means for displaying the first effect display in a game subsequent to the first game when the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first effect display is displayed (e.g., FIG. 100(a) ),
The second effect display means is a means for not displaying the second effect display in a game following the second game when the predetermined display is displayed in the second game in which the second effect display is displayed (e.g., FIG. 100(b) ),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D8.

According to the preferred configuration D8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of effects, the content of the effects cannot be understood, so the effects are repeated in the next game. However, since repeating the effects of a single game in the next game could be redundant or could be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, the effects are not repeated. As a result, the content of the effects can be understood and the player's misunderstanding can be prevented.

(5) Some gaming machines impose a penalty when an unrecommended stopping operation is performed (for example, JP 2011-125640 A, JP 2016-107129 A).

However, gaming machines that impose such penalties are configured to issue a warning message when a penalty is imposed, but the message is uniform and may not be appropriate to the progress of the game.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into consideration the progress of the game, even when a penalty is imposed.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
An operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by a player;
A notification means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
A specific event execution means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a specific event (e.g., a performance such as a continuous performance, a performance process for executing a performance such as a continuous performance),
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event again in a game following the first game when the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event is executed (for example, FIG. 97 ),
The notification means continues executing the predetermined notification until at least a predetermined time (e.g., a predetermined time T1 in FIG. 98) has elapsed (e.g., FIG. 98).
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, if a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in a first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so the player can understand the content of the specific event. In addition, the predetermined notification is continued for a predetermined time, so it can be distinguished from a performance that is displayed only for a moment when an operation is performed.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of this example (for example, the slot machine 100),
A plurality of operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by a player;
A notification means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
A specific event execution means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a specific event (e.g., a performance process for executing a performance such as a continuous performance);
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event again in a game following the first game when the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event is executed (for example, FIG. 97 ),
The notification means continues to execute the predetermined notification at least until an operation is performed on the operation means that is the last operation of the plurality of operation means (for example, FIG. 99 ).
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to the sixth basic configuration, if a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in a first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so the player can understand the content of the specific event. In addition, the predetermined notification continues until the last operation of the multiple operations, so it can be distinguished from the effect that is displayed only for a moment when an operation is performed.

In the fifth or sixth basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, forward push (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
the notification means is means for executing the predetermined notification when an operation of a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (e.g., center push (during the first stop operation), reverse push (right of the first stop operation)) is performed,
The specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E1.

According to the preferred configuration E1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation during a game in which the first presentation process is executed and a prescribed notification is issued, the first presentation process is executed again during the next game, so that even if the player is unable to grasp the contents of the first presentation process due to an operational error by the player, the contents of the first presentation process can be grasped during the next game.

In a preferred configuration E1,
the notification means is a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., left push recommendation display d1) related to the operation means as the predetermined notification on a display unit (e.g., a display screen of liquid crystal display device 157);
the specific event execution means is a first performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a first performance display (e.g., a performance image of a continuous performance) based on the execution of the first performance process on the display unit,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display by superimposing it on a display area of the first performance display (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
When the display means displays the predetermined display in a manner superimposed on a display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E2.

According to the preferred configuration E2, even if a part of the first presentation display becomes obscured by the predetermined display, the content of the first presentation display can be understood in the next game.

In a preferred configuration E2,
A lottery result means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a winning role internal lottery process) is provided for determining the lottery result of the winning role based on the lottery information.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (e.g., a push order bell win) as the lottery result,
the first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of game value (for example, the number of medals paid out) to be awarded varies depending on the operation mode of the operation means.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E3.

According to the preferred configuration E3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first performance display, it is possible to prevent the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration E3,
The game includes a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated and have a plurality of different patterns applied thereto;
the operation means are a plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which a larger number of game values are awarded when the stop operation means corresponding to a specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode in which the stop operation means corresponding to a reel other than the specific reel among the multiple reels is operated first than when the stop operation means corresponding to the specific reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the multiple reels is operated in a specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push, first stop operation left) (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, while the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.).
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E4.

According to the preferred configuration E4, the base for awarding game value can be lowered by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of game value awarded varies depending on the manner in which the stop operation means is operated.

In a preferred configuration E4,
A first game state (e.g., a normal state) and a second game state (e.g., an AT state) which is more advantageous than the first game state and in which a notification of an operation mode is executed, and a game state control means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a game state control process S111) for controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state,
the specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation manner is the non-recommended operation manner,
The game state control means is a means for executing a first process (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of lowering the probability of conducting an AT lottery, a process of not conducting or suppressing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of not counting the number of games toward the ceiling, etc.) with respect to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when an operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of not counting the number of games in the first game state, etc.),
The game state control means is a means for executing a second process (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of increasing the probability of drawing an AT lottery, a process of drawing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.) in relation to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is operated in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.),
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in terms of transition control from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as preferred configuration E5.

According to the preferred configuration E5, by setting an operation mode that does not award the first amount of game value but is not disadvantageous in terms of transition control as the recommended operation mode, it is possible to lower the base for awarding game value in the first game state while correspondingly increasing the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state.

In a preferred configuration E5,
the notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E6.

According to the preferred configuration E6, when an operation of a non-specific operation mode is performed, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that the operation of the recommended operation mode can be made known.

In a preferred configuration E5,
The specific lottery result includes a first specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL),
The first specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when an operation means corresponding to a first reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first specific operation manner (e.g., sequential push), a first quantity (e.g., 9 coins) of game value is not awarded, and, when an operation means corresponding to a second reel (e.g., center reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first non-specific operation manner (e.g., center push), the first quantity of game value is awarded.
The second specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when the operation is performed in the first specific operation mode (e.g., forward push), the first amount of game value is not awarded, and, when the operation is performed in a second non-specific operation mode (e.g., reverse push) in which the operation means corresponding to a third reel (e.g., the right reel 112) among the plurality of reels is operated first, the first amount of game value is awarded.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as the lottery result;
The predetermined lottery result is a lottery result in which a predetermined amount of game value (e.g., 9 coins, a number less than 9 coins, etc.) is awarded when the first specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push) is operated,
the lottery result means is capable of determining the predetermined lottery result with a fourth probability lower than a third probability obtained by adding up a first probability for determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability for determining the second specific lottery result;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E7.

According to the preferred configuration E7, the amount of game value that can be acquired in the normal state can be reduced, and the amount of game value that can be acquired in the AT state can be increased accordingly.

In the preferred configuration E2, the preferred configuration E3, the preferred configuration E4, the preferred configuration E5, the preferred configuration E6, or the preferred configuration E7,
A second performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second performance display (e.g., a performance image of a non-continuous performance) on the display unit,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a certain game among a series of effects performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) , etc.),
The second effect display (for example, an effect image of a non-continuous effect) is an effect display that is not performed across multiple games but is performed in a single game (for example, FIG. 100(b) and the like),
The first effect display means is a means for displaying the first effect display in a game following the first game when the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first effect display is displayed (e.g., FIG. 100(a) , etc.),
The second effect display means is a means for not displaying the second effect display in a game following the second game when the predetermined display is displayed in the second game in which the second effect display is displayed (for example, FIG. 100(b) and the like),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E8.

According to the preferred configuration E8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of effects, the content of the effects cannot be understood, so the effects are repeated in the next game. However, since repeating the effects of a single game in the next game could be redundant or could be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, the effects are not repeated. As a result, the content of the effects can be understood and the player's misunderstanding can be prevented.

(6) Some gaming machines impose a penalty when an unrecommended stopping operation is performed (for example, JP 2011-125640 A, JP 2016-107129 A).

However, gaming machines that impose such penalties are configured to issue a warning message when a penalty is imposed, but the message is uniform and may not be appropriate to the progress of the game.

This example was made in consideration of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into consideration the progress of the game, even when a penalty is imposed.

According to the gaming machine of this example (e.g., slot machine 100),
An operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by a player;
A specific event execution means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a specific event (e.g., a performance such as a continuous performance, a performance process for executing a performance such as a continuous performance),
a first display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a predetermined display related to the operating means (e.g., a left-push recommendation display d1 for a recommended operation notification) at a first position (e.g., the center position of the screen) of a display unit (e.g., the display screen of liquid crystal display device 157);
A second display means capable of displaying a display related to an error (e.g., an error display d4) at a second position (e.g., a center position of the screen) of the display unit;
A display relating to the game value (e.g., a display of the number of reserved coins d6, a display of the number of inserted coins d7, and a display of the number of paid coins d8) is displayed in a third position of the display unit (e.g., a third display means capable of displaying the display at the bottom of both the left and right ends of the screen,
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event again in a game following the first game when the first display means displays the predetermined display in a first game in which the specific event is executed (e.g., FIG. 97 );
The first position and the second position overlap, while the first position and the third position do not overlap (e.g., FIG. 101 );
This is the seventh basic configuration.

According to the seventh basic configuration, if a specific event and a prescribed display are executed in a first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so the player can understand the content of the specific event. In addition, the prescribed display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the notification regarding the game value, so the player can also understand the content of the notification regarding the number of bets and payouts related to the game value.

In the seventh basic configuration, the operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, forward push (first stop operation left)),
the predetermined display is a display regarding the recommended operation mode,
the first display means is means for displaying the predetermined display when a non-recommended operation mode (e.g., center push (during a first stop operation), reverse push (right of a first stop operation)) different from the recommended operation mode is performed,
The specific event is a first performance process (e.g., a performance process for executing a continuous performance).
That is,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F1.

According to the preferred configuration F1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation during a game in which the first presentation process is executed and a specified display is displayed, the first presentation process is executed again during the next game, so that even if the player makes an operation error and is unable to understand the contents of the first presentation process, the player can still understand the contents of the first presentation process during the next game.

In a preferred configuration F1,
the specific event execution means is a first performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a first performance display (e.g., a performance image of a continuous performance) based on the execution of the first performance process on the display unit,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display by superimposing it on a display area of the first performance display (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
When the first display means displays the predetermined display in a manner superimposed on a display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, FIG. 97, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F2.

According to the preferred configuration F2, even if a part of the first presentation display becomes obscured by the specified display, the content of the first presentation display can be understood in the next game.

In a preferred configuration F2,
A lottery result means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a winning role internal lottery process) is provided for determining the lottery result of the winning role based on the lottery information.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (e.g., a push order bell win) as the lottery result,
the first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of game value (for example, the number of medals paid out) to be awarded varies depending on the operation mode of the operation means.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F3.

According to the preferred configuration F3, the conditions for re-executing the first performance display can be limited, thereby preventing the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration F3,
The game includes a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated and have a plurality of different patterns applied thereto;
the operation means are a plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which a larger number of game values are awarded when the stop operation means corresponding to a reel other than the specific reel among the multiple reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode first, compared to when the stop operation means corresponding to a specific reel among the multiple reels (e.g., left reel 110) is operated in a specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push, first stop operation left) firstly operated (e.g., the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, while the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F4.

According to the preferred configuration F4, the base for awarding game value can be lowered by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of game value awarded varies depending on the manner in which the stop operation means is operated.

In a preferred configuration F4,
The game machine includes a first game state (e.g., a normal state) and a second game state (e.g., an AT state) which is more advantageous than the first game state and in which a notification of an operation mode is executed, and includes a game state control means (e.g., a main control unit 300, a game state control process S111) for controlling a transition between the first game state and the second game state.
the specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation manner is the non-recommended operation manner,
The game state control means is a means for executing a first process (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of lowering the probability of conducting an AT lottery, a process of not conducting or suppressing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of not counting the number of games toward the ceiling, etc.) with respect to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when an operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of not conducting an AT lottery, a process of not counting the number of games in the first game state, etc.),
The game state control means is a means for executing a second process (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of increasing the probability of drawing an AT lottery, a process of drawing an additional lottery if an AT has been won by the previous game, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.) in relation to control of transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is operated in the first game of the first game state (e.g., a process of drawing an AT lottery, a process of counting the number of games toward a ceiling, etc.),
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in terms of transition control from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F5.

According to the preferred configuration F5, by setting an operation mode that does not award the first amount of game value but is not disadvantageous in terms of transition control as the recommended operation mode, it is possible to lower the base for awarding game value in the first game state while correspondingly increasing the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state.

In a preferred configuration F5,
the first display means displays the predetermined display regardless of the lottery result when the operation of the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first gaming state;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F6.

According to a preferred configuration F6,
When an operation of a non-specific operation mode is performed, a predetermined display regarding the recommended operation mode is displayed regardless of the lottery result, so that the operation of the recommended operation mode can be made known to the user.

In a preferred configuration F4,
The specific lottery result includes a first specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (e.g., winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL),
The first specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when an operation means corresponding to a first reel (e.g., left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first specific operation manner (e.g., sequential push), a first amount of game value (e.g., 9 coins) is not awarded, and, when an operation means corresponding to a second reel (e.g., center reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first in a first non-specific operation manner (e.g., center push), the first amount of game value is awarded.
The second specific lottery result is a lottery result in which, when the operation is performed in the first specific operation mode (e.g., forward push), the first amount of game value is not awarded, and, when the operation is performed in a second non-specific operation mode (e.g., reverse push) in which the operation means corresponding to a third reel (e.g., the right reel 112) among the plurality of reels is operated first, the first amount of game value is awarded.
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result;
The predetermined lottery result is a lottery result in which a predetermined amount of game value (e.g., 9 coins, a number less than 9 coins, etc.) is awarded when the first specific operation mode (e.g., sequential push) is operated,
the lottery result means is capable of determining the predetermined lottery result with a fourth probability lower than a third probability obtained by adding up a first probability for determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability for determining the second specific lottery result;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F7.

According to a preferred configuration F7, the amount of game value that can be acquired in the first game state can be reduced, and the amount of game value that can be acquired in the second game state can be increased accordingly.

In the preferred configuration F2, the preferred configuration F3, the preferred configuration F4, the preferred configuration F5, the preferred configuration F6, or the preferred configuration F7,
A second performance display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second performance display (e.g., a performance image of a non-continuous performance) on the display unit,
The first effect display is an effect display performed in a certain game among a series of effects performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) , etc.),
The second effect display is an effect display that is not performed across multiple games but is performed in a single game (for example, FIG. 100(b) ),
The first effect display means is a means for displaying the first effect display in a game following the first game when the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first effect display is displayed (e.g., FIG. 100(a) and the like),
The second effect display means is a means for not displaying the second effect display in a game following the second game when the predetermined display is displayed in the second game in which the second effect display is displayed (for example, FIG. 100(b) and the like),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration F8.

According to the preferred configuration F8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of effects, the content of the effects cannot be understood, so the effects are repeated in the next game. However, since repeating the effects of a single game in the next game could be redundant or could be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, the effects are not repeated. As a result, the content of the effects can be understood and the player's misunderstanding can be prevented.

Although the gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied have been described above, the gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and various modifications and changes can be made to the above-mentioned examples without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the above description are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the above description.

100 Slot machine 101 Main body 102 Front door 110 Left reel 111 Center reel 112 Right reel 700 Reel unit 130 to 132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137 to 139 Stop button 140 Rotation device 1401 Rotating body 144L Left side lamp 144R Right side lamp 157 Performance image display device 165 First chance button 166 Second chance button 167 Left button 168 Right button RLT Roulette display RL Roulette wheel image AR Arrow image OP Operation prompt image KR Defeat rate display image KRU Defeat rate up image SB Scroll bar SBS Slider MS Message area

Claims (5)

A first operation means that can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation modes;
a presentation means capable of executing a first game presentation having an operation effective period during which the first operation means is effective;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a first operation mode during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the first operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "first image") is displayed,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode during the operation effective period, an image corresponding to the second operation mode (hereinafter referred to as a "second image") is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A second operating means operable by a player is provided,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode and then the second operation means is operated in a certain operation mode, an image corresponding to the first image is displayed,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode and then the second operation means is operated in the same operation mode as the certain operation mode, an image corresponding to the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A second operating means operable by a player is provided,
In the first game presentation, when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode and then the second operation means is operated in a certain operation mode, an image corresponding to the first image is displayed,
In the first game presentation, even when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode and then the second operation means is operated in the same operation mode as the certain operation mode, an image corresponding to the first image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
the first operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operating means is operated in a first direction,
the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operating means is operated in a second direction,
the first image is an image representing a movement of an image in a direction corresponding to the first direction,
the second image is an image representing a movement of the certain image in a direction corresponding to the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The presentation means is also capable of executing a second game presentation having an operation effective period during which the first operation means is effective,
In the second game presentation, a common image is displayed regardless of the operation mode of the first operation means during the operation effective period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images